SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide

SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
2014
SuperSalon Software User’s Manual
NORTH
KNOWLEDGE
LIBERTY
AIN
PEACE
SOUTH
EAST
AIN
LOVE
SOPH
HAPPINESS
WEST
ABOVE
BELOW
AIN
UNTO ALL
SOPH
WHO
AUR
VIEW
Sales & Management Software for the Salon & Spa Industry
SuperSalon
Version 5
^ŽŌǁĂƌĞhƐĞƌ͛ƐDĂŶƵĂů
SuperSalon ^ŽŌǁĂƌĞhƐĞƌ͛Ɛ
DĂŶƵĂů
Phone: 888-458-1001:
For Support, Paper & Hardware Orders Press 1
For Sales Press 3
For Accounting Press 4
For Directory Press 5
For Fax, E-mail & Postal Address Press 6
E-mail: [email protected] or [email protected]
SuperSalon & Rogers POS ©Copyright Rogers Software Development Inc., 2003-2014
ZK'Z^^K&dtZs>KWDEd/E͘
SuperSalon v 5.x
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and does
not represent a commitment on the part of Rogers Software Development Inc.
This software may only be used or copied in accordance with the terms of the
software license agreement. It is against the law to copy the software through
any means except as specifically allowed in the software license agreement. No
part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording for any
purpose without the express written consent of Rogers Software Development
Inc.
Table of Contents
Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 1
Quick Reference ............................................................................................................................. 2
Checking in New Customers ................................................................................................. 2
Servicing Customers................................................................................................................. 4
Checking-Out Customers........................................................................................................ 4
Multi-Tickets ............................................................................................................................... 6
Refund/Redo .............................................................................................................................. 6
Miscellaneous ............................................................................................................................ 7
Managing Inventory................................................................................................................. 9
Close Out Procedures............................................................................................................... 9
User’s Guide .................................................................................................................................. 11
Navigating SuperSalon ........................................................................................................ 12
žĴ˜—œȱŠ—ȱ
˜ȱŽ¢œ ............................................................................................................. 12
žĴ˜—œȱ˜ž—ȱ’—ȱž™Ž›Š•˜—................................................................................................. 13
‘ŽȱŠ‹œ ................................................................................................................................... 15
The Setup Tab..........................................................................................................................16
Š¢–Ž—ȱŽ‘˜œ.....................................................................................................................16
Creating a New Payment Method ................................................................................. 17
’ĞȱŽ›’ęŒŠŽȱŠ¢–Ž—ȱŽ‘˜ ................................................................................... 18
’ĞȱŠ›ȱŠ¢–Ž—ȱŽ‘˜............................................................................................. 19
Phone Auth Payment Method ........................................................................................ 20
SVS Reward Card Payment Method ............................................................................. 21
Paid In/Out Account Codes............................................................................................. 22
Ž•ŽŒȱŠ›ȱ ’™ŽȱŽĴ’—œ .............................................................................................. 24
PC-Charge Integration ..................................................................................................... 25
IP-Charge Integration ....................................................................................................... 26
Monetra Integration .......................................................................................................... 27
Heartland Integration ....................................................................................................... 28
’ĞȱŠ›ȱ›˜ŒŽœœ˜›ȱŽž™ ............................................................................................... 29
Š•žŽŒȱ’ĞȱŠ›ȱŽĴ’—œ ............................................................................................... 30
ȱ’ĞȱŠ›ȱŽĴ’—œ...................................................................................................... 31
˜—Ž›Šȱ’ĞȱŠ›ȱŽĴ’—œ ............................................................................................. 32
˜œ’’˜—œ ................................................................................................................................... 33
Š¢›˜••ȱȦ˜—žœŽœ ...................................................................................................................... 35
Payroll Mode ................................................................................................................... 35
Request Charge ............................................................................................................... 35
Request Bonus ................................................................................................................. 35
Include Request Charge In Service Commission .................................................... 35
Minimum Wage.............................................................................................................. 35
Timecards............................................................................................................................ 36
Overtime for over 8 hours/day..................................................................................... 36
ŸŽ›’–ŽȱЎ›DZ ............................................................................................................... 36
Automatic Employee Breaks ........................................................................................ 36
ž˜–Š’Œȱ™•’ȱ‘’Ğȱ“žœ–Ž— ............................................................................... 36
Employee Payroll Method ............................................................................................ 36
Pay-periods ......................................................................................................................... 37
Commission Setup ............................................................................................................ 39
FS Matrix .......................................................................................................................... 39
CRIC Points...................................................................................................................... 39
Service Sales..................................................................................................................... 39
Service Count Bonus...................................................................................................... 40
Product Sales ................................................................................................................... 40
% Retail to Service - Product Commission................................................................ 40
% Retail to Service - Service Commission ................................................................. 40
% Retail to Total Sales - Product Commission.......................................................... 40
Service Based on Product.............................................................................................. 40
Product Brand Premium ............................................................................................... 40
Payrate Based on Production ....................................................................................... 40
Tenure Bonus ................................................................................................................... 40
Service Category Premium........................................................................................... 40
PPG Service Commission ............................................................................................. 40
Hourly Options ............................................................................................................... 40
NTA Commission........................................................................................................... 40
Additional Bonus............................................................................................................ 40
Production Fee ................................................................................................................ 41
˜–™Š—¢ȱ—˜›–Š’˜— ............................................................................................................. 43
Deposit Info ........................................................................................................................ 44
Royalties .............................................................................................................................. 45
Store Setup .......................................................................................................................... 46
Store Hours ......................................................................................................................... 47
˜ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œ ..................................................................................................................... 48
General................................................................................................................................. 48
Store Type ......................................................................................................................... 49
Language .......................................................................................................................... 49
Show Scheduler Tab ....................................................................................................... 49
Default Screen ................................................................................................................. 49
Skip Ticket Options ........................................................................................................ 49
Assume All Paid Ins are Cash ..................................................................................... 49
Open & Close ..................................................................................................................... 50
Require Opening Till Count ........................................................................................ 50
Carry over Opening till from Closing ....................................................................... 50
Allow opening till to be recounted............................................................................. 50
Allow deposits to be edited .......................................................................................... 51
Expected Opening Till Amount.................................................................................. 51
Add Drops to Close Out Totals.................................................................................... 51
Use Opening Till or Counted Till ............................................................................... 51
Automatically close out salon ...................................................................................... 51
Auto close out time......................................................................................................... 51
Auto void open tickets with reason ............................................................................ 51
Auto complete rung out tickets ................................................................................... 51
Run with unopened till ................................................................................................. 51
Run with existing close out .......................................................................................... 51
Inventory ............................................................................................................................. 52
Allow Clearance Price Discount.................................................................................. 52
Average Inventory Type ................................................................................................ 52
Inventory Manager - Enable [Enter] to Update Product......................................... 52
Show Option to Add Returns to Inventory (Put Back on Shelf)........................... 53
Block Back Bar Product Sale ......................................................................................... 53
Track Pricing History..................................................................................................... 53
›˜–™ȱ˜›ȱ™•˜ŠȱЎ›ȱ›˜žŒȱ›Ž›ȱ’œȱ›Ž›Žȱ•ŽŒ›˜—’ŒŠ••¢ .................... 53
Display Store Quantity .................................................................................................. 53
Remember Last Product Search .................................................................................. 53
“žœȱŽŠœ˜—œ ................................................................................................................ 53
Appointments .................................................................................................................... 54
‘˜ ȱ™™˜’—–Ž—ȱŠ‹ȱǻ›ŽœœȱśȱЎ›ȱŠŸŽȱŽĴ’—œǼ .......................................... 54
Manually Assign Resources ......................................................................................... 54
Show Optimum Book Intervals................................................................................... 54
Void Waiting/Servicing Tickets when Deleting Itinerary ...................................... 55
Limit Employee Selection by Request Type .............................................................. 55
Allow Duration to be Edited ........................................................................................ 55
Display the Post Booking Summary .......................................................................... 55
Display Customer Gender on Appointment ............................................................ 55
Default Screen Main or Resource View ..................................................................... 55
ŽŽ™ȱŠŽȱŠ—ȱ’–ŽȱЎ›ȱ™™˜’—–Ž—ȱŒ’˜—œ................................................... 55
Track Booking and Editing Employees for Appointments.................................... 55
Track Request Types....................................................................................................... 55
Track Appointment Requests on Production Report .............................................. 55
Track Customer Sources................................................................................................ 55
••˜ ȱŽšžŽœȱ¢™Žœȱ˜ȱ‹Žȱ’ŽȱЎ›ȱ™™˜’—–Ž—ȱ›ŽŠ’˜—......................... 55
••˜ ȱ˜ž›ŒŽȱ˜ȱ‹Žȱ’ŽȱЎ›ȱ™™˜’—–Ž—ȱ›ŽŠ’˜—....................................... 55
•Šœ‘ȱ˜Žœȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ’ȱ˜ŽœȱŠ›Žȱ›ŽœŽ—..................................................................... 56
Days to Check for Duplicate Booking ........................................................................ 56
Appointment Screen Timeout in Seconds................................................................. 56
Appointment Time Interval ......................................................................................... 56
›˜žŒœȱĴŠŒ‘Žȱ˜ȱ™™˜’—–Ž—œȱŽŠž•ȱ˜ȱ
˜žœŽȱŠ•Žȱ˜›ȱ˜––’œœ’˜— .. 56
Security & Privacy ............................................................................................................ 57
Authentication Dialog Mode........................................................................................ 57
ž˜ȱ˜ȱžȱŠȱŠ•ŽœȱŒ›ŽŽ—ȱǻ›ŽœœȱśȱЎ›ȱŠŸŽȱŽĴ’—œǼ................................. 57
Allow Ticket to be Edited in Servicing ...................................................................... 58
Allow Editing of Previous Day Tickets ...................................................................... 58
Enable Upload Based Lock Down .............................................................................. 58
Upload Lock Down Interval......................................................................................... 58
Time Clock & Scheduling................................................................................................ 59
Disable Time Clock Reports ......................................................................................... 59
Require Password for Clock In/Out............................................................................ 59
Only Show Employee Position In Time Clock ......................................................... 59
Schedule Based Time Clock ......................................................................................... 60
Default Schedule Screen................................................................................................ 60
Amount of Time Allowed to Schedule Outside Store Hours................................ 60
Wait Time .............................................................................................................................61
Wait Time Calculation ....................................................................................................61
Wait Time Disabled .........................................................................................................61
Default Service/Default Time ....................................................................................... 62
Assumed Walk-In Rate % ............................................................................................. 62
Wait Time Tuner %......................................................................................................... 62
Wait Time Refresh Rate % ............................................................................................ 62
Factor in Employees Schedules.................................................................................... 62
Factor in Appointments................................................................................................. 62
Check-In Kiosk ................................................................................................................... 63
Œ‘˜˜•ȱŽĴ’—œ ................................................................................................................... 64
Customers ........................................................................................................................... 65
First Name ........................................................................................................................ 65
Last Name ........................................................................................................................ 65
Middle Name................................................................................................................... 65
Home Phone .................................................................................................................... 66
Work Phone ..................................................................................................................... 66
Cell Phone ........................................................................................................................ 66
Country............................................................................................................................. 66
Zip ...................................................................................................................................... 66
City .................................................................................................................................... 66
State ................................................................................................................................... 66
Address 1.......................................................................................................................... 66
Address 2.......................................................................................................................... 66
E-mail ................................................................................................................................ 66
Date of Birth ..................................................................................................................... 66
Gender .............................................................................................................................. 66
Tickets & Sales.................................................................................................................... 67
Discounts Return to First Page .................................................................................... 67
Show Customer Information in Release Header ..................................................... 67
Allow Edit Commission at Checkout......................................................................... 67
Require All Tickets Closed Before Closeout ............................................................. 68
Enable Service Requests in System ............................................................................. 68
Set Active Stylist to Commission on Checkout ........................................................ 68
‘˜ ȱ˜’ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜—ȱ‘ŽŒ”˜ž ................................................................................... 68
Use Gender Based Pricing ............................................................................................ 68
Enable Price Groups ....................................................................................................... 68
Allow Duplicate Services in Package ......................................................................... 68
Ž›Ÿ’ŒŽœȱ‹žĴ˜—œȱ’—ȱžœ˜–Ž›ȱ˜˜”ž™ ....................................................................... 68
Allow Split Commission in Service Setup ................................................................ 68
Auto Prompt for Split Commission in Checkout ..................................................... 68
Enable Auto Discounting.............................................................................................. 68
Rearrange Details in Sales Register ............................................................................ 69
˜ž—ȱěȱ‘ŽȱŠ¢–Ž—ȱ–˜ž—................................................................................ 69
Enable HUL Series Sale ................................................................................................. 69
Enable HUL Package Sale............................................................................................. 69
Skip Ticket Options ........................................................................................................ 69
Auto Complete All Tickets in a Multiticket............................................................... 69
Ringout Sale Automatically .......................................................................................... 69
Complete Sale Automatically/Number of Seconds to Wait on Auto Complete
Ticket ................................................................................................................................. 69
ž˜–Š’ŒŠ••¢ȱ˜’ȱŠ’’—ȱ’Œ”ŽœȱЎ› ................................................................ 69
Show Clocked in Employees on Lookup Screen by Default ................................. 69
Show Non Clocked in Employees on Lookup Screens .......................................... 69
Display 'Next Available Stylist' .................................................................................... 70
Use Logged in Employee as Receptionist.................................................................. 70
Allow Selection of "House Sale" for Ticket Receptionist ........................................ 70
Default Employee List for Employee Selection......................................................... 70
Default Employee List for Quick Sale Tickets........................................................... 70
Default Checkout List .................................................................................................... 70
Allow Services to be Pre-Selected ............................................................................... 70
Sort Pre-Selected Services by ....................................................................................... 70
Require Pre-Selected Services ...................................................................................... 71
Pass Pre-Selected Services to Check-Out................................................................... 71
Show Service Price When Pre-Selecting Services.................................................... 71
Void Reasons ................................................................................................................... 71
Reports................................................................................................................................. 72
Show Today Sales Stats.................................................................................................. 72
Haircut Min Flag Time .................................................................................................. 72
Haircut Max Flag Time ................................................................................................. 73
Base Cut Price .................................................................................................................. 73
Include Requests in Service Sales................................................................................ 73
ŽȱŽę—’’˜—œȱȬȱ‘’•ȦŽŽ—Ȧž•............................................................................ 73
Mini-Production Report - Display Gross Column .................................................. 73
Weekly Report Start Day............................................................................................... 73
Show 'Additional Time' as 'Personal Time' ................................................................ 73
Tips ........................................................................................................................................74
’™ȱ“žœ–Ž—œȱ˜—ȱ’–ŽŒ•˜Œ” .....................................................................................74
Subtract Tips on Close Out ............................................................................................74
Subtract Tips From Change on Checkout ..................................................................74
Track Employee Tips ...................................................................................................... 75
Only Show Tip Prompt for Service Sales................................................................... 75
Auto Credit Tip ĺ Employee....................................................................................... 75
Force Minimum Tip Amount ...................................................................................... 75
Force All Change as Tip ................................................................................................ 75
Enable Tips Paid Out ..................................................................................................... 75
••˜ ȱ’™œȱ˜ȱ‹ŽȱŠ“žœŽȱ—ŽŠ’ŸŽ•¢........................................................................... 75
Credit Card Tip Warning.............................................................................................. 75
Allow Tip Limit............................................................................................................... 75
Tip Limit Percentage ...................................................................................................... 75
Walk Accounts ................................................................................................................... 76
Text Before Balance......................................................................................................... 76
Ž¡ȱЎ›ȱŠ•Š—ŒŽ........................................................................................................... 76
Show During Appointment Booking......................................................................... 76
Show in Servicing From Appointment ...................................................................... 76
Show During New Ticket Creation ............................................................................ 77
Show in Servicing From Waiting Tickets .................................................................. 77
Show in Service Ticket Receipt .................................................................................... 77
Add Walk Account ......................................................................................................... 77
SMS & E-mail ..................................................................................................................... 78
Allow SMS Feedback System ....................................................................................... 78
Enable SMS Messaging ................................................................................................. 79
Salon Mobile Number ................................................................................................... 79
SMS Account Balance .................................................................................................... 79
Appointment Alert Message ........................................................................................ 79
™™˜’—–Ž—ȱ˜—ę›–Š’˜—ȱŽœœŠŽ ........................................................................ 79
Appointment Reminder Message ............................................................................... 79
Checkout Alert Message ............................................................................................... 79
Return Visit Reminder Message.................................................................................. 79
Birthday Alert Message ................................................................................................. 79
Memberships ...................................................................................................................... 80
Enable Membership Auto Discounting ..................................................................... 80
˜¢Š•¢ȱǭȱ’Ğ..................................................................................................................... 81
—Š‹•Žȱ’ĞȱŽ›’ęŒŠŽȱ¢œŽ–...................................................................................... 81
›ŽŸŽ—ȱŽŠ’ŸŽȱ’ĞȱŽ›’ęŒŠŽȱŠ•Š—ŒŽœ................................................................ 81
Accept SVS Reward Cards............................................................................................ 81
When 'Pay Now' Pressed, Prompt for SVS Reward Cards .................................... 82
Apply Reward Cards to ................................................................................................ 82
SVS Reward Card Discount Code............................................................................... 82
Points System................................................................................................................... 82
Allow Manual Changes to Customer Points ............................................................ 82
Add Points When Redeemed....................................................................................... 82
Add Loyalty Card on Add Customer Screen ........................................................... 82
Loyalty Cards Able to Track Commissions .............................................................. 82
Customer Lookup & Tracking ........................................................................................ 83
Use Customer Database ................................................................................................ 83
••˜ ȱžœ˜–Ž›ȱ˜˜”ž™ȱȈ”’™Ȉȱ‹žĴ˜— ..................................................................... 83
Require Last Name......................................................................................................... 84
Auto-Select Repeat for Customers .............................................................................. 84
Auto-Select New for Customers .................................................................................. 84
New Customer Entry Mode ......................................................................................... 84
Enter Customer Description When Creating Ticket ............................................... 84
Show Membership ID on Customer Search ............................................................. 84
Customer Gender ........................................................................................................... 84
Customer Age.................................................................................................................. 84
Customer Source............................................................................................................. 84
Require New/Recurring ................................................................................................ 84
Require Quick Sale Demographics ............................................................................. 85
ž››Ž—ȱ쎛 ................................................................................................................... 85
Default Gender for New Customer............................................................................. 85
Customer Sources ........................................................................................................... 85
Centralized Customer Data............................................................................................. 86
‘˜ ȱ˜›•ȱŽŠ›Œ‘ȱ‹žĴ˜— ........................................................................................... 86
Use Regis World Search ................................................................................................ 86
Enable Auto-Update During Customer Selection ................................................... 87
Search by Name and Postcode .................................................................................... 87
Search by Primary Phone Number ............................................................................ 87
Search by Loyalty Number .......................................................................................... 87
Search by Quickpass ID ................................................................................................ 87
WebCheckin ....................................................................................................................... 88
Ž‹‘ŽŒ”’—ȱŽĴ’—œ..................................................................................................... 88
Birthday ............................................................................................................................... 89
Enable Today's Birthday Pop-Up ................................................................................. 89
Show During Appointment Booking......................................................................... 89
Show in Servicing From Appointment ...................................................................... 89
Show During New Ticket Creation ............................................................................ 89
Show in Servicing From Waiting Tickets .................................................................. 90
Show in Service Ticket Receipt .................................................................................... 90
Œ‘˜˜•ȱŽĴ’—œ......................................................................................................................... 91
ŽĴ’—œ ................................................................................................................................ 91
Prompt for Credits at Ringout...................................................................................... 91
Prompt for Grades at Ringout ...................................................................................... 92
Import File Type.............................................................................................................. 93
Fame Freedom Integration ........................................................................................... 93
Accuengine Clock Import............................................................................................. 94
Premiere Integration ...................................................................................................... 94
ž’’˜—ȱŽĴ’—œ ............................................................................................................... 95
Ž›Ÿ’ŒŽȱŽĴ’—ȱŠŽ˜›’ŽœȦŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱ›Ž’œ................................................................ 95
˜ŒŠ•ȱŽĴ’—œ........................................................................................................................... 96
—Ž›—ŽȱŽž™ .......................................................................................................................... 97
Dialup Account .................................................................................................................. 98
ĜŒŽȱ™•˜Š ..................................................................................................................... 99
Upload Estimate............................................................................................................... 100
™•˜ŠȱŽĴ’—œȱǻ™¢œǼ..................................................................................................101
UpSys Status ...................................................................................................................101
Upload Overview ..........................................................................................................101
ŽĴ’—œ.............................................................................................................................101
UpSys Password Management .................................................................................. 102
Schedule ......................................................................................................................... 102
’•’’Žœ................................................................................................................................... 103
Ž›–’œœ’˜—œ ............................................................................................................................ 104
Create Employee Permission Groups ....................................................................... 104
Enabling and Disabling Access ................................................................................. 105
Assigning Employees to a Group.............................................................................. 105
Šœ‘ȱ›Š Ž›.......................................................................................................................... 106
ŽŒŽ’™ȱ›’—Ž›....................................................................................................................... 107
Options .............................................................................................................................. 108
Print Receipt When Clock In/Out ............................................................................. 108
Print Appointments When Clocking In .................................................................. 108
Print Receipt When Servicing Customer................................................................. 108
Show Customer Color Card ....................................................................................... 109
Show Customer Perm Card........................................................................................ 109
Show Customer Hair Card ......................................................................................... 109
Print Default Service Price .......................................................................................... 109
Print Receipt for Quick Sales...................................................................................... 109
Print Receipt Automatically ....................................................................................... 109
Print Duplicate Receipt ................................................................................................ 109
Print Quick Lookup Barcode ..................................................................................... 109
Show Stylist Name on Receipt ................................................................................... 109
Show Service Codes on Receipt................................................................................. 109
Skip Customer Name on Receipt .............................................................................. 109
Show Ticket Status on Receipt ....................................................................................110
Display Sale ID in Receipt............................................................................................110
Show Stats on Receipt ...................................................................................................110
Print Package Services on Receipt..............................................................................110
Combine Taxes on Receipt...........................................................................................110
Auto Print VOIDED Receipt ........................................................................................110
Print Signature Lines on VOIDED Receipt ..............................................................110
Default Footer ....................................................................................................................110
New Customer Footer .....................................................................................................110
Additional Footer..............................................................................................................111
Custom Header .................................................................................................................111
Membership.......................................................................................................................111
Chemical Release Options..............................................................................................111
Chemical Release Questions ..........................................................................................112
Rate My Visit Footer.........................................................................................................113
Š‹Ž•ȱ›’—Ž› ...........................................................................................................................114
Zebra Printer Windows Installation ..........................................................................114
Sharing the Zebra Printer ............................................................................................114
ŽĴ’—ȱ‘ŽȱŽ‹›Šȱ›’—Ž›ȱ˜› .....................................................................................114
Aligning the Labels and Printing a Test Page .........................................................114
ž™Ž›Š•˜—ȱ˜—ꐞ›Š’˜— ...........................................................................................115
˜•Žȱ’œ™•Š¢ ............................................................................................................................116
Connecting Peripherals ...................................................................................................117
—Ž›ȱŠœœ ˜› ....................................................................................................................118
The Manager Tab ..................................................................................................................119
Ž™Š›–Ž—œ ...........................................................................................................................119
–™•˜¢ŽŽœ .............................................................................................................................. 120
Add New Employee........................................................................................................ 121
General............................................................................................................................... 122
Nick Name ..................................................................................................................... 122
Password ........................................................................................................................ 122
Position............................................................................................................................ 122
Status ............................................................................................................................... 122
Marital Status ................................................................................................................ 122
Department.................................................................................................................... 122
Permission Group......................................................................................................... 122
Scheduling Group ........................................................................................................ 123
Price Group .................................................................................................................... 123
Optimum Book Interval.............................................................................................. 123
Personal Information/Emergency Contact................................................................. 123
Payroll ................................................................................................................................ 123
Pay Period....................................................................................................................... 123
Commission Plan ............................................................................................................ 124
Notes .................................................................................................................................. 124
Allowed Service Categories & Allowed Services ..................................................... 124
Service Times.................................................................................................................... 126
Employee Scheduler ....................................................................................................... 126
Appointment Groups ..................................................................................................... 126
Scheduling Groups ......................................................................................................... 128
žœ˜–Ž›œ .............................................................................................................................. 131
Show Last Search............................................................................................................. 132
World Customer Search ................................................................................................. 132
Add Customer .................................................................................................................. 135
Customer Panel ................................................................................................................ 135
Personal .......................................................................................................................... 135
Alerts ............................................................................................................................... 135
Hair, Perm, Body, Nails, Skin, Color ......................................................................... 135
Customer Clubs ............................................................................................................... 136
History ............................................................................................................................ 136
Appointments ............................................................................................................... 136
Edit Children ................................................................................................................. 136
Billing .............................................................................................................................. 136
Customer Type ................................................................................................................. 137
Œ‘˜˜• ..................................................................................................................................... 138
Tuition ............................................................................................................................. 138
Student Credit/Student Grades .................................................................................. 138
Student Merge ............................................................................................................... 139
›˜žŒœ ................................................................................................................................. 140
Adding/Editing/Deleting Products ..............................................................................141
Product Code ................................................................................................................. 142
Description..................................................................................................................... 142
Brand, Vendor, and Category ..................................................................................... 142
Pay Commission ........................................................................................................... 142
Number of Allowed Discounts ................................................................................. 142
#Points to Credit ............................................................................................................ 142
#Points to Redeem ........................................................................................................ 142
Discount to Use When Redeeming Product ........................................................... 142
Cost $ ............................................................................................................................... 143
Last Received Cost $..................................................................................................... 143
Retail $ ............................................................................................................................ 143
Variable Priced .............................................................................................................. 143
In Stock ........................................................................................................................... 143
Employee Points............................................................................................................ 143
Track Inventory ............................................................................................................. 143
Alert Qty......................................................................................................................... 143
Par Level ......................................................................................................................... 143
Min/Max Days Cover .................................................................................................. 143
Taxable ............................................................................................................................ 143
Additional Tax............................................................................................................... 144
Additional Tax Behavior ............................................................................................. 144
Scanner Code/UPC ...................................................................................................... 144
Transition Scanner Code/UPC ................................................................................... 144
Applicable Discounts ................................................................................................... 144
Product Category............................................................................................................. 145
Edit Multiple ..................................................................................................................... 146
Auto Set Min Days/Max Days ....................................................................................147
Auto Set Min/Max .........................................................................................................147
Receive Order .................................................................................................................147
“žœȱ˜ž— ..................................................................................................................147
Quick Enter UPC ............................................................................................................. 148
Product Orders................................................................................................................. 148
Adding Products........................................................................................................... 148
Finalize the Order..........................................................................................................149
Ordering ..........................................................................................................................149
Receiving an Order .......................................................................................................149
General — Misc. Information .....................................................................................149
Create Product Order (Wizard) ................................................................................. 150
Transfer Orders ................................................................................................................ 151
Inventory Manager ......................................................................................................... 152
ŽŒŽ’ŸŽȦ“žœȱ—Ȧ“žœȱžȦ›Š—œŽ›ȱ—Ȧ›Š—œŽ›ȱžȦ˜ž— .......................... 152
Duplicate SKU Tool ......................................................................................................... 153
Import Counts .................................................................................................................. 153
›Š—œ .................................................................................................................................... 155
Ž›Ÿ’ŒŽœ .................................................................................................................................. 156
Add/Edit Service.............................................................................................................. 157
Edit Service Menu ........................................................................................................... 158
Service Code .................................................................................................................. 158
Description..................................................................................................................... 158
Category ......................................................................................................................... 158
Max Number of Discounts ......................................................................................... 158
Price ................................................................................................................................. 158
Available for Preselect.................................................................................................. 158
Estimated Time to Complete ...................................................................................... 159
Employee Points............................................................................................................ 159
Customer Points System.............................................................................................. 159
Additional Costs ........................................................................................................... 159
Includes Extra Service? ................................................................................................ 159
Non Commissionable Shop Charge ......................................................................... 159
Show on Kiosk .............................................................................................................. 159
Show on Webcheckin .................................................................................................. 159
Taxable?........................................................................................................................... 159
Additional Tax............................................................................................................... 160
Additional Tax Behavior ............................................................................................. 160
Requires a Resource ..................................................................................................... 160
Applicable Discounts ................................................................................................... 160
Included in Packages ................................................................................................... 160
Service Category ...............................................................................................................161
Subitem ...............................................................................................................................161
Quick Keys.........................................................................................................................162
ŠŒ”ŠŽœ ................................................................................................................................. 163
Edit Packages .................................................................................................................... 164
Ž›’ŽœȱŠ•Žœ............................................................................................................................. 165
’œŒ˜ž—œ ................................................................................................................................167
Edit Discount .................................................................................................................... 168
Add New Discount ..........................................................................................................169
Discount Code ................................................................................................................169
Name ................................................................................................................................169
Apply Discount to Sale Commission ........................................................................169
Discount Valid From/Through ...................................................................................169
Free Service/Bounce-Back ............................................................................................169
House Sale Only/Requires Override ........................................................................ 170
Discount Value .............................................................................................................. 170
Applies To....................................................................................................................... 170
Discount Type ............................................................................................................... 170
Discounts to Retail Price ............................................................................................. 170
Apply to Services .......................................................................................................... 170
Apply to Products......................................................................................................... 171
Apply to Customer Types ........................................................................................... 171
Auto Discount .................................................................................................................. 172
Ž—˜›œ .................................................................................................................................. 173
Žœ˜ž›ŒŽœ ................................................................................................................................174
ŽŠ›Œ‘ȱŠ•Žœ............................................................................................................................ 175
Š›ȱŽ›–’—Š•........................................................................................................................ 177
’ĞȱŠ›ȱŠ•Š—ŒŽȱ—šž’›’Žœ........................................................................................... 177
•˜œŽȱž ............................................................................................................................... 178
Counting Down the Till and Closing Out .............................................................. 178
™ŠŽ .................................................................................................................................... 180
™•˜Š .................................................................................................................................... 180
The Sales Tab (Wait/Serve Screen) ..................................................................................181
More Options ................................................................................................................... 182
Today's Sales Screen ..................................................................................................... 183
Checking in Customers.................................................................................................. 184
View Existing Customer Information ......................................................................... 185
Existing Customer Personal Information Screen................................................... 186
Customer History ......................................................................................................... 187
New Customer Screen.................................................................................................... 188
Checking in Customers with World Search ........................................................... 189
New Ticket Options Screen........................................................................................... 191
Call Aheads ................................................................................................................... 192
Chemical Release .......................................................................................................... 193
Redo/Pre-Pay/Send to Check-Out/Select Employee .............................................. 193
Ž›Ÿ’Œ’—ȱžœ˜–Ž›œ ............................................................................................................. 195
žœ˜–Ž›ȱ‘ŽŒ”Ȭž ............................................................................................................ 196
Split Commissions........................................................................................................... 198
’ĞȱŽ›’ęŒŠŽȱŠ•Žœ ........................................................................................................ 199
’ĞȱŠ›ȱŠ•Žœ ................................................................................................................. 200
Multi-Ticket Sales............................................................................................................. 201
Customer Refunds .......................................................................................................... 202
Š¢–Ž—ȱŒ›ŽŽ— ..................................................................................................................... 204
Payment Screen Tip Allocation.................................................................................. 205
Integrated Credit Card Processing ........................................................................... 206
’ĞȱŽ›’ęŒŠŽȱŽŽ–™’˜— ....................................................................................... 207
œ’—ȱ’ĞȱŠ›ȱ˜›ȱŠ¢–Ž— ..................................................................................... 208
Ž›˜›–’—ȱŠȱž’Œ”ȱŠ•Ž ....................................................................................................... 209
Quick Sale Multi-Ticket ............................................................................................... 209
Quick Sale Pre-Pay ....................................................................................................... 209
Quick Sale Wait Time and Service Time ..................................................................210
˜’’—ȱ’Œ”Žœ........................................................................................................................211
The Appointment Tab (Appointment Screen Main View) ...................................... 212
™™˜’—–Ž—ȱŒ›ŽŽ—ȱŽœ˜ž›ŒŽȱ’Ž .................................................................................... 213
™™˜’—–Ž—ȱŒ‘Žž•’— .......................................................................................................214
‘˜ ȱ™™˜’—–Ž—œȱ›˜–ȱŠ’ȦŽ›ŸŽȱŒ›ŽŽ— ......................................................................218
The Time Clock Tab.............................................................................................................219
Ž•ŽŒȱ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱŒ›ŽŽ— ..........................................................................................................219
Clock In & Out Screen.................................................................................................... 220
’’—ȱŠ—ȱ“žœ’—ȱ’–Žȱ•˜Œ”ȱ—›’Žœ .......................................................................... 222
The Scheduler Tab (Employee Scheduler) .................................................................... 224
The Messages Tab................................................................................................................ 227
ŽœœŠŽœȱŠ‹ȱŠ’—ȱŒ›ŽŽ—................................................................................................... 227
The Reports Tab ................................................................................................................... 230
Ž™˜›œȱŠ‹ȱŠ’—ȱŽ—ž ...................................................................................................... 230
Ž™˜›œȱž‹ȬŽ—žœ .............................................................................................................. 231
Ž™˜›ȱŽ›–’—˜•˜¢............................................................................................................... 232
Average Cut Time ......................................................................................................... 232
Average Time Between Cuts ...................................................................................... 232
Commission................................................................................................................... 232
Count............................................................................................................................... 232
Customer Statistics ....................................................................................................... 232
Discounts........................................................................................................................ 233
Gross/Net........................................................................................................................ 233
Gross/Net Services or Products an Hour................................................................. 234
Haircuts .......................................................................................................................... 234
Haircuts/Hour ............................................................................................................... 234
Non-Production/Production Hours.......................................................................... 234
Payment Methods......................................................................................................... 234
Products Per Guest (PPG) ........................................................................................... 235
Refund/Redo.................................................................................................................. 235
Reported +/- and Actual +/- ......................................................................................... 235
Requests.......................................................................................................................... 235
Retail to Net (RTN)....................................................................................................... 235
Retail to Service [Net] (RtS) ........................................................................................ 236
Sales Per Hour (SpH) ................................................................................................... 236
Service and Product Categories................................................................................. 236
Ticket Average ............................................................................................................... 236
Tips .................................................................................................................................. 236
Voids ................................................................................................................................ 236
˜™ž•Š›ȱŽ™˜›œ ..................................................................................................................... 237
Production Report ........................................................................................................... 238
Salon Dashboard ............................................................................................................. 239
Daily Report...................................................................................................................... 240
End of Day ........................................................................................................................ 242
Deposit Summary ........................................................................................................... 243
Monthly Financial Report.............................................................................................. 244
Service Sales...................................................................................................................... 246
Product Sales Report....................................................................................................... 247
Product Sales Detail ........................................................................................................ 248
Inventory Report.............................................................................................................. 249
Discount Usage ................................................................................................................ 252
Schedule Forecasting ...................................................................................................... 253
Timecard ........................................................................................................................... 255
Payroll ................................................................................................................................ 257
Audit Statistics ................................................................................................................. 259
Mini-Reports .................................................................................................................... 260
Mini Production Report .............................................................................................. 260
Product Count List ....................................................................................................... 260
Product Price List.......................................................................................................... 260
Salon Sales ...................................................................................................................... 260
Stylist Stats ..................................................................................................................... 260
Tip Detail ........................................................................................................................ 260
Services List ................................................................................................................... 260
Transaction..................................................................................................................... 260
Timecard..........................................................................................................................261
Technician Daily Sales.................................................................................................... 262
Reconcile Summary ........................................................................................................ 263
The Help Tab......................................................................................................................... 264
Software License Agreement .................................................................................................. 266
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Introduction
SuperSalon Point of Sale System
Please accept our warmest thanks for choosing Rogers Software’s SuperSalon Point of Sale System,
the industry leader in point of sale (POS) systems for salons, spas, and cosmetology schools around
the world!
Each release of our easy to use software reflects our ongoing committment to listening to every bit
of feedback from you, our users, and the business owners whose investments have returned several
times over after switching to SuperSalon. You will always be recognized as part of the creative force
behind SuperSalon’s development, and the real reason our system is the most user friendly and
customizable POS currently on the market. We dedicate this 2014 release of our software manual
to our clients, partners, and friends; the owners, managers, and stylists who use and depend on
SuperSalon every day.
It’s highly reccomended that you read through this manual in its entirety before attempting some
of the more advanced functions of this amazing POS. Experienced users will find this 2014 edition
of the manual to be mostly a refresher, but with important new updates in the areas of expanded
services and new integrated card processing methods.
Unless otherwise indicated, all screenshots and images herein have been taken from a demo version
of the 5.6.5 release of the SuperSalon Point of Sale. All visible client data used for demonstration
purposes reflects a fictitious salon, and does not represent actual people, living or deceased.
Thank you again for allowing us the honor of helping you realize the goals you have for your salon,
Š—ȱ”—˜ ȱ‘Šȱ ŽȱœŠ—ȱ‹Žœ’Žȱ¢˜žȱŽŸŽ›¢ȱœŽ™ȱ˜ȱ¢˜ž›ȱ“˜ž›—Ž¢ǯ
Thank you,
The SuperSalon Team
1
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Quick Reference
Checking in New Customers
1.
Search for the customer in the database:
a) ›˜–ȱ‘ŽȱœŠ•ŽœȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŽ ȱ’Œ”Žȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ‹˜Ĵ˜–ȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯ
b) The Customer Search screen will appear (Figure 1). Enter all or part of the customer’s name
or phone number into the Customer Search Field. The search results will appear. If the
customer appears in the search results, go to step 3, if not, go to step 2 for instructions on
adding them to the database.
2.
If your customer is not in the SuperSalon database, but you wish to add them to the database:
a) Ž•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱȱŽ ȱžœ˜–Ž›ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ’—ȱ‘Žȱ‹˜Ĵ˜–ȱ•ŽĞǯ
b) The Customer Information screen will appear. Enter the First Name, Last Name, Phone
ž–‹Ž›ǰȱŠ—ȱ‘Ž—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŒ˜››ŽŒȱŽ—Ž›ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱȱ‘Ž›Žȱ’œȱŠȱœ™ŠŒŽȱ‹Ž ŽŽ—ȱ‘ŽȱꛜȱŠ—ȱ
•Šœȱ—Š–Žȱ’—ȱ‘Žȱžœ˜–Ž›ȱŽŠ›Œ‘ȱꎕǰȱSuperSalon will automatically enter the customer’s
ꛜȱŠ—ȱ•Šœȱ—Š–Žȱ’—ȱ‘ŽȱŠ™™›˜™›’ŠŽȱꎕœǯȱSuperSalon also detects numbers and puts
‘Ž–ȱ’—˜ȱ‘Žȱ™‘˜—Žȱꎕǯȱ˜žȱ–Š¢ȱŠ•œ˜ȱŠœ”ȱ’ȱ‘Ž¢ȱ ˜ž•ȱ•’”Žȱ˜ȱ‹Žȱ˜—ȱ¢˜ž›ȱ–Š’•’—ȱ•’œȱ˜›ȱ
specials. If so, enter their address information. You can also solicit other information such as
Tip: When performing a customer search, partial names or the last
four digits of the phone number work well. To search for “Tanya Jones”,
typing “T Jones”, “Tanya J”, “Tanya”, “Tan”, “Tanya Jon”, “1111”, etc.,
would all be suitable to perform the search. Customer records, including
family members sharing the same number or name will be displayed.
’ž›ŽȱŗȱȬȱžœ˜–Ž›ȱ˜˜”ž™ȱŒ›ŽŽ—
2
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
‘Ž’›ȱ‹’›‘Š¢ȱ˜›ȱŽȬ–Š’•ȱŠ›ŽœœǯȱœŽȱ‘ŽȱŠ‹ȱ”Ž¢ȱ˜ȱ–˜ŸŽȱ›˜–ȱꎕȱ˜ȱꎕǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŠŸŽȱ
Š—ȱžœŽȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱꗒœ‘ȱŒ›ŽŠ’—ȱ‘Žȱ—Ž ȱ’Œ”Žǯ
c) On the New Ticket Options screen you can now select options such as New/Repeat customer,
Age Category, Customer Source, Service Requested, Request an Employee, etc. SuperSalon
can be set to auto select New Customers (Setup Tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱĺ Marketing ĺ
Customer Lookup & Tracking ĺ Auto-Select New for Customers). If you do not select a
service, it assumes a haircut for the purpose of wait time estimation.
d) ˜žȱŒŠ—ȱ—˜ ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŠ’ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ•˜ Ž›ȱ›’‘ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ’Œ”Žȱ™’˜—œȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱ˜ȱŠȱ‘’œȱ
ticket to the wait list.
3
3.
If your customer is already in the SuperSalon database:
a) Select the desired customer’s name and their information will appear in the Customer Info
˜¡ȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ›’‘ȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯȱ˜ȱŽ’ȱ‘Ž’›ȱ›ŽŒ˜›ǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱžœ˜–Ž›ȱ—˜ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱǻ•˜ Ž›ȱ•ŽĞǼȱ
˜›ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŽ¡ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱǻ•˜ Ž›ȱ›’‘Ǽȱ˜ȱŒ˜—’—žŽȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ’Œ”Žȱ™’˜—œȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯ
b) On the Ticket Options screen you can verify or choose options such as New/Repeat
customer, Age Category, Customer Source, Service Requested, Stylist Requested, etc.
SuperSalon can be set to auto select Repeat Customers (Setup Tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱĺ
Marketing ĺ Customer Lookup & Tracking ĺ Auto-Select Repeat for Customers). If you do
not select a service, it assumes a haircut for the purposes of wait time estimation.
c) ˜žȱŒŠ—ȱ—˜ ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŠ’ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ•˜ Ž›ȱ›’‘ȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱŽ ȱ’Œ”Žȱ™’˜—œȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱ˜ȱ
add this ticket to the wait list.
4.
If a customer is not purchasing a service (Quick Sale):
a) Customers who do not need to be placed into waiting or servicing and for whom you do
—˜ȱ ’œ‘ȱ˜ȱ›ŠŒ”ȱ‘ŽȱŒžœ˜–Ž›ȱ’—˜›–Š’˜—ȱ‹ŽŒŠžœŽȱ‘Ž¢ȱŠ›Žȱœ’–™•¢ȱ‹ž¢’—ȱ™›˜žŒœǰȱ’Ğȱ
ŒŽ›’ęŒŠŽœǰȱ’ĞȱŒŠ›œǰȱ˜›ȱ˜—•¢ȱ Š—ȱŠȱ›Žž—ȱŒŠ—ȱ‹ŽȱŽ—Ž›ŽȱŠœȱŠȱž’Œ”ȱŠ•ŽǯȱŠ”ŽȱŠȱ’Œ”Žȱ˜›ȱ
‘Ž–ȱžœ’—ȱ‘Žȱž’Œ”ȱŠ•Žȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ’—œŽŠȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱŽ ȱ’Œ”Žȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ˜žȱ–Š¢ȱœ’••ȱ‹ŽȱŠœ”Žȱ˜ȱ
Ž—Ž›ȱ‘Ž’›ȱŽ–˜›Š™‘’Œȱ’—˜›–Š’˜—ȱ’ȱž’Œ”ȱŠ•ŽȱŽ–˜›Š™‘’Œœȱ’œȱŽ—Š‹•Žȱ’—ȱ‘Žȱ˜Ğ Š›Žȱ
ŽĴ’—œȱ(Setup Tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱĺ Marketing ĺ Customer Lookup & Tracking ĺ
Tracking Options ĺ Require Quick Sale Demographics). Your ticket will be placed directly
into Check-Out, skipping Waiting and Servicing. If you would like to track the customer
’—˜›–Š’˜—ȱ¢˜žȱ ’••ȱœ’••ȱ—ŽŽȱ˜ȱžœŽȱ‘ŽȱŽ ȱ’Œ”Žȱ‹žĴ˜—ǰȱ‘Ž—ȱžœ˜–Ž›ȱ˜˜”ž™ǰȱŠ—ȱ
then go to Check-Out.
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Servicing Customers
1.
To Transfer a waiting customer into service:
a) —ȱ‘Žȱ’Œ”ŽǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ’‘ȱ››˜ ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯ
b) Identify the employee taking the customer by selecting an employee’s name. If the
employee’s name does not appear, please ensure the employee is clocked in and the Performs
Services? box is checked in the employee record (Manager Tab ĺ Employees ĺ Employee ĺ
General Information).
c) The employee can now take the customer for servicing.
Tip: Employees ready to take their next customer do not need to
Š’ȱž—’•ȱ‘ŽȱŒ˜–™žŽ›ȱ’œȱ›ŽŽǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱŽ¡ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱŽŸŽ—ȱ
while another customer is checking out. Select your customer and
SuperSalon will then revert back to the sale.
Checking-Out Customers
1.
To Check-Out a customer when services are completed:
a) ‘Ž—ȱ‘ŽȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ’œȱ˜—ŽȱœŽ›Ÿ’Œ’—ȱ‘ŽȱŒžœ˜–Ž›ǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ‘ŽŒ”Ȭžȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ’Œ”Žȱ
(right green arrow). You will be taken to the Check-Out screen.
b) If the service was not pre-selected and you know the service code, type it in the quick
œŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȦ™›˜žŒȱŒ˜ŽȱŽ—›¢ȱꎕȱŠȱ‘Žȱ˜™ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ‘ŽŒ”ȬžȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯȱȱ‘ŽȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱŒ˜Žȱ’œȱ—˜ȱ
”—˜ —ǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽœȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ›˜–ȱ‘ŽȱŒ’˜—œȱŽ—žȱŠ—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱŠȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱ›˜–ȱ‘Žȱ•’œǯ
c) Enter any products using the barcode scanner directly from the Check-Out screen;
Š•Ž›—Š’ŸŽ•¢ǰȱ¢˜žȱŒŠ—ȱŠ•œ˜ȱ¢™Žȱ‘Žȱ™›˜žŒȱŒ˜Žȱ’—ȱ‘Žȱšž’Œ”ȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȦ™›˜žŒȱŽ—›¢ȱꎕȱ
at the top of the Check-Out screen. If you do not know the product code or cannot scan
‘Žȱ‹Š›Œ˜ŽǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ›˜žŒœȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ›˜–ȱ‘ŽȱŒ’˜—œȱŽ—žȱŠ—ȱ‘Ž—ȱ‹›˜ œŽ›ȱ˜›ȱ¢˜ž›ȱ
selection by brand and category.
d) To add discounts, select any applicable products and services you have already added to the
’Œ”Žǰȱ‘Ž—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ’œŒ˜ž—œȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ›˜–ȱ‘ŽȱŒ’˜—œȱŽ—žȱŠ—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱŠȱ’œŒ˜ž—ȱ›˜–ȱ‘Žȱ
•’œǯȱȱ¢˜žȱ‘ŠŸŽȱŠȱ’œŒ˜ž—ȱŒ˜Žǰȱ¢˜žȱŒŠ—ȱ¢™Žȱ’ȱ’—ȱ‘Žȱšž’Œ”ȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȦ™›˜žŒȱŒ˜ŽȱŽ—›¢ȱꎕȱ
at the top of the Check-Out screen.
Tip: There are four ways to add services and products at Check-Out.
Ȋȱ ŠœŽœDZȱȱ’ȂœȱŠȱŒ˜––˜—ȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱȬȱœ’–™•¢ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ’ȱ›˜–ȱ‘Žȱ™›ŽȬ™˜™ž•ŠŽȱ•’œǯ
Ȋȱ ŠœŽ›DZȱȱ¢˜žȱ”—˜ ȱ‘Žȱ™›˜žŒȱ˜›ȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱŒ˜ŽȱŽ—Ž›ȱ’ȱ ’‘ȱ‘Žȱ—ž–‹Ž›ȱ”Ž¢œȱ
and hit enter.
Ȋȱ ŠœDZȱŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ›˜žŒœȱ˜›ȱŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽœȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱž—Ž›ȱ‘ŽȱŒ’˜—œȱŽ—žǰȱ‘Ž—ȱ
select the brand, category, and item.
Ȋȱ ŽŠ›Œ‘DZȱ¢™Žȱ’—ȱ™Š›ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ—Š–ŽȱŠ—ȱ‘’ȱŽ—Ž›ǯ
4
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
’ž›ŽȱŘȱȬȱžĴ˜—œȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ‘ŽŒ”˜žȱŒ›ŽŽ—
e) ȱ‘Žȱ–˜œȱ›ŽŒŽ—•¢ȱŽ—Ž›Žȱ’Ž–ȱ’œȱ’—Œ˜››ŽŒǰȱž—˜ȱ’ȱžœ’—ȱ‘ŽȱŽ–˜ŸŽȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ˜ȱ›Ž–˜ŸŽȱŠȱ
œ™ŽŒ’ęŒȱ•’—Žȱ’Ž–ǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ’ȱŠ—ȱ‘Ž—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŽ–˜ŸŽȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ•˜ Ž›ȱ›’‘ȱ‘Š—ȱœ’Žȱ˜ȱ
the screen.
f) ‘Ž—ȱ¢˜žȱŠ›Žȱ˜—ŽȱŠ’—ȱŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽœǰȱ›˜žŒœȱŠ—ȱ’œŒ˜ž—œǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŠ¢ȱ˜ ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯ
g) If Skip receptionist selection screen is set to “No”, you will be asked to identify who is
entering this transaction. Select the name of the employee handling the transaction (Setup
Tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱȱŠ•Žœȱĺ Ticket & Sales Employee Lookup Screens ĺ Skip
receptionist selection screen).
h) Enter the amount they are paying and then select the payment type. The arrow keys on your
keyboard can also be used to scroll through the payment types and the Enter key on your
keyboard used to select. More than one payment type may be used.
i) ˜›ȱŠȱŒ‘ŽŒ”ȱ™Š¢–Ž—ȱ˜›ȱŠȱŒ›Ž’ȱŒŠ›ȱœŠ•Žȱ ’‘ȱŠ—ȱŽ¡Ž›—Š•ȱŒ›Ž’ȱ–ŠŒ‘’—Žǰȱ’—Œ•žŽȱ‘Žȱ’™ȱ•ŽĞȱ
by the customer as part of their total payment. This is necessary to accurately track tips as
well as insure there are no problems with Closeout at the end of the night.
“Ǽȱ ˜›ȱ’—Ž›ŠŽȱŒ›Ž’ȱŒŠ›ȱ™›˜ŒŽœœ’—ȱǻȬ‘Š›ŽǰȱȬ‘Š›Žǰȱ˜—Ž›Šǰȱ
ŽŠ›•Š—Ǽȱ˜›ȱ’Ğȱ
Š›œǰȱŽ—Ž›ȱ‘Žȱ™Š¢–Ž—ȱŠ–˜ž—ȱŠ—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŒŠ›ȱ™Š¢–Ž—ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ˜žȱ ’••ȱ‹Žȱ™›˜–™Žȱ
to swipe the card through the card reader. On the next screen you will be prompted for a tip
amount. For no tip amount, enter “0” in the box and then select Process Transaction. You will
‘ŠŸŽȱ˜ȱŒ˜—ę›–ȱ‘ŽȱŠ–˜ž—ǯ
Tip: If the top payment is set to default on the payment setup screen,
¢˜žȱŒŠ—ȱœ’–™•¢ȱ‘’ȱŽ—Ž›ȱŠĞŽ›ȱ¢™’—ȱ’—ȱ‘ŽȱŠ–˜ž—ǯȱ‘’œȱ‘Ž•™œȱ’ȱŠȱ
payment type such as cash is very common.
k) Ž•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ’—ȱžȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯ
l) ˜›ȱŠȱŒ‘ŽŒ”ȱ™Š¢–Ž—ȱ˜›ȱŠȱŒ›Ž’ȱŒŠ›ȱœŠ•Žȱ ’‘ȱŠ—ȱŽ¡Ž›—Š•ȱŒ›Ž’ȱ–ŠŒ‘’—Žǰȱ’—Œ•žŽȱ‘Žȱ’™ȱ•ŽĞȱ
by the customer as part of their total payment. This is necessary to accurately track tips as
well as insure there are no problems with Closeout at the end of the night.
m) ˜›ȱ’—Ž›ŠŽȱŒ›Ž’ȱŒŠ›ȱ™›˜ŒŽœœ’—ȱǻȬ‘Š›ŽǰȱȬ‘Š›Žǰȱ˜—Ž›Šǰȱ
ŽŠ›•Š—Ǽȱ˜›ȱ’Ğȱ
Š›œǰȱŽ—Ž›ȱ‘Žȱ™Š¢–Ž—ȱŠ–˜ž—ȱŠ—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŒŠ›ȱ™Š¢–Ž—ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ˜žȱ ’••ȱ‹Žȱ™›˜–™Žȱ
to swipe the card through the card reader. On the next screen you will be prompted for a tip
amount. For no tip amount, enter “0” in the box and then select Process Transaction. You will
‘ŠŸŽȱ˜ȱŒ˜—ę›–ȱ‘ŽȱŠ–˜ž—ǯ
n) Ž•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ’—ȱžȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯ
5
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Multi-Tickets
1.
You can Check-Out families or other groups together. To pay for multiple tickets all tickets
˜ȱ—˜ȱ—ŽŽȱ˜ȱ‹ŽȱŒ˜–™•ŽŽǰȱ‹žȱ¢˜žȱ ’••ȱ—ŽŽȱ˜ȱ”—˜ ȱ ‘ŠȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽœȱ‘Ž¢ȱ ’••ȱ‹ŽȱŽĴ’—ȱœ˜ȱ
you know what to charge for.
a) If at least one ticket is ready for Check-Out, select Check-Out on the ticket. If all tickets are in
‘Žȱ Š’ȱŒ˜•ž–—ǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ˜—Žȱ˜›ȱ™›Ž™Š¢–Ž—ȱ‹¢ȱœŽ•ŽŒ’—ȱ‘Žȱ’ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱǻ˜Ž™Šȱ’Œ˜—Ǽǯȱ‘’œȱ
’••ȱŠ”Žȱ‘Žȱ’Œ”Žȱ‹ŠŒ”ȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱŒ›ŽŠŽȱ’Œ”ŽȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯȱ—ŒŽȱ‘Ž›ŽǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ›Ž™Š¢ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ‘’œȱ
ticket will be sent directly to the Check-out screen.
b) Now that one ticket is in the Check-Out screen, add the products and services that
correspond to the ticket.
c) Ž•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱȱ’Œ”Žȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ›˜–ȱ‘ŽȱŒ’˜—œȱŽ—žǯ
d) All of the tickets in Waiting and Servicing will
be displayed. Select the ticket you would like to
add. It will be added to the list of tickets for the
Œž››Ž—ȱœŠ•Žǯȱ—ȱ‘Žȱ•ŽĞȱ‘Š—ȱœ’Žȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ‘ŽŒ”Ȭ
Out screen will be a list of current customer tickets
with the active ticket being blue. Add the necessary
™›˜žŒœȱŠ—ȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽœȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ›Ž•ŽŸŠ—ȱ’Œ”ŽȱŠĞŽ›ȱ
Œ˜—ę›–’—ȱ‘Žȱ›’‘ȱ˜—Žȱ’œȱœŽ•ŽŒŽǯȱ‘’œȱ ’••ȱ
ensure that the correct services and products are
assigned to each customer and employee (for correct
commissions). Once the transaction is completed,
’ž›ŽȱřȱȬȱŠ’ȱž•Ȭ’Œ”Ž
all tickets still in the Waiting or Service Columns
’••ȱ‹ŽȱœŠ–™ŽȱȃŠ’ȱž•’Ȭ’Œ”ŽȄǯȱ‘Žȱ‘ŽŒ”Ȭžȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱǻ›’‘ȱŠ››˜ Ǽȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ’Œ”Žœȱ’—ȱ
‘ŽȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱŒ˜•ž–—ȱ ’••ȱŒ‘Š—Žȱ˜ȱŠȱ̊ǯȱ‘Žȱ̊ȱ’—’ŒŠŽœȱ‘Žȱ’Œ”Žȱ’œȱ™Š’ȱŠ—ȱœ‘˜ž•ȱ‹Žȱ
selected when the services have been completed.
Tip: If you have “Auto complete all tickets in a multi-ticket” set to “Yes”,
all tickets on the multi-ticket will complete and be removed from the
Š’ȱ˜›ȱŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱŒ˜•ž–—ȱž™˜—ȱꗒœ‘’—ȱŒ‘ŽŒ”Ȭ˜žǯ
Refund/Redo
1.
To enter a refund or redo:
a) Žž—œȦŽ˜Žœȱ˜›ȱ™›˜žŒœȱ˜›ȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽœȱŒŠ—ȱ‹Žȱ–ŠŽȱ’—ȱŒ˜—“ž—Œ’˜—ȱ ’‘ȱŠȱ›Žž•Š›ȱœŠ•Žȱ˜›ȱ
independently. Refunds/Redoes are entered on the Check-Out screen and can be added as a
line item to a regular sale. For a refund-only transaction, go to the Check-Out screen using
‘Žȱž’Œ”ȱŠ•Žȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ‘’œȱ–Ž‘˜ȱ ’••ȱ—˜ȱŠœœ’—ȱ‘Žȱ›Žž—ȱ˜ȱŠȱœ™ŽŒ’ęŒȱŒžœ˜–Ž›ȱ›ŽŒ˜›ǰȱ
although basic tracking information can be recorded when “Quick Sale Demographics” is set
to “Yes” (Setup Tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱĺ Marketing ĺ Customer Lookup & Tracking ĺ
Tracking Options ĺ Require Quick Sale Demographics).
b) Refund: —ȱ‘Žȱ‘ŽŒ”ȬžȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŽž—ȦŽ˜ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱŠ—ȱŒ‘˜˜œŽȱŽž—ǯȱ‘Ž—ȱ
select a service or product by scanning or searching for the item using the search box at the
top of the Check-Out screen. For discounted items, you will need to edit the default price to
match the sale price. Select the green arrow next to the service or product to create a refund
6
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
•’—Žȱ’Ž–ǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱŠœȱ–Š—¢ȱ’Ž–œȱŠœȱ—ŽŒŽœœŠ›¢ǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŠ¢ȱ˜ ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ—ȱ‘Žȱ’’˜—Š•ȱ
Refund Information screen select the employee who originally received commission for
the sale from the drop down menu and if a product, whether to put it back on the shelf.
Complete the transaction as normal.
c) For refunds using integrated credit card processing, click the credit card payment type
‹žĴ˜—ȱŠ—ȱŽ—Ž›ȱ‘ŽȱŠ–˜ž—ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ›Žž—ȱŠœȱŠȱ—ŽŠ’ŸŽȱ—ž–‹Ž›ǯȱ›Ž’ȱŒŠ›ȱ›Š—œŠŒ’˜—œȱ
Ž—Ž›ŽȱŠœȱŠȱ—ŽŠ’ŸŽȱŠ–˜ž—ȱ™›˜ŒŽœœȱŠœȱŠȱŒ›Ž’ȱǻ›Žž—Ǽȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱŒŠ›ǯȱ˜›ȱŽ¡Š–™•ŽDZȱȱ‘Žȱ˜Š•ȱ
amount to be refunded to a credit card is $10.00, the entry would be -10.00.
d) Redo: Create a ticket as normal for the customer, preselecting the service to be redone. At the
‘ŽŒ”ȬžȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŽž—ȦŽ˜ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ‘˜˜œŽȱŽ˜ǯȱŽŠ›Œ‘ȱ˜›ȱ‘ŽȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱ˜ȱ‹Žȱ
›Ž˜—Žȱžœ’—ȱ‘ŽȱŽ—›¢ȱꎕȱŠȱ‘Žȱ˜™ȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯȱ’ȱ‘Žȱ™›’ŒŽȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱŠœȱ—ŽŽŽȱ
and select the green arrow. A negative amount will be added to the ticket to account for
‘ŽȱŽ˜ǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŠ¢ȱ˜ ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ—ȱ‘Žȱ’’˜—Š•ȱŽ˜ȱ—˜›–Š’˜—ȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ
employee who originally received commission for the sale from the drop down menu and
select Pay Now. Complete the transaction as normal.
Miscellaneous
’ž›ŽȱŚȱȬȱŠ—Š›ȱ’Œ”ŽȱǭȱŠ••ȱ‘ŽŠȱ’Œ”Ž
Tip: SuperSalon ticket types are color-coded. The color guide is
•˜ŒŠŽȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ‹˜Ĵ˜–ȱ•ŽĞȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱŠ’ȦŽ›ŸŽȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯȱ‘Žȱ™™˜’—–Ž—ȱ
œŒ›ŽŽ—ȱŒ˜•˜›ȱž’ŽȱŒŠ—ȱ‹ŽȱŠŒŒŽœœŽȱ‹¢ȱœŽ•ŽŒ’—ȱ‘Žȱ
Ž•™ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯ
1.
7
’Œ”Žȱ‹žĴ˜—œDZ
a) Void: (Red X) Select to cancel a ticket. You will then need to select from a list of void reasons.
˜’ȱ›ŽŠœ˜—œȱŒŠ—ȱ‹ŽȱŽ’Žȱ’—ȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱ(Setup Tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱȱŠ•Žœȱĺ
Ticket & Sales ĺ Void Reasons). This is used if a customer leaves without being serviced
or if a ticket was accidentally made but not needed. Waiting tickets can be set to void
Šž˜–Š’ŒŠ••¢ȱŠĞŽ›ȱŠȱ™›ŽœŽȱŠ–˜ž—ȱ˜ȱ’–Žȱ(Setup Tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱĺ Sales ĺ
Tickets & Sales ĺȱž˜–Š’ŒŠ••¢ȱŸ˜’ȱ Š’’—ȱ’Œ”ŽœȱŠĞŽ›Ǽ.
b) Edit: (Notepad) Tickets in the Wait list can be edited at any time. This is used to change
Œžœ˜–Ž›ȱ’—˜›–Š’˜—ǰȱ›ŽšžŽœȱŠȱ’쎛Ž—ȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽǰȱ™›ŽȬ™Š¢ȱ‘Žȱ’Œ”ŽǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱŠȱ’쎛Ž—ȱ
service, or print a legal release form.
c) Send Back: ǻ›ŽŽ—ȱ•ŽĞȱŠ››˜ Ǽȱ’Œ”Žœȱ‘ŠȱŠ›Žȱ’—ȱ‘ŽȱŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱ’œȱŒŠ—ȱ‹ŽȱœŽ—ȱ‹ŠŒ”ȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱŠ’ȱ
List. This is typically used when the wrong ticket is sent to service or if a child begins crying
and wants to wait.
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
d) Hold: Tickets in the Service List can be Held. This tells SuperSalon that the service is
completed but they are not ready to Check-Out yet. This is typically used when one family
member is done, but waiting for the next to be completed, or if a customer needs to leave to
get money.
e) Late/Here: ȱŠȱ’Œ”Žȱ ŠœȱŒ›ŽŠŽȱžœ’—ȱ‘ŽȱŠ••Ȭ‘ŽŠȱ˜™’˜—ǰȱ‘ŽȱŠŽȱŠ—ȱ
Ž›Žȱ‹žĴ˜—œȱ
will appear. Select “Here” to keep a customer’s place in line from the time they called. Select
“Late” to send them to the back of the line.
2.
Amount Fields:ȱȱ‘ŽȱŠ–˜ž—ȱꎕȱ’—ȱ‘ŽȱœŽž™ȱŠ›ŽŠȱ˜›ȱŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽǰȱ›˜žŒœȱ˜›ȱ’œŒ˜ž—œȱ’œȱœŽȱ
to “0” or “variable”, you will be prompted to enter an amount during Check-Out. This allows
you to have items that accept variable pricing. For instance, you can charge $10 or $50 for a style
depending on how long it took.
’ž›ŽȱśȱȬȱŠ›’Š‹•Žȱ™›’ŒŽȱŠ–˜ž—ȱœŒ›ŽŽ—
3.
˜––’œœ’˜—ȱ‹žĴ˜—DZȱDuring Check-Out you can reallocate commission to an employee other
than the originally selected one. This might be used if one employee did the service and another
sold the product or if the customer moved from one employee to another. Another example
’œȱ ‘Ž›Žȱ˜—ŽȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ’ȱŠȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱŠ—ȱŠȱ’쎛Ž—ȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ™Ž›˜›–ŽȱŠ—˜‘Ž›ȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽǯȱ
Sometimes one employee will do a haircut but another will do the color.
4.
Ž••’—ȱǭȱŽŽŽ–’—ȱ’ȱŽ›’ęŒŠŽœDZȱ—ȱ˜›Ž›ȱ˜ȱžœŽȱ‘Žȱ’ĞȱŽ›’ęŒŠŽȱœ¢œŽ–ȱ’ȱ–žœȱꛜȱ
‹ŽȱŽ—Š‹•ŽȱŠ—ȱœŽž™ȱ˜›ȱ¢˜ž›ȱœŠ•˜—ǯȱ˜›ȱŽŠ’•Žȱ’—œ›žŒ’˜—œȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ’ĞȱŽ›’ęŒŠŽȱœ¢œŽ–ǰȱœŽŽȱ
ȃ’ĞȱŽ›’ęŒŠŽȱŠ¢–Ž—ȱŽ‘˜Ȅȱ˜—ȱ™ŠŽȱŗŞ.
5.
Editing a sale that occurred today:ȱŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŠ—ŠŽ›ȱŠ‹ǰȱ‘Ž—ȱ‘ŽȱŽŠ›Œ‘ȱŠ•Žœȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱ
‘Žȱ’Œ”Žȱ¢˜žȱ ’œ‘ȱ˜ȱŽ’ȱŠ—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ’ȱ’Œ”Žȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ‘Žȱ˜›’’—Š•ȱ’Œ”Žȱ ’••ȱ‹ŽȱœŠŸŽȱ
and voided. A replacement ticket will be placed in Check-Out. Make changes to the sales and
payment as needed.
6.
Editing a sale from a prior day:ȱŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŠ—ŠŽ›ȱŠ‹ǰȱ‘Ž—ȱ‘ŽȱŽŠ›Œ‘ȱŠ•Žœȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ—Ž›ȱ‘Žȱ
ŠŽȱ˜›ȱŠŽœȱ’—ȱ‘ŽȱœŠ›ȱŠ—ȱŽ—ȱŠŽȱꎕœǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŽŠ›Œ‘ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ’Œ”Žȱ¢˜žȱ ’œ‘ȱ
˜ȱŽ’ȱŠ—ȱ‘Žȱ’ȱ’Œ”Žȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ‘Ž›Žȱ’œȱŠ•œ˜ȱŠ—ȱ˜™’˜—ȱ˜ȱŸ˜’ȱ‘Žȱ’Œ”ŽȱŒ˜–™•ŽŽ•¢ǯ
7.
Setup Options: ˜ȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱŽž™ȱŠ‹ǰȱ‘Ž—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ˜žȱŒŠ—ȱŽ—Š‹•Žȱ˜›ȱ
disable many of SuperSalon's tracking options.
Tip:ȱŽ˜ȱ‘ŽȱŒ•˜œŽ˜žȱŠĞŽ›ȱŽ’’—ȱŠȱ’Œ”Žȱ›˜–ȱŠȱ™›’˜›ȱŠ¢ǯ
8
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Managing Inventory
1.
Adding inventory items to inventory & adjusting inventory levels:
a) ˜žȱ ’••ȱ—ŽŽȱ˜ȱŒ›ŽŠŽȱ¢˜ž›ȱ›Š—ǰȱŽ—˜›ǰȱŠ—ȱŠŽ˜›¢ȱ•’œœȱž—Ž›ȱ‘ŽȱŠ—ŠŽ›ȱŠ‹ȱꛜǯȱ
Any products you add will require this information.
b) Ž•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŠ—ŠŽ›ȱŠ‹ǰȱ›˜žŒœǰȱŠ—ȱ‘Ž—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŽ ȱ›˜žŒȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯ
c) Enter as much information as you wish. You will not be able to set inventory quantities on
‘ŽȱŽ ȱ›˜žŒȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯȱ›˜–ȱ‘Ž›Žȱ’ȱ’œȱ™˜œœ’‹•Žȱ˜ȱŠ“žœȱ‘ŽȱŒž››Ž—ȱ’—ŸŽ—˜›¢ȱŒ˜ž—ȱŠœȱ™Ž›ȱ
the instructions in the next section.
d) ˜ȱŠ“žœȱ’—ŸŽ—˜›¢ȱ•ŽŸŽ•œȱ˜—ȱŽ¡’œ’—ȱ™›˜žŒœȱ˜ȱ’›ŽŒ•¢ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ—ŸŽ—˜›¢ȱŠ—ŠŽ›ȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯȱ
Enter a product code or scan the product. The product will be listed automatically. Select the
ŽŒŽ’ŸŽǰȱ“žœȱ—Ȧžȱ˜›ȱ›Š—œŽ›ȱ—Ȧžȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱŠȱŽœŒ›’™’˜—ȱ’ȱ—ŽŽŽǰȱ‘Ž—ȱŽ—Ž›ȱŠȱ
šžŠ—’¢ȱŠ—ȱŒ˜œȱ’ȱ—ŽŽŽȱǻ“žœ–Ž—ȱŽœŒ›’™’˜—œȱŒŠ—ȱ‹ŽȱŽ’Žȱ‹¢ȱ—ŠŸ’Š’—ȱ˜ȱSetup
Tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱĺ System Inventory ĺȱ“žœȱŽŠœ˜—œǼ. Then hit the Enter key
on your keyboard (the ability to use your Enter key is enabled by navigating to Setup Tab ĺ
˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱĺ System Inventory ĺ Inventory Manager ĺ Enable [Enter] to Update
Product). Verify the quantity is correct. Use a barcode scanner to enter barcodes directly
‘Ž—ȱŠ’—ǰȱž™Š’—ǰȱ›ŽŒŽ’Ÿ’—ǰȱŠ“žœ’—ǰȱœŽŠ›Œ‘’—ǰȱ˜›ȱŽŒǯ
’ž›ŽȱŜȱȬȱ—ŸŽ—˜›¢ȱŠ—ŠŽ›
Close Out Procedures
1.
9
End of Day (and Mid-Day) closeout procedures:
a) Ž•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŠ—ŠŽ›ȱŠ‹ȱŠ—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ•˜œŽȱžȱ›˜–ȱ‘Žȱ‹žĴ˜—œȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ•ŽĞǯȱ‘Žȱ•˜œŽȱžȱ
screen will be displayed.
b) ‘Žȱ•ŽĞȱœ’Žȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ•˜œŽȱžȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱŒ˜—Š’—œȱŠȱœŽ›’Žœȱ˜ȱ
helpers to assist with counting payment methods. Select
‘Žȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ•Š‹Ž•ŽȱŠœ‘ȱ˜ȱ˜™Ž—ȱ‘ŽȱŒŠœ‘ȱ‘Ž•™Ž›ǯ
c) Count the bills and change from the till and enter the
number of each denomination into the appropriate
‘Ž•™Ž›ȱꎕǯȱ‘Žȱ‘Ž•™Ž›ȱ ’••ȱŠž˜–Š’ŒŠ••¢ȱŒŠ•Œž•ŠŽȱ
the total. If you have an opening till amount set (Setup
’ž›ŽȱŝȱȬȱ•˜œŽ˜žȱ
Ž•™Ž›
Tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱĺ Open & Close ĺ Expected
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
“Ǽȱ
k)
l)
Opening Till Amount), that amount will automatically be accounted for in the deposit
summary, therefore it is not necessary to count this amount out separately, simply count the
entire till.
Enter the total amount in the End-day Count in the Cash section.
Ž•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ‘ŽŒ”œȱ‘Ž•™Ž›ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ‘Žȱ‘ŽŒ”œȱ‘Ž•™Ž›ȱ ’••ȱ˜™Ž—ȱ’œ™•Š¢’—ȱŠȱ•’œȱ˜ȱ›ŽŒŽ’ŸŽȱ
checks. Go through the list and account for each check by selecting the check mark next to
the relevant check. The helper will calculate the total, type the amount displayed once all
checks are accounted for in to the End-day Count section of the closeout.
Ž•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ›Ž’ȱ‘Ž•™Ž›ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯ
If you are using integrated credit card processing and have a terminal based processor, there
’••ȱ‹Žȱ›Ž’ȱŠ›ȱŽĴ•Ž–Ž—ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱ’ȱ˜ȱ’—’’ŠŽȱ‘ŽȱœŽĴ•Ž–Ž—ȱ˜›ȱ˜Š¢ȂœȱŒ›Ž’ȱ
ŒŠ›ȱ‹ŠŒ‘ǯȱȱ¢˜žȱŠ›Žȱ
˜œǰȱ‘ŽȱŒŠ›œȱŠ›ŽȱœŽĴ•ŽȱŠž˜–Š’ŒŠ••¢ȱ ’‘ȱ‘Žȱ™›˜ŒŽœœ˜›ȱŠ—ȱ—˜ȱ
additional steps are required on your part. If you are Terminal, you must select the Credit
Š›ȱŽĴ•Ž–Ž—ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱŽŸŽ›¢ȱ—’‘ǰȱ˜‘Ž› ’œŽȱŒ›Ž’ȱŒŠ›ȱœŠ•Žœȱ ’••ȱ—˜ȱ‹ŽȱŽ™˜œ’Žȱ’—˜ȱ‘Žȱ
salon’s account.
Go through the credit card receipts from the till and place a check mark in the box next to the
item in the helper.
The helper will automatically calculate the total for the checked items. Enter the total credit
cards received into the appropriate credit payment in the End-day Count section.
Repeat this process for all payment types your system is set up for.
Enter any notes relating to the closeout count.
Ž•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŠŸŽȦ•˜œŽȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ ‘Ž—ȱŒ•˜œŽ˜žȱ’œȱŒ˜–™•ŽŽǯ
10
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
User’s Guide
System Requirements
Ȋȱ ’Œ›˜œ˜Ğȱ’—˜ œȱȱǻŽŽȱŽ•˜ Ǽȱ’—˜ œȱŝȱ›˜Žœœ’˜—Š•ȱ˜›ȱ•’–ŠŽȱ˜™Ž›Š’—ȱœ¢œŽ–
Ȋȱ Minimum monitor resolution 1024 x 768
Ȋȱ —Ž•ȱŽ—’ž–ȱ˜›ȱȱ‘•˜—ȱȱŒ•Šœœȱȱ›ž——’—ȱŠȱŘǯŜȱ
£ȱ˜›ȱ‹ŽĴŽ›
Ȋȱ 1 GB RAM or greater
Ȋȱ 20 GB hard drive
Ȋȱ CD-ROM drive
Trademarks
Ȋȱ ’Œ›˜œ˜ĞȱŠ—ȱ’—˜ œȱŠ›Žȱ›ŠŽ–Š›”œȱ˜ȱ’Œ›˜œ˜Ğȱ˜›™˜›Š’˜—
Ȋȱ SuperSalonȱ’œȱŠȱ›ŠŽ–Š›”ȱ˜ȱ˜Ž›œȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽŸŽ•˜™–Ž—ȱ—Œǯ
Installation
Ȋȱ Insert the SuperSalon CD in your CD Rom drive. If the setup program does not start
Šž˜–Š’ŒŠ••¢ǰȱŒ•’Œ”ȱ‘ŽȱŠ›ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱŠ—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱǯȱ•’Œ”ȱ‘Žȱ›˜ œŽ›ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱŠ—ȱ‹›˜ œŽȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ
CD drive. Select SETUP and click enter.
Ȋȱ Follow the directions shown.
Ȋȱ SuperSalon is then added to your desktop. Simply click the SuperSalon icon to start the
program. SuperSalon will need to be registered before it can be used, however, you can register
it as a demo version to try it free for 30 days. Just click the Setup tab ĺ Owner Password ĺ First
Time SetupȱŠ—ȱ¢™ŽȱȃŽ–˜Ȅȱ’—˜ȱ‘ŽȱŽ’œ›Š’˜—ȱŽ¢ȱꎕǯ
Ȋȱ If you purchased SuperSalon, call support at 888-458-1001 to receive your Registration Key.
•ŽŠœŽȱ‘ŠŸŽȱ¢˜ž›ȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽ¢ȱ‘Š—¢ȱ‹Ž˜›Žȱ–Š”’—ȱ‘’œȱŒŠ••ǯ
Ȋȱ Start playing with the provided sample data.
Tip:ȱœȱ˜ȱŘȱŘŖŗŚǰȱ’Œ›˜œ˜ĞȂœȱœž™™˜›ȱ˜ȱ’—˜ œȱȱ ’••ȱ
cease, and it will no longer be recommended, or supported when
used as the operating system of a PC running SuperSalon.
11
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Navigating SuperSalon
SuperSalon is designed to adapt to a variety of salon environments; walk-in, appointment, school,
spa, retail and hybrid. When set up properly, only the screens and functions relevant to your concept
should be enabled. For this reason, please study all the setup options carefully. Many functions in
SuperSalon may be enabled or disabled. For a walk-in salon, the Sales Tab will consist of a Wait/
Serve screen that flows to the Check-Out and Payments screens. If the customer database is enabled,
the flow starts with the customer lookup screen. For appointment based salons, the Wait/Serve screen
is replaced with the Appointment calendar. SuperSalon is designed for maximum efficiency with a
touch screen.
You can feel free to select a tab anytime without concern for your current sales data. When you leave
the sales screen and then return, SuperSalon saves your place.
Tip: If you are in the middle of a sale you can change the screen to
check in or serve customers, or to allow an employee to use the time
clock. When you return to the sales screen, you will return to the
™•ŠŒŽȱ ‘Ž›Žȱ¢˜žȱ•ŽĞȱ˜ěȱ’—ȱ‘ŽȱœŠ•Žǯȱ‘’œȱ”ŽŽ™œȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽœȱ›˜–ȱ Š’’—ȱ
around while a customer is checking out.
Throughout the SuperSalon program you will notice a “lock” in the upper right corner. If
Authentication is enabled and a user has been inactive for more than a configurable (permachine) interval of time ǻœŽŽȱęǼ, the lock icon “closes” and the user must authenticate
again to log back in to the system (Setup Tab ĺȱ˜ŒŠ•ȱŽĴ’—œȱĺ Authentication Timeout).
The user may select the icon to show who is currently authenticated in the system, and to log out the
current user.
Buttons and Hot Keys
SuperSalon is designed to use touch screens, but also functions with a mouse, shortcut keys and
ž—Œ’˜—ȱ”Ž¢œǯȱŽ¢‹˜Š›ȱœ‘˜›ŒžœȱŠ›Žȱ’—’ŒŠŽȱ‹¢ȱ‹˜•ȱŒ˜•˜›ȱ•ŽĴŽ›œȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ‹žĴ˜—œǯȱ˜›ȱ’—œŠ—ŒŽǰȱ
pressing the “N” key on your keyboard opens the New Ticket screen.
’ž›ŽȱŞȱȬȱŠŸ’Š’˜—ȱ‹žĴ˜—œȱ ’‘ȱȃ‘˜›ŒžȱŽ¢œȄȱ’—ȱ‹˜•ȱ›Žȱǻ‹˜Ĵ˜–ȱ˜ȱ–˜œȱœŒ›ŽŽ—œǼ
12
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Buttons Found in SuperSalon
Below are some examples of buttons and icons used to navigate and operate SuperSalon.
Functionality will vary slightly from screen to screen, but the basic function will remain consistent.
Some screens use a plus sign to open or a circle with a X to close. Action buttons typically have icons
or arrows. Arrows move you forward or backward throughout the program, or between different
columns. They can also move tickets to servicing or Check-Out.
Open and Close.
Navigate backward and forward through various
screens.
Displays the help
screen.
Displays the calendar for
appointments.
Displays the current day’s
appointments.
Edit customer information or create
notes.
The Options screen on the Appointment tab brings up a menu with other buttons to Print Itineraries,
Check Overbook, view who is Waiting or in Service, Gift Card Lookup, and add Look & Walks.
13
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Select the More button on the Wait/Servicing screen to conduct price
checks, view today’s sales, next stylist, and online tickets.
Select the Price Check button to enter or scan a product for price
checks.
Select Today’s Sales button to view today’s ticket statistics and
commissionable employee sales.
Use the Next Stylist button to view and select the next available
stylists.
Cues the receipt printer to print any current, preset questionniares
established by the salon.
Close the relevant screen.
14
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
The Tabs
Select the tabs at the top of the screen to navigate between the different areas of SuperSalon.
Some menus located under tabs such as Setup may be password protected to limit access to certain
employees.
Each time you select a tab, it resets the screen. For instance, if two employees wish to clock in, the
first employee selects the Time Clock tab and clocks in and then the next employee selects the Time
Clock tab again to reset the screen so he cans elect his name to clock in. Feel free to select a tab
anytime without concern for your current sale data. When you leave the sales screen and then return,
SuperSalon saves your place.
’ž›ŽȱşȱȬȱŠŸ’Š’˜—ȱŠ‹œȱǻ˜™ȱ˜ȱŒ›ŽŽ—œǼ
Tip: The tabs help you navigate SuperSalonǯȱ˜žȱŒŠ—ȱŠ• Š¢œȱꗍȱ¢˜ž›ȱ
way back to Sales or Appointments or other work areas by using the
tabs at the top of your screen.
If the screen you are trying to access is password protected, select your name, enter your password
and click the Log In button or press the Enter key on the keyboard. You may wish to disable the
permission controls while you are setting up and learning the program (Setup Tab ĺ Permissions).
See page 104 for permission instructions.
15
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
The Setup Tab
Customizing SuperSalon for Your Salon
The Setup Tab includes all of the initial setup options to customize SuperSalon for your business.
Most of these options only need to be set once. If the entire system was purchased from Rogers
Software, many of these options may have already been configured prior to shipping the computer
to your location.
Payment Methods
Setup Tab ĺ Payment Methods ĺ*HQHUDO
’ž›ŽȱŗŖȱȬȱ—Ž›Š’˜—ȱŽž™ȱŠ—ȱŠ¢–Ž—ȱŽ‘˜œȱœŒ›ŽŽ—
The payment method's screen allows you to define the types of payments your salon accepts from
customers. These will typically include cash, checks, credit cards, gift certificates and gift cards.
16
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Creating a New Payment Method
Setup Tab ĺ Payment Methods ĺ Create a New Payment
Select the Create New Payment button to add a payment method. When you create a new payment it
is added to the list.
’ž›ŽȱŗŗȱȬȱ›ŽŠ’—ȱ˜›ȱŽ’’—ȱŠȱ™Š¢–Ž—ȱ¢™Ž
You can sort the payment methods by using the up and down arrows in the order column so that
those most commonly used are at the top. They will be sorted this way on the Payment screen
also. Select a payment method in the table to edit or delete it. The “Autoselect top payment during
ringout” check box will automatically highlight the top payment. When a customer pays with this
payment type, you do not need to select the payment. Simply hit the enter key to ring out. This saves
time if your customers often pay with a particular payment method, such as cash.
When you enter payment types you will notice that you can include or require a memo, and for
credit, assign to a group. When "Include Memo" is checked, it allows you to add a memo when
accepting payment. This is good for check numbers. In order for the memo to be effective, please
make sure "Show Memo on Receipt" is checked. The group field allows you to include the payment
method in a group. Groups show up totaled together in reports and the closeout screen. If your bank
statement shows Visa and MasterCard together you may want to group these together, for instance
as Credit 1.
Tip: Coupons will usually be entered into the system as a
discount. There is no need to create a separate payment method
for accepting them.
17
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Gift Certificate Payment Method
A Gift Certificate is a special payment method. Gift Certificates can be enabled or disabled under
Software Settings (Setup Tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱĺȱŠ›”Ž’—ȱȱ˜¢Š•¢ȱǭȱ’Ğȱĺȱ—Š‹•Žȱ’Ğȱ
Ž›’ęŒŠŽȱ¢œŽ–Ǽ.
’ž›ŽȱŗŘȱȬȱ‘Žȱ’ȱŽ›’ęŒŠŽȱ™Š¢–Ž—ȱ ‘Ž—ȱŽ—Š‹•Ž
Gift Certificate Types can be created by selecting the
Modify Gift Certificate Types button on the Payment
Methods main screen (Setup Tab ĺ Payment Methods
ĺȱ˜’¢ȱ’ĞȱŽ›’ęŒŠŽȱ¢™ŽœǼ.
’ž›ŽȱŗřȱȬȱ’ȱŽ›’ęŒŠŽȱ¢™ŽœȱœŒ›ŽŽ—
Save and Select the Back button to return to the Payment methods
screen.
The Gift Certificate Type created will not appear in the list of
payment types. It will be available at Check-Out when a Gift
Certificate is chosen for a sale.
Tip: ‘Žȱ’ĞȱŽ›’ęŒŠŽȱœ¢œŽ–ȱ’œȱ—˜ȱ’—Ž—Žȱ
˜›ȱ’ĞȱŠ›œǯȱ‘ŽœŽȱŠ›ŽȱŒ˜—ꐞ›Žȱž—Ž›ȱ‘Žȱ
’ĞȱŠ›ȱŠ¢–Ž—ȱŽ‘˜œȱ˜ž•’—Žȱ’—ȱ‘Žȱ
next section of this manual.
’ž›ŽȱŗŚȱȬȱ’ȱŒŽ›’ęŒŠŽȱœŽ•ŽŒȬ
’˜—ȱŠȱ‘ŽŒ”Ȭž
18
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Gift Card Payment Method
Setup Tab ĺ Payment Methods ĺ Create a New Payment
’ž›ŽȱŗśȱȬȱ›ŽŠ’—ȱ‘Žȱ’ȱŠ›ȱ™Š¢–Ž—ȱ–Ž‘˜
On the Payment Method Actions screen enter a Code for the Gift Card payment method, select "SVS
Gift Card" or other solution from the drop down menu under "Type" and then enter a description. Be
sure to save when complete. The use of gift cards also requires entering information under the PC
Charge, SVS, Heartland, or Monetra buttons. Please contact SuperSalon technical support for help
with this (Call 888-458-1001 then press 1 or e-mail [email protected]).
19
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Phone Auth Payment Method
Setup Tab ĺ Payment Methods ĺ Create a New Payment
’ž›ŽȱŗŜȱȬȱ›ŽŠ’—ȱ‘Žȱ‘˜—Žȱž‘ȱ™Š¢–Ž—ȱ–Ž‘˜
From the Payment Method Settings screen enter a Code for the Phone Auth payment method and
then select "Phone Auth" from the drop down menu under "Type". Enter a description and choose
whether to include and/or require a memo. Be sure to save when complete.
This is used after receiving a voice confirmation for a credit card payment. It functions much like a
regular sale, with the addition of an authorization code field on the payment screen. These are then
entered into the open batch to be transmitted along with all other credit card payments.
20
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
SVS Reward Card Payment Method
Setup Tab ĺ Payment Methods ĺ Create a New Payment
’ž›ŽȱŗŝȱȬȱ›ŽŠ’—ȱ‘ŽȱȱŽ Š›ȱŠ›ȱ™Š¢–Ž—ȱ–Ž‘˜
From the Payment Method Settings screen enter a Code for the SVS Reward Card payment method
and then select "SVS Reward Card" from the drop down menu under "Type". Enter a description
and choose whether to include and/or require a memo. Be sure to save the payment method when
finished.
21
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Paid In/Out Account Codes
Setup Tab ĺ Payment Methods ĺ Paid In/Out Acct. Codes
’ž›ŽȱŗŞȱȬȱŠ’ȱ—ȦžȱŒŒ˜ž—ȱ˜ŽœȱœŒ›ŽŽ—
Select the Paid In/Out Acct. Codes button to create Account Codes for your Paid Ins and Paid Outs
(Sales Tab ĺ Open Till ĺ Paid In or Paid Out).
Create new Account Codes by selecting the Create New Account Code button. The Account Code
Actions screen will pop up. Enter the Code, Name, Description, Account Prefix, and then select Paid
In or Paid Out.
On the Paid In or Paid Out screen the Account Name will be listed. Enter the dollar amount and
select the Account Name from the drop down, enter a reason if needed and select the Make Payment
or Complete Paid Out button to finish.
22
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
’ž›ŽȱŗşȱȬȱŠ’ȱ—ȱŒ›ŽŽ—ȱ ’‘ȱŒŒ˜ž—ȱ˜Ž
If "Assume All Paid Ins are Cash" is not enabled (Setup Tab ĺ System ĺ General ĺ Assume All Paid
Ins are Cash) you will be taken to the Payment screen to finish the transaction. If set to "Yes", you will
see a notification that the Paid In has been completed.
23
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Select Card Swipe Settings
Setup Tab ĺ Payment Methods ĺ Credit Card Processor Setup ĺProcessor
’ž›ŽȱŘŖȱȬȱŽ•ŽŒȱŠ›ȱ ’™ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱœŒ›ŽŽ—
The Card Swipe Settings screen is used to configure the card reader your location uses to process
credit card or gift card transactions. Select "Card Swipe Device" in order to choose the swiper
compatible for your processor. "Com Port" is how the device is connected to the salon computer. If the
location uses an USB reader, leave the setting at "None". Card Reader Timeout determine the amount
of time the "Swipe Credit Card" screen is available on Check-Out before the screen prompts for the
transaction to be entered in manually.
If you are unsure of which device or com
port setting to use, please contact Rogers'
technical support to assist with configuration
(Call 888-458-1001 then press 1 or e-mail
[email protected]).
’ž›ŽȱŘŗȱȬȱ’œȱ˜ȱŸŠ’•Š‹•ŽȱŠ›ȱ ’™ŽȱŽŸ’ŒŽœ
24
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
PC-Charge Integration
Setup Tab ĺ Payment Methods ĺ Credit Card Processor Setup ĺPC-Charge
’ž›ŽȱŘŘȱȬȱȬ‘Š›Žȱ—Ž›Š’˜—ȱŒ›ŽŽ—
SuperSalon can be configured to work seamlessly with integrated credit card and gift card
processing software. If you are using an external credit card processing terminal, there is no setup
required in this area. If you would like to use integrated credit card software, such as PC-Charge, please
contact Rogers' technical support to help you configure SuperSalon to support the integration (Call
888-458-1001 then press 1 or e-mail [email protected]).
25
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
IP-Charge Integration
Setup Tab ĺ Payment Methods ĺ Credit Card Processor Setup ĺ,3&KDUJH
’ž›ŽȱŘřȱȬȱȬ‘Š›Žȱ—Ž›Š’˜—ȱœŒ›ŽŽ—
SuperSalon can be configured to work seamlessly with integrated credit card and gift card
processing software. If you are using an external credit card processing terminal, there is no setup
required in this area. If you would like to use integrated credit card software, such as IP-Charge, please
contact Rogers' technical support to help you configure SuperSalon to support the integration
(Call 888-458-1001 then press 1 or e-mail [email protected]).
26
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Monetra Integration
Setup Tab ĺ Payment Methods ĺ Credit Card Processor Setup ĺ0RQHWUD
’ž›ŽȱŘŚȱȬȱ˜—Ž›Šȱ—Ž›Š’˜—ȱœŒ›ŽŽ—
SuperSalon can be configured to work seamlessly with integrated credit card and gift card
processing software. If you are using an external credit card processing terminal, there is no setup
required in this area. If you would like to use integrated credit card software, such as Monetra,
please contact Rogers' technical support to help you configure SuperSalon to support the
integration (Call 888-458-1001 then press 1 or e-mail [email protected]).
27
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Heartland Integration
Setup Tab ĺ Payment Methods ĺ Credit Card Processor Setup ĺ+HDUWODQG
’ž›ŽȱŘśȱȬȱ
ŽŠ›•Š—ȱ—Ž›Š’˜—
SuperSalon can be configured to work seamlessly with integrated credit card and gift card
processing software. If you are using an external credit card processing terminal, there is no setup
required in this area. If you would like to use integrated credit card software, such as Heartland,
please contact Rogers' technical support to help you configure SuperSalon to support the integration
(Call 888-458-1001 then press 1 or e-mail [email protected]
28
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Gift Card Processor Setup
Setup Tab ĺ Payment Methods ĺ Gift Card Processor Setup
’ž›ŽȱŘŜȱȬȱ’ȱŠ›ȱ—Ž›Š’˜—ȱ›˜ŒŽœœ˜›ȱŽ•ŽŒ’˜—ȱŒ›ŽŽ—
After you have created the gift card payment method, it shows in the list but is not available for use.
To enter your gift card settings, select the relevant processor for your location in order to proceed
’‘ȱŒ˜—’ž›Š’˜—ǯȱ‘Ž›ŽȱŠ›ŽȱŠȱ˜Š•ȱ˜ȱ˜ž›ȱ˜™’˜—œȱŠŸŠ’•Š‹•ŽDZȱȬ‘Š›Žǰȱǰȱ˜—Ž›ŠǰȱŠ—ȱ
Heartland. If you are unsure of which processor to use, please consult your Gift Card Merchant
provider or contact Rogers' technical support to help you configure SuperSalon to support the
integration (Call 888-458-1001 then press 1 or e-mail [email protected]).
29
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Valutec Gift Card Settings
Setup Tab ĺ Payment Methods ĺ Gift Card Processor Setup ĺ3&&KDUJH
’ž›ŽȱŘŝȱȬȱ˜—ꐞ›’—ȱŠ•žŽŒȱ’ȱŒŠ›œ
Valutec Gift cards are configured under the PC-Charge Settings page of the Gift Card Processor
Setup screen. To setup PC-Charge Gift cards, please contact Rogers' technical support (Call 888-4581001 then press 1 or e-mail [email protected]). For instructions on issuing and activating gift
cards, please consult the Sales section (page 201).
30
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
SVS Gift Card Settings
Setup Tab ĺ Payment Methods ĺ Gift Card Processor Setup ĺ696
’ž›ŽȱŘŞȱȬȱ˜—ꐞ›’—ȱȱ’ȱŒŠ›œ
SVS Gift Cards are configured under the SVS Settings page of the Gift Card Processor Setup screen.
To setup SVS Gift cards, please contact Rogers' technical support (Call 888-458-1001 then press 1 or
e-mail [email protected]). For instructions on issuing and activating gift cards, please consult
the Sales section (page 201).
31
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Monetra Gift Card Settings
Setup Tab ĺ Payment Methods ĺ Gift Card Processor Setup ĺ0RQHWUD
’ž›ŽȱŘşȱȬȱ˜—ꐞ›Žȱ˜—Ž›Šȱ’ȱŒŠ›œ
Monetra Gift cards are configured under the Monetra Settings page of the Gift Card Processor Setup
screen.
To setup Monetra Gift cards, please contact Rogers' technical support (Call 888-458-1001 then press 1
or e-mail [email protected]).
For instructions on issuing and activating gift cards, please consult the Sales section (page 201).
32
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Positions
Setup Tab ĺ Positions
’ž›ŽȱřŖȱȬȱ›ŽŠ’—ȱŠ—ȱž™Š’—ȱ’–ŽŒ•˜Œ”ȱ˜œ’’˜—œ
The Positions screen is used to configure the employee positions that will be available on the Time
Clock screen when employees punch in. Employees can also be set to these positions in their
employee setup. In addition to primary positions, it is also possible to create sub-positions. Employees
can not be set to Sub-Positions. Sub-Positions are mostly used for additional information on the
Payroll reports.
’ž›ŽȱřŗȱȬȱ’ȱ’–Žȱ•˜Œ”ȱ˜œ’’˜—œ
33
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
To add a position, choose a name for the position, enter a code, and select “Yes” to have SuperSalon
track production time and add any hourly bonus you wish for this position (this is rare). Tracking
production time is usually used to differentiate between hours used to calculate commission for
production employees and noncommissioned hours for receptionist and management duties.
Generally, an employee should only use a production clock in when they are performing services on
customers. You can also set up sub-positions. If you are setting up a sub-position, select the Parent
Position from the drop down list. Only the sub-positions will show on the Time Clock list.
Sub-positions are useful if your location wants to break up positions into groups for reporting
or bonus purposes (for instance, day shift and night shift). All employees can be set to the parent
position in their employee setup and then clock in using the relevant sub-position. When viewing
reports, you will be able to see statistics for the sub-position in relation to the parent position.
When employees punch in, they should do so as to reflect the duties they will be performing. For
example, a manager working at a location where hair care is provided will want to clock in as a stylist
when cutting a customer’s hair. When not cutting hair or not available to perform any other form of
service, they will want to clock in as something else, perhaps office, or banking.
34
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Payroll /Bonuses
Setup Tab ĺ Payroll/Bonuses ĺ*HQHUDO
’ž›ŽȱřŘȱȬȱŠ¢›˜••Ȧ˜—žœŽœȱœŽž™ȱ’—ȱ‘ŽȱŽ—Ž›Š•ȱœŽŒ’˜—
The General section of the Payroll/Bonuses screen shows a summary of the current pay period
settings and allows you to select some basic settings.
Payroll Mode
—•Žœœȱ¢˜ž›ȱ›Š—Œ‘’œŽȱ›Žšž’›Žœȱ¢˜žȱ˜ȱžœŽȱŠȱœ™ŽŒ’ęŒȱ–˜Žǰȱ•ŽŠŸŽȱ‘’œȱŠȱŽ—Ž›’ŒȱŠ¢›˜••ȱ¢œŽ–ǯ
Request Charge
ȱ¢˜žȱŒ‘Š›ŽȱŒžœ˜–Ž›œȱŠ—ȱŠ’’˜—Š•ȱŽŽȱ˜›ȱ›ŽšžŽœ’—ȱŠȱœ™ŽŒ’ęŒȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽǰȱ™•ŽŠœŽȱŽ—Ž›ȱ‘ŽȱŠ–˜ž—ȱ
here. It will automatically be added as a line item in their check-out screen.
Request Bonus
If you pay your employee an additional fee for each request they receive, enter the amount here. It
will automatically be added to their bonus column on the payroll report.
Include Request Charge In Service Commission
Select "Yes" here to include the request charge in service sales totals. If this is set to yes and a Request
‹˜—žœȱ’œȱŠ•œ˜ȱŒ˜—ꐞ›ŽǰȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽœȱ ’••ȱ›ŽŒŽ’ŸŽȱ‹˜‘ȱ‘Žȱ‹˜—žœȱŠ—ȱŠ—ȱ’—Œ›ŽŠœŽȱ˜ȱŒ˜––’œœ’˜—ȱ˜›ȱ
each request they received.
Minimum Wage
Enter the minimum wage here.
35
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Employee Payroll Method
Use this dropdown to choose if employees get paid the sum of their commissions and hourly wage
or if they are paid the higher of the two.
Timecards
Setup Tab ĺ Payroll/Bonuses ĺ7LPHFDUGV
’ž›ŽȱřřȱȬȱ’–ŽŒŠ›œȱŽž™
Overtime for over 8 hours/day
If the system is being used in a location where overtime pay must be paid to employees who work
over eight hours a day, select "Yes".
Overtime After:
Enter the number of hours an employee must reach per week before overtime is applied.
Automatic Employee Breaks
Some salons require breaks to be taken at certain intervals. For instance, in Figure 33, if enabled, a 30
–’—žŽȱ‹›ŽŠ”ȱ’–Žȱ’œȱŠž˜–Š’ŒŠ••¢ȱŽžŒŽȱŠĞŽ›ȱ ˜›”’—ȱśȱ‘˜ž›œǯȱ‘’œȱ–ŽŠ—œȱ‘ŽȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱœ‘˜ž•ȱ
‘ŠŸŽȱŠ”Ž—ȱřŖȱ–’—žŽœȱ ˜›‘ȱ˜ȱ‹›ŽŠ”œȱ’—ȱ‘ŽȱŒ˜ž›œŽȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ꟎ȱ‘˜ž›ȱœ‘’Ğǯȱ‘ŽœŽȱŽ—›’ŽœȱŠ™™ŽŠ›ȱ˜—ȱ
the time card report in the break column.
Automatic Split Shift Adjustment
ȱ¢˜žȱžœŽȱœ™•’ȱœ‘’Ğœȱ’—ȱ¢˜ž›ȱœŠ•˜—ǰȱ¢˜žȱŒŠ—ȱŽ—Š‹•Žȱ‘Ž’›ȱ›ŠŒ”’—ȱ‘Ž›Žǯȱȱ¢˜žȱ ˜ž•ȱ•’”Žȱ˜ȱ’ŸŽȱŠȱ
‹˜—žœȱ˜ȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽœȱ ˜›”’—ȱŠȱœ™•’ȱœ‘’ĞǰȱŽ—Ž›ȱ‘ŽȱŠ–˜ž—ȱ˜ȱ’–Žȱ‘Žȱ‹˜—žœȱ’œȱ ˜›‘ǯ
36
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Pay-periods
Setup Tab ĺ Payroll/Bonuses ĺ3D\SHULRGV
’ž›ŽȱřŚȱȬȱ›ŽŠŽȱŽ ȱŠ¢ȬŽ›’˜ȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯȱ‘’œȱŽ¡Š–™•Žȱ’œȱ‹ŠœŽȱ˜—ȱ ŽŽ”œǯ
The Pay-period setup screen is where you initially set up your pay-periods. This should be done prior
to using SuperSalon for Check-Out purposes as the Time Clock and Payroll Reports are dependent
on it.
If no periods are shown select the Pay-Period drop down menu and select "Create new Pay Period".
If they are setup, but they are incorrect, select the pay-period to delete and select the Remove PayPeriod button at the bottom of the screen before selecting "Create New Pay Period."
Follow the steps listed in the setup wizard (Figure 34) to create a new pay-period. The steps provided
’••ȱ’쎛ȱŽ™Ž—’—ȱ˜—ȱ’ȱ¢˜ž›ȱ•˜ŒŠ’˜—ȱ‘ŠœȱŠȱ™Š¢ȱ™Ž›’˜ȱ‹ŠœŽȱ˜ěȱ˜ȱ ŽŽ”œȱ˜›ȱ’œȱ‹’–˜—‘•¢ǯȱŽȱœž›Žȱ
˜ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱŠȱœŠ›’—ȱŠŽȱ‘Šȱ’—Œ•žŽœȱ‘ŽȱꛜȱŠ¢ȱ¢˜ž›ȱ•˜ŒŠ’˜—ȱ Šœȱ˜™Ž—ȱŠ—ȱœŠ›œȱ˜—ȱ‘ŽȱœŠ–ŽȱŠ¢ȱ
of the week that you want your pay periods to begin.
ȱ¢˜ž›ȱœŽ•ŽŒŽȱ™Š¢ȱ™Ž›’˜ȱ’œȱ‹ŠœŽȱ˜—ȱ ŽŽ”œǰȱ‘ŽȱȈ‘˜ ȱŒ˜––’œœ’˜—œȱ˜›ȈȱœŽĴ’—ȱŽŽ›–’—Žœȱ‘˜ ȱ
commissions will be displayed on the payroll report. If "entire pay period" is selected, there will be
one table showing all commissions for the period. If each week of pay-period is selected, one table
will be displayed for each week in the pay-period, and a third table will display the totals.
37
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
‘Ž—ȱ¢˜žȱŠ›Žȱꗒœ‘ŽǰȱSuperSalon will display two or more periods to verify that you have set
them up correctly. All future pay-periods will automatically be generated. If you have a need to set
up multiple pay-periods (this is not usual for most organizations), for instance, to stagger out your
pay days or pay managers monthly and everyone else twice a month, SuperSalon supports this
easily. You may set up as many pay-periods as necessary.
The next step is to assign your employees to a pay-period. Go to employee setup (Manager Tab ĺ
Employees ĺ Select employee name ĺ Payroll); select the period with the Pay Period drop down box
and then select Save.
To quickly set all employees to the same pay-period go to Setup Tab ĺ Utilities ĺ Check Employee
Payperiod Setup. As long as there is only one pay-period, this will set all employees to it.
38
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Commission Setup
Setup Tab ĺ Payroll/Bonuses ĺ&RPPLVVLRQ
’ž›ŽȱřśȱȬȱ›ŽŠ’—ȱŠȱŽ ȱ˜––’œœ’˜—ȱ•Š—
When the Commission button is first selected, there will be a drop down box displayed which reads
"Select a Plan". To edit an existing plan, select the plan name. If you have no plans defined, drop
down the field and select "Create New Plan". Give the plan a descriptive name and then in the "Select
Plan Type" dropdown, select a commission plan type to create. The following commission types are
œž™™˜›ŽDZ
FS Matrix
This is a custom commission plan. If the listed plan types do not meet your needs please contact
Rogers' tech support.
CRIC Points
This is a custom commission plan. If the listed plan types do not meet your needs please contact
Rogers' tech support.
Service Sales
This commission type pays commission on services sales only. Commission can be based on gross or
net and calculated on total sales or sales per hour.
39
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Service Count Bonus
This commission type allows you to pay employees a certain amount every time they perform a
service.
Product Sales
This commission type pays commission on product sales only. Commissions can be based on gross
or net and calculated on total sales or sales per hour.
% Retail to Service - Product Commission
This is a product commission based on the ratio of retail (product) sales compared with service Sales.
% Retail to Service - Service Commission
This is a service commission based on the ratio of retail (product) sales compared with service sales.
% Retail to Total Sales - Product Commission
This is a product commission based on the ratio of retail sales compared with total sales.
Service Based on Product
This is a percent commission for services determined by the amount of product sales calculated
Ž’‘Ž›ȱŠœȱŠȱ˜Š•ȱ˜ȱŠ••ȱœŠ•Žœȱ˜›ȱŠœȱŠȱ˜••Š›œȱ™Ž›ȱ‘˜ž›ȱꐞ›Žǯ
Product Brand Premium
‘’œȱ’œȱŠ—ȱŽ¡›ŠȱŒ˜––’œœ’˜—ȱ™Š’ȱ˜—ȱŠȱœ™ŽŒ’ęŒȱ‹›Š—ǯ
Payrate Based on Production
This plan is a variable pay rate based on service per production hour.
Tenure Bonus
This is a payroll bonus based on employee longevity.
Service Category Premium
‘’œȱ™›˜Ÿ’ŽœȱŠ—ȱŽ¡›ŠȱŒ˜––’œœ’˜—ȱ˜—ȱŠ••ȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱœŠ•Žœȱ‘Šȱ‹Ž•˜—ȱ˜ȱŠȱœ™ŽŒ’ęŒȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱŒŠŽ˜›¢
PPG Service Commission
This is a product per guest service commission. Employee service commission is based on product
sold divided by the number of guests.
Hourly Options
This is a custom commission plan. If the listed plan types do not meet your needs please contact
Rogers' tech support.
NTA Commission
This is a custom commission plan. If the listed plan types do not meet your needs please contact
Rogers' tech support.
Additional Bonus
This allows you to add additional bonus amounts to an employee's time card for service, products,
etc.
40
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Production Fee
This commission plan is used to remove a percentage of an employee's commission for service sales.
’ž›ŽȱřŜȱȬȱŠ–™•ŽȱŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱ˜––’œœ’˜—ȱŽž™ȱŒ›ŽŽ—
The commission screens allow you to setup commissions and bonus plans. Each salon can have
multiple commission plans so that employees can each be set to one or multiple commission plans.
Figure 36 ’œȱŠ—ȱŽ¡Š–™•Žȱ˜ȱŠȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱŒ˜––’œœ’˜—ǯȱ—ȱ‘Žȱ‹˜Ĵ˜–ȱ•ŽĞȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱ¢˜žȱ‘ŠŸŽȱ‘Žȱ˜™’˜—ȱ
to have the commission calculations based on the employee's Net Sales or Gross Sales. Gross is the
˜Š•ȱŸŠ•žŽȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ™›˜žŒœȱŠ—ȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽœȱœ˜•ȱ ‘’•Žȱ—Žȱ’œȱ‘ŽȱŠ–˜ž—ȱ›ŽŒŽ’ŸŽȱŠĞŽ›ȱ’œŒ˜ž—œǯ
—ȱ‘Žȱ‹˜Ĵ˜–ȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱŒ˜––’œœ’˜—ȱœŽž™ȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱ¢˜žȱ‘ŠŸŽȱ‘Žȱ˜™’˜—ȱ˜ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ’ȱ¢˜žȱ ’••ȱ‹Žȱ‹Šœ’—ȱ
Œ˜––’œœ’˜—œȱ˜—ȱ˜ŸŽ›Š••ȱœŠ•Žœȱ˜›ȱœŠ•Žœȱ™Ž›ȱ‘˜ž›ǯȱ˜žȱŠ•œ˜ȱ‘ŠŸŽȱ‘Žȱ˜™’˜—ȱ˜ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ’ȱ’쎛Ž—ȱ
commissions will be paid for each commission tier, or if commissions will be based on all sales at the
highest commission level hit.
Each time you add a sales goal and corresponding commission, SuperSalon will automatically
add another level. The screen will allow up to 40 levels. This enables it to handle various matrix
systems well. The last row displays a sales number one cent above the prior level and shows "and up"
indicating all amounts beyond are included in the highest commission level. Any row that has the
Œ˜––’œœ’˜—ȱ•ŽŸŽ•ȱ•Žȱ‹•Š—”ȱ ’••ȱ‹Žȱ’—˜›Žǯȱȱ¢˜žȱ Š—ȱ‘Žȱ—Ž¡ȱ•ŽŸŽ•ȱ˜ȱ‹ŽȱȈŠ—ȱž™Ȉȱ“žœȱ•ŽŠŸŽȱ‘Žȱ
commission field blank for the preceding row.
41
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
The Bonus column allows you to enter a bonus amount in dollars that will be paid to employees for
achieving that sales level. If you wish to pay these bonuses, but you do not wish to pay a commission
percentage, enter "0" for the commission for each level (If you leave the commission blank, the row
will be skipped).
All of the bonus information will show up in the commission and bonus section of the payroll report.
’ž›ŽȱřŝȱȬȱ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱŽž™ȱ›ŽŠȱ˜––’œœ’˜—ȱ•Š—ȱŽ•ŽŒ˜›
Once all of your plans are defined, you will need to go to the Edit Employee screen
(Manager Tab Employees ĺ Select an employee ĺ Commission Plans) and select the commission
plan which applies for each employee. Multiple plans can be assigned to each employee.
42
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Company Information
Setup Tab ĺ Company Info
’ž›ŽȱřŞȱȬȱ˜–™Š—¢ȱ—˜›–Š’˜—ȱŒ›ŽŽ—
The Company Info screens allow you to add all of your Company Info, Franchise Info, Deposit
—˜ȱŠ—ȱ˜¢Š•’Žœȱ’—˜›–Š’˜—ǯȱȱ¢˜žȱŠ›ŽȱŠȱœŒ‘˜˜•ȱŠ—ȱ‘ŠŸŽȱœŒ‘˜˜•ȱœŽĴ’—œȱŽ—Š‹•Žȱ(Setup tab ĺ
˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱĺ System ĺȱŒ‘˜˜•ȱŽĴ’—œȱĺ Enable School Functions) “School #” will appear
instead of “Corporate Store #”. Most of this information is for reference purposes and is not required.
43
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Deposit Info
Setup Tab ĺ Company Info ĺ Deposit Info
’ž›ŽȱřşȱȬȱŽ™˜œ’ȱ—˜›–Š’˜—
SuperSalon can print a deposit slip based on the information entered into the closeout screen each
day. Enter your bank name, account number and routing number here to use the deposit slips.
44
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Royalties
Setup Tab ĺ Company Info ĺ Royalties
’ž›ŽȱŚŖȱȬȱ˜¢Š•’Žœ
If you are a franchisee salon that pays royalties based on sales, you must enter the Royalties
information if you want SuperSalon to properly calculate how much is owed in the royalty report.
If the royalty rates increase after a set date, you may enter the date and the increased royalty rates.
This screen also allows you to set up advertising fund contributions.
45
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Store Setup
Setup Tab ĺ Company Info ĺ Store Setup
’ž›ŽȱŚŗȱȬȱ˜›ŽȱŽž™ȱŒ›ŽŽ—
The Store Setup screen allows you to enter general reference information about your salon. This is
viewable from the I-Office. None of this information is required for the operation of the software.
46
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Store Hours
Setup Tab ĺ Company Info ĺ Store Hours
’ž›ŽȱŚŘȱȬȱ˜›Žȱ
˜ž›œȱœŒ›ŽŽ—
Enter the store hours here. SuperSalon uses this information when it analyzes traffic flow for the
Daily Report and Scheduling Helper. Make sure to enter a closing time that reflects when you will
ŠŒžŠ••¢ȱ‹Žȱ˜—Žȱ˜’—ȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽœȱŠ—ȱ’—’œ‘Žȱ ’‘ȱŒ•˜œŽ˜žȱ™›˜ŒŽž›Žœǯȱȱ¢˜ž›ȱŒ•˜œ’—ȱ’–Žȱ’œȱŜDZŖŖȱ
ǰȱ‹žȱ¢˜žȱ¢™’ŒŠ••¢ȱŠ”ŽȱŠ’’˜—Š•ȱŒžœ˜–Ž›ȱŠ—ȱŒžȱ‘Š’›ȱž—’•ȱŝDZŖŖȱȱ ’‘ȱŠ—ȱŠ’’˜—Š•ȱ‘’›¢ȱ
–’—žŽœȱž—’•ȱ¢˜žȱŠŒžŠ••¢ȱŒ˜–™•ŽŽȱŒ•˜œŽ˜žǰȱŽ—Ž›ȱŝDZřŖȱǯȱ‘Žȱ’–Žœȱ‘ŠȱŒŠ—ȱ‹ŽȱœŒ‘Žž•Žȱ˜›ȱ
employees as well as the available times for scheduling appointments is affected by the information
entered in this screen.
47
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Software Settings
Setup Tab ĺ Software Settings
Software Settings can be used to customize SuperSalon to fit the needs of the location. To enable
˜›ȱ’œŠ‹•ŽȱŠȱž—Œ’˜—ȱ“žœȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱȱ˜›ȱŒ‘ŽŒ”ȱ–Š›”ǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱšžŽœ’˜—ȱ–Š›”ȱ‹ž˜—ȱ˜ȱŸ’Ž ȱŠȱ
description of each option.
General
Setup Tab ĺ Software Settings ĺ6\VWHPĺ*HQHUDO
General software settings is used to configure Store Type, Language, etc.
’ž›ŽȱŚřȱȬȱŽ—Ž›Š•ȱ˜ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œ
48
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Store Type
Ž•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ˜••˜ ’—ȱœ˜›Žȱ¢™Žȱ‘ŠȱŠ™™•’Žœȱ˜ȱ¢˜ž›ȱ•˜ŒŠ’˜—DZȱ
Ŝȱ–™’›Žǰȱśȱž™Ž›žœǰȱŚȱ˜œȱžĴŽ›œǰȱřȱŠ—Šœ’ŒȱŠ–œǰȱŘȱŠ›‹Ž›œ‘˜™ǰȱŗȱž••ȱŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽǰȱ‘Ž›
Language
Ž•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŠ—žŠŽȱ‘Šȱ’œȱ—Š’ŸŽȱ˜ȱ¢˜ž›ȱ›Ž’˜—ǯȱ‘ŽȱŠŸŠ’•Š‹•Žȱ•Š—žŠŽœȱŠ›ŽDZ
English (USA), English (CAN), English (GBR), Hindi, German, Spanish, Arabic (U.A.E), Arabic
(Qatar). Restart SuperSalon for the changes to apply.
Show Scheduler Tab
Locations that only want the scheduler to be available on the Employee set up page (Manager Tab ĺ
Employees ĺ Employee Scheduler) can accomplish this by disabling Show Scheduler Tab.
Default Screen
By default, SuperSalonȱ’œȱŒ˜—ꐞ›Žȱ˜ȱ’œ™•Š¢ȱ‘ŽȱŠ’ȦŽ›ŸŽȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱ ‘Ž—ȱ‘ŽȱŠ•ŽœȱŠ‹ȱ’œȱ
selected. If most of your customers are scheduled as appointments you can set the Default Sales
Screen to be the Appointment screen. You will still be able to assist walk-in customers by selecting
‘ŽȱŽ ȱ’Œ”Žȱ˜›ȱž’Œ”ȱŠ•Žȱ‹žĴ˜—œȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ‹˜Ĵ˜–ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ™™˜’—–Ž—ȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯ
The default screen can also be set as Check-Out. If this option is used, when the Sales Tab is selected
Šȱž’Œ”ȱŠ•Žȱ’œȱŒ›ŽŠŽǯȱ‘Ž—ȱ‘ŽŒ”Ȭžȱ’œȱžœŽȱŠœȱ‘ŽȱŽŠž•ȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǰȱ‘ŽȱŠ•ŽœȱŠ‹ȱ’œȱœž‹“ŽŒȱ˜ȱ
œ™ŽŒ’Š•ȱ™Ž›–’œœ’˜—œȱ˜ȱŠœœ’œȱ ’‘ȱ–Š—Š’—ȱ‘Žȱ’쎛Ž—ȱŠŒ’˜—œȱ‘ŠȱŒŠ—ȱ‹ŽȱŠ”Ž—ȱ˜—ȱ‘’œȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱ
(Setup Tab ĺ Permissions ĺ Select Group ĺ Checkout).
Alternatively, Customer Lookup can be set at the default screen. When used, anytime the Sales Tab
is selected the prompt to search for a customer will be displayed. In order to perform a Quick Sale or
–Š—ŠŽ–Ž—ȱž’ŽœȱœžŒ‘ȱŠœȱ˜™Ž—’—ȱ‘Žȱ’••ȱ˜›ȱ™Š’Ȭ˜žœǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŒŠ—ŒŽ•ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ‘’œȱ ’••ȱŠ”Žȱ¢˜žȱ
back to the Wait/Serve screen and from there all the options on that screen normally will be made
available.
Skip Ticket Options
ȱ‘’œȱ˜™’˜—ȱ’œȱŽ—Š‹•Žǰȱ‘Žȱ’Œ”Žȱ™’˜—œȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱ ’••ȱ™›ŽȬœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ‘ŽŒ”Ȭžȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ ‘Ž—ȱŠȱ’Œ”Žȱ
is created.
Assume All Paid Ins are Cash
This option assumes that all Paid Ins created are going to be cash. Do not select this option if you
accept other forms of currency for Paid Ins as you will not have the option to make use of them.
49
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Open & Close
Setup Tab ĺ Software Settings ĺ6\VWHPĺ2SHQ&ORVH
’ž›ŽȱŚŚȱȬȱ™Ž—ȱǭȱ•˜œŽȱ˜ Š›ŽȱœŽĴ’—œ
There are several options you can set to modify how the Closeout works. For instance, you can
require an opening till count, set an expected opening till amount or automatically close out at a
specific time of day.
Require Opening Till Count
Choose Yes if you would like to require Opening Till to be counted each day.
Carry over Opening till from Closing
Choose Yes if you would like to carry over the Closing Till to the next day to be used as an Opening
’••ǯȱ‘’œȱ ’••ȱ‹Žȱ’쎛Ž—ȱ‘Š—ȱ‘Žȱ¡™ŽŒŽȱŠ–˜ž—ȱ’ȱ’ȱ›˜™œȱ‹Ž•˜ ȱ‘Šǯ
Allow opening till to be recounted
Choose Yes if you would like to allow multiple edits to your opening till count.
50
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Allow deposits to be edited
Choose Yes if you will not be depositing what the close out states. The Expected Till Count must be
set to 0 to enable.
Expected Opening Till Amount
This is the amount you would like the Opening Till Amount to be. It will be used to calculate carry
over, if enabled.
Add Drops to Close Out Totals
Choose Yes if drops should be included in the expected till amount for the day.
Use Opening Till or Counted Till
If Opening Till is chosen it will use this to calculate the Computed Cash at Closeout. It will also use
this to determine Open Till +/- If Counted Till is chosen it will use this to calculate the Computed
Cash at Closeout. It will also use this to determine Open Till +/- Open Till +/- will also be Used in
Monthly Financial and Reconcile Summary Reports.
Automatically close out salon
‘ŽȱŠž˜ȱŒ•˜œŽȱ˜žȱ™›˜ŒŽœœȱ›ž—œȱ˜—ŒŽȱŠȱŠ¢ȱŠȱ‘ŽȱŒ˜—ꐞ›Žȱ’–Žȱ˜ȱŒ˜–™žŽȱ‘ŽȱŽ—ȱ˜ȱŠ¢ȱ˜Š•œȱ
used on several reports in SuperSalonȱŠ—ȱ‘Žȱ’ĜŒŽǯȱȱœŽȱ˜ȱȈ˜Ȉǰȱ‘ŽȱŠž˜ȱŒ•˜œŽȱ˜žȱ™›˜ŒŽœœȱ ’••ȱ
—˜ȱ›ž—ǯȱ˜žȱ–žœȱ‘’ȱśȱ˜—ȱ¢˜ž›ȱ”Ž¢‹˜Š›ȱŠĞŽ›ȱŒ‘Š—’—ȱ‘’œȱ˜ȱȈŽœȈȱŠ—ȱœŠŸ’—ȱ˜ȱŽ—Š‹•Žȱ‘ŽȱŠž˜ȱ
close out process.
Auto close out time
‘’œȱŽę—Žœȱ‘Žȱ’–Žȱ˜ȱŠ¢ȱŠȱ ‘’Œ‘ȱ‘ŽȱŠž˜ȱŒ•˜œŽȱ˜žȱ™›˜ŒŽœœȱ ’••ȱ›ž—ȱǻŽ¡Š–™•ŽDZȱŗŗDZŖŖȱǼǯȱž˜ȱ
Œ•˜œŽȱ˜žȱ ’••ȱ—˜ȱ›ž—ȱ’ȱ‘’œȱœŽĴ’—ȱ’œȱ—˜ȱŽ—Ž›Žȱ’—ȱ‘Žȱ™›˜™Ž›ȱ˜›–ŠDZȱ
DZȱȦ
Auto void open tickets with reason
‘’œȱœŽĴ’—ȱŽę—Žœȱ‘Žȱ›ŽŠœ˜—ȱ˜›ȱŸ˜’’—ȱŠ—¢ȱ’Œ”Žœȱ‘ŠȱŠ›Žȱ•ŽĞȱ˜™Ž—ȱ ‘Ž—ȱŠž˜ȱŒ•˜œŽȱ˜žȱ›ž—œǯȱ
Leave this blank to not void open tickets.
Auto complete rung out tickets
ŽĴ’—ȱ‘’œȱ˜™’˜—ȱ˜ȱȈŽœȈȱ ’••ȱŠž˜–Š’ŒŠ••¢ȱŒ˜–™•ŽŽȱŠ—¢ȱ’Œ”Žȱ‘Šȱ‘Šœȱ‹ŽŽ—ȱ›ž—ȱ˜žȱ‹žȱ—˜ȱ
¢ŽȱŒ˜–™•ŽŽȱǻ’ǯŽǯȱ‘ŽȱȈ˜–™•ŽŽȱŠ•ŽȈȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ‘Šœȱ—˜ȱ¢Žȱ‹ŽŽ—ȱ™›ŽœœŽǼǯȱ‘’œȱ’œȱŒ˜–™Š’‹•Žȱ ’‘ȱ
automatically voiding open tickets - rung out tickets will be completed before open tickets are voided.
Run with unopened till
If set to "Yes", the auto close out process will run regardless of whether or not the till has been opened
for the day. Set this value to "No" to prevent auto close out from running on days that your salon is
not open, unless you do not require opening till counts.
Run with existing close out
If set to "Yes", the auto close out process will run even if the salon has already been closed out. Since
‘ŽȱŠž˜ȱŒ•˜œŽȱ˜žȱ™›˜ŒŽœœȱ˜Žœȱ—˜ȱž™ŠŽȱ¢˜ž›ȱ˜ŸŽ›Ȧœ‘˜›ȱŒ˜ž—œǰȱœŽĴ’—ȱ‘’œȱ˜ȱȈŽœȈȱ–Š¢ȱ–Š”Žȱ
your over/short appear inaccurate.
51
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Inventory
Setup Tab ĺ Software Settings ĺ6\VWHPĺ,QYHQWRU\
SuperSalon can be customized to handle a variety of inventory needs.
’ž›ŽȱŚśȱȬȱ—ŸŽ—˜›¢ȱ˜ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œ
Allow Clearance Price Discount
Average Inventory Type
Choose whether you wish to use a weighted average inventory type or not.
Inventory Manager - Enable [Enter] to Update Product
ȱ¢˜žȱ ˜ž•ȱ•’”Žȱ˜ȱžœŽȱ‘Žȱ—Ž›ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜—ȱ¢˜ž›ȱ”Ž¢‹˜Š›ȱ˜ȱž™ŠŽȱ™›˜žŒœȱ ‘Ž—ȱžœ’—ȱ‘Žȱ
Inventory Manager, enable this option.
52
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Show Option to Add Returns to Inventory (Put Back on Shelf)
Enabling this option will allow you to choose whether an item being returned will be put back on
‘Žȱœ‘Ž•ȱ˜›ȱ—˜ǯȱ‘ŽœŽȱ‹žĴ˜—œȱ ’••ȱœ‘˜ ȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ’’˜—Š•ȱŽž—ȱ—˜›–Š’˜—ȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯ
Block Back Bar Product Sale
Enable this option if you wish to prevent employees from selling Back Bar items. You must also select
"Back Bar" from the Type drop down on the product record (Manager Tab ĺ Products ĺ Product
Record ĺ Type).
Track Pricing History
If this option is enabled, the system will track product pricing history. This is used in the Proof of
Inventory report (Reports Tab ĺ Retail ĺ Proof of Inventory Report) to calculate the cost of goods
œ˜•ȱ’—ȱœ™ŽŒ’ęŒȱŠŽȱ›Š—Žœǯ
Prompt for Upload After Product Order is Ordered Electronically
ȱŽ—Š‹•Žǰȱ‘Žȱœ¢œŽ–ȱ ’••ȱ™›˜–™ȱ‘ŽȱžœŽ›ȱ˜ȱž™•˜ŠȱŠĞŽ›ȱŠȱ™›˜žŒȱ˜›Ž›ȱ’œȱœŽ—ȱŽ•ŽŒ›˜—’ŒŠ••¢ǯ
Display Store Quantity
If enabled, the system will add a column on the Product Count List (Reports Tab ĺ Mini-Reports ĺ
Product Count List) showing the current quantity on hand.
Remember Last Product Search
ȱŽ—Š‹•Žǰȱ‘Žȱœ¢œŽ–ȱ ’••ȱŠž˜–Š’ŒŠ••¢ȱꕕȱ’—ȱ‘Žȱ•Šœȱ™›˜žŒȱœŽŠ›Œ‘Žȱ˜—ȱ‘ŽȱŽŠ›Œ‘ȱ›˜žŒȱ’œȱ
(Manager Tab ĺ Products ĺ Search Product List).
Adjust Reasons
‘ŽœŽȱ ’••ȱœ‘˜ ȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ—ŸŽ—˜›¢ȱŠ—ŠŽ›ȱ ‘Ž—ȱŠ“žœ’—ȱ™›˜žŒœȱ’—ȱ˜›ȱ˜žȱ(Manager Tab ĺ
Products ĺ Inventory Manager ĺȱ“žœȱ—Ȧ“žœȱžǼ.
53
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Appointments
Setup Tab ĺ Software Settings ĺ6\VWHPĺ$SSRLQWPHQWV
’ž›ŽȱŚŜȱȬȱ™™˜’—–Ž—ȱ˜ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œ
Show Appointment Tab (Press F5 After Save Settings)
If you do not wish to use the appointment book screens, disable this line. The Appointment Tab will
be removed.
Manually Assign Resources
When making an appointment you can manually assign resources to your customers or have
SuperSalon assign your resources for you. To manually assign your resources enable this line (to set
up resources select the Manager Tab ĺ Resources).
Show Optimum Book Intervals
If this feature is enabled, you will be able to select an optimum booking interval from the Optimum
˜˜”ȱ—Ž›ŸŠ•ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜—ȱ‘ŽȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱŽ—Ž›Š•ȱ—˜›–Š’˜—ȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱ(Manager Tab ĺ Employees ĺ
Select Employee ĺȱŽ—Ž›Š•ȱ‹žĴ˜—Ǽ.
54
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Void Waiting/Servicing Tickets when Deleting Itinerary
When this line is enabled, tickets associated with an appointment will be deleted from the Wait/Serve
screen if the itinerary is deleted. If disabled, the itinerary will be deleted, but any ticket in the Wait or
Serve column will remain.
Limit Employee Selection by Request Type
—Š‹•’—ȱ‘’œȱ•’—Žȱ ’••ȱꕝŽ›ȱ‘Žȱ•’œȱ˜ȱœ¢•’œȱŠŸŠ’•Š‹•Žȱ‹¢ȱ‘Žȱ›ŽšžŽœȱ¢™Žȱ ‘Ž—ȱ–Š”’—ȱŠ—ȱ
Š™™˜’—–Ž—ǯȱ—ȱ˜›Ž›ȱ˜›ȱ‘’œȱ˜ȱ ˜›”ȱ™›˜™Ž›•¢ǰȱŽŠŒ‘ȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ–žœȱ‘ŠŸŽȱŠȱŽ—Ž›ȱŒ˜—ꐞ›Žȱ’—ȱ
their employee setup.
Allow Duration to be Edited
If you disable this line, you will not be able to edit the duration for appointments.
Display the Post Booking Summary
ȱ‘’œȱŽŠž›Žȱ’œȱŽ—Š‹•Žǰȱ‘Žȱ™™˜’—–Ž—ȱ˜˜”’—ȱž––Š›¢ȱ ’••ȱ™˜™ȱž™ȱŠĞŽ›ȱŒ›ŽŠ’—ȱŠ—ȱ
appointment.
Display Customer Gender on Appointment
If this feature is enabled, the customer gender will be displayed on the appointment.
Default Screen Main or Resource View
Here you can set your default Appointment screen to show resources or show employees.
Keep Date and Time After Appointment Actions
Ў›ȱ‹˜˜”’—ȱŠ—ȱŠ™™˜’—–Ž—ȱ˜›ȱŠȱžž›ŽȱŠŽǰȱ¢˜žȱ‘ŠŸŽȱ‘Žȱ˜™’˜—ȱ˜ȱ›Žž›—ȱ˜ȱ˜Š¢ȇœȱŠŽȱ˜›ȱ”ŽŽ™ȱ
the view on the future date. If this line is enabled, the Appointment book will return the view to
today's date.
Track Booking and Editing Employees for Appointments
This option enables or disables the ability to track what user is creating or editing appointments. This
information shows on the appointment popup when you select an appointment.
Track Request Types
Select "Yes" here to track request types.
Track Appointment Requests on Production Report
Enable this line to add appointment requests to the Production report.
Track Customer Sources
Selecting "Yes" here adds a popup to select the customer source while creating an appointment.
Customer Sources can be edited/created at Setup Tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱĺ Marketing ĺ Customer
Lookup & Tracking.
Allow Request Types to be Edited After Appointment Creation
—Š‹•Žȱ‘’œȱ•’—Žȱ˜ȱŠ••˜ ȱŽ’’—ȱ˜ȱ›ŽšžŽœȱ¢™ŽœȱŠĞŽ›ȱŒ›ŽŠ’—ȱŠ—ȱŠ™™˜’—–Ž—ǯ
Allow Source to be Edited After Appointment Creation
—Š‹•Žȱ‘’œȱ•’—Žȱ˜ȱŠ••˜ ȱŽ’’—ȱ˜ȱŒžœ˜–Ž›ȱœ˜ž›ŒŽœȱŠĞŽ›ȱŒ›ŽŠ’—ȱŠ—ȱŠ™™˜’—–Ž—ǯ
55
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Flash Notes button if Notes are Present
Ž•ŽŒ’—ȱȃ—¢Ȅȱ‘Ž›Žȱ ’••ȱŒŠžœŽȱ‘Žȱ˜Žœȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ™™˜’—–Ž—ȱ—˜›–Š’˜—ȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱ˜ȱ̊œ‘ȱ
green, to let you know there are Itinerary notes and/or Internal notes. If you select “Internal” here, the
˜Žœȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ ’••ȱ˜—•¢ȱ̊œ‘ȱ’ȱ‘Ž›ŽȱŠ›Žȱ—Ž›—Š•ȱ—˜Žœǯȱȱ¢˜žȱœŽ•ŽŒȱȃ’—Ž›Š›¢Ȅȱ‘Ž›Žǰȱ‘Žȱ˜Žœȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ
’••ȱ˜—•¢ȱ̊œ‘ȱ’ȱ‘Ž›ŽȱŠ›Žȱ’—Ž›Š›¢ȱ—˜Žœǯȱȱ¢˜žȱœŽ•ŽŒȱȃ˜Ȅȱ‘Ž›Žȱ‘Žȱ˜Žœȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ ’••ȱ—˜ȱ̊œ‘ȱ
regardless of whether there are notes or not.
Days to Check for Duplicate Booking
Enter the number of days ahead you wish the system to check for duplicate bookings here. The
system will notify you when you are double booked. If it is not necessary to have the system check
for double booking, enter a "0" to disable.
Appointment Screen Timeout in Seconds
—Ž›ȱŠȱ—˜—Ȭ£Ž›˜ȱŸŠ•žŽȱ‘Ž›Žȱ˜ȱ›Žšž’›ŽȱŠ—ȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ˜ȱ•˜ȱ’—ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ™™˜’—–Ž—ȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱŠĞŽ›ȱ‘Žȱ
screen is idle for the entered number of seconds. Entering zero will disable this function.
Appointment Time Interval
Select your preferred appointment time interval. Intervals are in 15 minute increments.
Products Attached to Appointments Default to House Sale for Commission
A customer who has come in for an appointment may purchase a product at Check-Out. If this line
is enabled, the commission for the product will be assigned as a house sale. If disabled, the stylist
performing the services will receive the commission.
56
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Security & Privacy
Setup Tab ĺ Software Settings ĺ6\VWHPĺ6HFXULW\3ULYDF\
’ž›ŽȱŚŝȱȬȱŽŒž›’¢ȱǭȱ›’ŸŠŒ¢ȱ˜ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œ
Authentication Dialog Mode
By default, the Authentication box displays a list of individuals who are currently clocked in. If this
option is disabled the authentication box does not display the name of anyone. Instead, in order to
access screens that require a password, employees will be required to search for their name and then
input their password. Employees who are not clocked in can be searched for.
Auto Log Out at Sales Screen (Press F5 After Save Settings)
Enabling this option will cause the Authentication Lock to close each time the Sales Tab is selected.
57
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Allow Ticket to be Edited in Servicing
—Š‹•’—ȱ‘’œȱ•’—ŽȱŠ••˜ œȱ’Œ”Žœȱ˜ȱ‹ŽȱŽ’ŽȱŠĞŽ›ȱ‘Ž¢ȱŠ›ŽȱŒ›ŽŠŽǯȱ‘’œȱ˜™’˜—ȱŒ˜ž•ȱŠœœ’œȱ’—ȱ
Ž•’–’—Š’—ȱ‘ŽĞȱ˜™™˜›ž—’¢ȱŠœȱ˜‘Ž› ’œŽȱŠ—ȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱŒ˜ž•ȱŒ‘Š—Žȱ‘ŽȱŒžœ˜–Ž›ȱ—Š–Žȱ˜ȱŠȱ—Ž ȱ
˜—ŽȱŠ—ȱŽěŽŒ’ŸŽ•¢ȱ›Ž–˜ŸŽȱ‘Žȱ˜›’’—Š•ȱŒžœ˜–Ž›ȱ’Œ”Žǯ
Allow Editing of Previous Day Tickets
If this line is disabled, you will not be able to edit previous day's tickets.
Enable Upload Based Lock Down
If enabled will lock SuperSalonȱ˜ —ȱ’ȱŠ—ȱž™•˜Šȱ‘Šœȱ—˜ȱ˜ŒŒž››ŽȱŠĞŽ›ȱŠȱŽœ’—ŠŽȱ—ž–‹Ž›ȱ˜ȱ
days. This is most commonly disabled.
Upload Lock Down Interval
The is the time frame set to initiate the lock down if an upload has not occurred.
58
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Time Clock & Scheduling
Setup Tab ĺ Software Settings ĺ6\VWHPĺ7LPH&ORFN6FKHGXOLQJ
’ž›ŽȱŚŞȱȬȱ’–Žȱ•˜Œ”ȱǭȱŒ‘Žž•’—ȱ˜ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œ
Disable Time Clock Reports
If this line is disabled, employees will not be able to print the Mini Production and Itemize Reports
from the Time Clock.
Require Password for Clock In/Out
Enable this option to require employees to enter a password when clocking in on the Time Clock Tab.
Only Show Employee Position In Time Clock
When enabled, the position set for an employee in the general section of their Employee Setup
(Manager Tab ĺ Employees ĺ Select Employee ĺȱŽ—Ž›Š•ȱ‹žĴ˜—Ǽ is the only position that will be
available for them to clock in as under the Time Clock tab. Positions can be created under Setup Tab
ĺ Positions.
59
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Schedule Based Time Clock
Enable this line to change the Time Clock to one that is schedule based. When schedule based
Time Clock is enabled, employees are automatically clocked in based on the times they have been
scheduled for under Manager Tab ĺ Employees ĺ Employee Scheduler.
Default Schedule Screen
If "Day View" is chosen, the scheduler will default to the current day. If "Schedule View" is selected,
the Scheduler will default to the current week.
Amount of Time Allowed to Schedule Outside Store Hours
If you would like the ability to schedule employees outside of store hours, enter the amount of time
here.
60
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Wait Time
Setup Tab ĺ Software Settings ĺ6\VWHPĺ:DLW7LPH
’ž›ŽȱŚşȱȬȱŠ’ȱ’–Žȱ˜ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œ
Wait Time Calculation
Wait time calculation assigns customers to stylists based on which one is predicted to be available
next. It calculates when a stylist will be done with their current customer (based on the stylist’s set
completion time) and then assigns the next customer in line (unless they have a request for a different
stylist). This is based on the wait time or call ahead time of the ticket. Depending on the settings, it
may factor in schedules. To see the mapping the system generates click on the wait time bar.
Wait Time Disabled
When this is set to yes, wait time calculation is turned off. Turned on, SuperSalon can continually
calculate the approximate wait time for walk-in customers. This allows a receptionist to quickly give
the customer a wait time quote. Disallow this line to prevent the system from using this calculation.
61
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Default Service/Default Time
The call-ahead wait time is designed to assume that walk-ins may show up before the call-aheads
arrive. To provide an accurate time estimate, SuperSalon pads the call -ahead time estimates to
accommodate potential walk-ins. The service or time chosen here is the assumed service time of any
potential walk-ins. Figure 49 shows the relationship between the wait time settings and the wait time
bar on the sales tab.
Assumed Walk-In Rate %
This option creates a separate wait time bar for call-aheads, provided a number larger than 0 is used.
The call ahead wait time bar is calculated based on the Default Service/Time selected and whatever
percentage is used in this box. Locations that constantly have customers walking in may want to use
a higher Assumed Walk-in Rate % so that their call ahead customers have a more accurate view of
the potential wait time.
Wait Time Tuner %
This option will increase or decrease the walk-in wait time and the call-ahead wait time calculation
‹¢ȱ‘Žȱœ™ŽŒ’’Žȱ™Ž›ŒŽ—ŠŽǯȱȱŠ••˜ œȱ¢˜žȱ˜ȱŠ“žœȱ‘Žȱ Š’ȱ’–ŽȱŽœ’–Š˜›ȱ˜ȱ¢˜ž›ȱœŠ•˜—ǯ
Wait Time Refresh Rate %
This option specifies how frequently the wait time will update on your sales screen. Lower numbers
will increase accuracy but require more system resources.
Factor in Employees Schedules
When enabled, wait time calculations will consider employee schedules when determining the wait
time. If set to “yes” and an employee is scheduled to come in within the current wait time, the wait
time will reflect that accordingly. It will also take into consideration if an employee is blocked out
for a period of time. If the employee does not clock in at their scheduled time the customer will be
factored into another employees queue.
Factor in Appointments
This option determines whether or not pending appointments are factored into the current wait time.
If enabled, it will automatically assign an employee’s appointments to them. Employees will show up
in the list even if they are not clocked in. If they do not take their appointment at its scheduled time
the appointment will not be factored to anyone and the employee will not appear in the wait time
list. Additionally, if an appointment is scheduled by resource, without an employee selected, it will
put the appointment into an employee’s queue that is available at that time.
62
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Check-In Kiosk
Setup Tab ĺ Software Settings ĺ6\VWHPĺ&KHFN,Q.LRVN
The optional SuperSalon Check-In Kiosk improves service and eliminates the sign in sheet. With
the Check-In Kiosk stylist do not need to leave their existing customers to check in new customers.
Customers use a touch screen touch screen to check themselves in and select services and other items
you have set up to collect.
˜ȱŒ˜—ꐞ›Žȱ¢˜ž›ȱ’˜œ”ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŠž—Œ‘ȱ’˜œ”ȱ
˜—ꐞ›Š’˜—ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ‘ŽȱœŽž™ȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱ ’••ȱ
launch in a new tab. There you will be able to
enter your Welcome Text, decide whether to
show the number of waiting tickets to your new
customers, determine how much data you wish
to collect from your customers, etc.
If you do not have the SuperSalon CheckIn Kiosk and would like to learn more, please
contact the Rogers' Sales department (888-4581001 then press 3 or e-mail [email protected]).
’ž›ŽȱśŖȱȬȱž™Ž›Š•˜—ȱ‘ŽŒ”Ȭ—ȱ’˜œ”
63
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
School Settings
Setup Tab ĺ Software Settings ĺ6\VWHPĺ6FKRRO6HWWLQJV
SuperSalon has many functions that apply to schools. Here is where you enable or disable these
functions. When you enable School Functions several new fields and buttons appear throughout
SuperSalon.
Setup Tab ĺȱŒ‘˜˜•ȱŽĴ’—œ — Use this screen to setup tuition types.
Manager Tab ĺ School — Here you can enter or edit tuition payments made by
students.
Reports Tab ĺ School ĺ Tuition Payments, Student Credit Totals, Student Credits,
Student Grades — These reports shows tuition payments by type, date, amount,
student name, student ID, student credits, and student grades.
Manager Tab ĺ Close Out — Tuition payments are also listed in the Deposit
Summary of the Close Out screen.
64
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Customers
Setup Tab ĺ Software Settings ĺ6\VWHPĺ&XVWRPHUV
’ž›ŽȱśŗȱȬȱžœ˜–Ž›œȱ˜ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œ
First Name
If enabled, the New Customer check-in will require the customers First Name to be entered before
™›˜ŒŽŽ’—ǯȱ—ȱŠœŽ›’œ”ȱȘȱ ’••ȱŠ™™ŽŠ›ȱ—ŽŠ›ȱŽŠŒ‘ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ›Žšž’›Žȱꎕœȱ ‘’•ŽȱŒ‘ŽŒ”’—ȱ’—ǯ
Last Name
If enabled, the New Customer check-in will require the customers Last Name to be entered before
™›˜ŒŽŽ’—ǯȱ—ȱŠœŽ›’œ”ȱȘȱ ’••ȱŠ™™ŽŠ›ȱ—ŽŠ›ȱŽŠŒ‘ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ›Žšž’›Žȱꎕœȱ ‘’•ŽȱŒ‘ŽŒ”’—ȱ’—ǯ
Middle Name
If enabled, the New Customer check-in will require the customers Middle Name to be entered before
™›˜ŒŽŽ’—ǯȱ—ȱŠœŽ›’œ”ȱȘȱ ’••ȱŠ™™ŽŠ›ȱ—ŽŠ›ȱŽŠŒ‘ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ›Žšž’›Žȱꎕœȱ ‘’•ŽȱŒ‘ŽŒ”’—ȱ’—ǯ
65
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Home Phone
If enabled, the New Customer check-in will require the customers Home Phone to be entered before
proceeding. An asterisk * will appear near each of the required fields while checking in.
Work Phone
If enabled, the New Customer check-in will require the customers Work Phone to be entered before
proceeding. An asterisk * will appear near each of the required fields while checking in.
Cell Phone
If enabled, the New Customer check-in will require the customers Cell Phone to be entered before
proceeding. An asterisk * will appear near each of the required fields while checking in.
Country
If enabled, the New Customer check-in will require the customers Country to be selected from
the drop menu before proceeding. An asterisk * will appear near each of the required fields while
checking in.
Zip
If enabled, the New Customer check-in will require the customers Zip code to be entered before
proceeding. An asterisk * will appear near each of the required fields while checking in.
City
If enabled, the New Customer check-in will require the customers City to be entered before
proceeding. An asterisk * will appear near each of the required fields while checking in.
State
If enabled, the New Customer check-in will require the customers State to be entered before
proceeding. An asterisk * will appear near each of the required fields while checking in.
Address 1
If enabled, the New Customer check-in will require the customers Address to be entered before
proceeding. An asterisk * will appear near each of the required fields while checking in.
Address 2
If enabled, the New Customer check-in will require the customers Address to be entered before
proceeding. An asterisk * will appear near each of the required fields while checking in.
E-mail
If enabled, the New Customer check-in will require the customers E-mail address to be entered
before proceeding. An asterisk * will appear near each of the required fields while checking in.
Date of Birth
If enabled, the New Customer check-in will require the customers Date Of Birth to be entered before
proceeding. An asterisk * will appear near each of the required fields while checking in
Gender
If enabled, the New Customer check-in will require the customers Gender to be selected from the
pop-up menu before proceeding. An asterisk * will appear near each of the required fields while
checking in.
66
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Tickets & Sales
Setup Tab ĺ Software Settings ĺ6DOHVĺ7LFNHWV6DOHV
’ž›ŽȱśŘȱȬȱ’Œ”ŽœȱǭȱŠ•Žœȱ˜ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œ
Discounts Return to First Page
If enabled, during Check-Out the discount menu will remain open and reset back to page one of the
discounts after a discount has been applied to a service/product.
Show Customer Information in Release Header
If enabled it will populate the top of the Chemical release with the Customer's Name, address and
phone. It will leave blank information that is missing.
Allow Edit Commission at Checkout
If enabled, Users will be able to re-assign commission to a different stylist during Check-Out,
eliminating the need to return the ticket back to waiting or servicing.
67
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Require All Tickets Closed Before Closeout
If enabled, the following message will appear during close-out if there are any tickets left to be
Œ˜–™•ŽŽȱǻ ‘Ž‘Ž›ȱ‘Ž¢ȱ‹Žȱ’—ȱ Š’’—ǰȱœŽ›Ÿ’Œ’—ȱ˜›ȱ‘ŽŒ”ȬžǼDZȱȈ‘Ž›ŽȱŠ›ŽȱǛȱ’Œ”Žœȱœ’••ȱ’—ȱ‘ŽŒ”Ȭ
Out." All tickets must be completed or voided before the close-out can be completed.
Enable Service Requests in System
If enabled, customer check-in will allow services to be preselected prior to servicing.
Set Active Stylist to Commission on Checkout
If enabled, the stylist selected when a ticket is moved to servicing overrides any previously-assigned
stylist for commission.
Show Void button on Checkout
If enabled, a void button will appear in the lower right hand corner of the Check-Out screen. This
will allow you to void a ticket from the Check-Out screen. When disabled, you will be required to
move the ticket back to servicing to void.
Use Gender Based Pricing
If enabled, Manager ĺ Services ĺ New/Edit Service will have two price fields available, one for Male
and one for Female.
’™DZȱŽȱœž›Žȱ˜ȱŽ—Š‹•Žȱ“Gender” during customer check-in.
Enable Price Groups
Price Groups is a feature enabling you to set different service prices for employee groups. The
feature allows three levels of pricing. The first level is the default price setup within the service. The
second level is a group that you can identify new prices for each individual service, and then assign
employees to be part of this price group. The third level is a Stylist specific price where you indicate
that a stylist has a unique price for performing this service.
Allow Duplicate Services in Package
If enabled, when creating packages, you will be able to add duplicate services to the package.
Services buttons in Customer Lookup
If enabled, the Customer Look up screen with have the following buttons added to the menu. Open
Till, More and Wait/Serve.
Allow Split Commission in Service Setup
If enabled, Manager ĺ Services ĺ Edit Service Menu ĺ Number of Employees on Commission will
become available. You can create a commission percentage to allow the service commission to be split
between two or more employees on the same service during Check-Out.
Auto Prompt for Split Commission in Checkout
If enabled, any service listed with split commission will result with a pop-up during Check-Out
forcing the user to select and end the commission split information.
Enable Auto Discounting
If enabled, Auto discounts allows you to set up a discount that will automatically be applied when a
68
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
ticket reaches a specified amount. This can be set to include services or products, or both.
Rearrange Details in Sales Register
If enabled, it rearranges the row layout on the Sales Register Report. The normal layout is Total,
Discount, Tax Total, Net Amount, Basic, Cash, Card, Gift Voucher, Sales Redeem, Walkout, and
Walkin. With the option turned on, this layout is changed to Basic, Total, Discount, Coupon, Tax, Net
Amount, Cash, Card, Gift Voucher, Sales Redeem, Walkout, Walkin.
Round Off the Payment Amount
If enabled, on the Check-Out screen, transactions are automatically rounded to the highest or lowest
number based on the decimal place. $1.49 or less will become $1 and $1.50 or greater will become $2.
This change does not take place until the Payment screen of the Check-Out process.
Enable HUL Series Sale
This feature is not implemented for US locations.
Enable HUL Package Sale
This feature is not implemented for US locations.
Skip Ticket Options
Skip Ticket allows you to bypass the wait/serve screen while still obtaining customer information
then moving the ticket directly to Check-Out once a service and stylist has been selected from the
preselect menu.
Auto Complete All Tickets in a Multiticket
If enabled, all tickets that are part of a Multiticket will automatically be completed once the CheckOut process is finished.
Ringout Sale Automatically
If enabled, once a payment amount/type is selected on the Check-Out screen, the ticket will
automatically ring itself out.
Complete Sale Automatically/Number of Seconds to Wait on Auto Complete Ticket
If enabled, once a ticket has passed the ringout phase of Check-Out, the ticket will automatically
complete itself taking the user back to the Sales or Appointment tab depending on “Default Screen”
œŽĴ’—œǯȱЎ›ȱŽ—Š‹•’—ȱ‘ŽȱœŽĴ’—ǰȱ‹Žȱœž›Žȱ˜ȱŽ—Ž›ȱ‘Žȱ—ž–‹Ž›ȱ˜ȱœŽŒ˜—œȱ˜ȱ Š’ȱŠĞŽ›ȱ›’—˜žȱ‘Šȱ
you want the ticket to complete.
Automatically Void Waiting Tickets After
This option will automatically void tickets that are still in waiting based on the numerical value
entered in the box.
Show Clocked in Employees on Lookup Screen by Default
Enable this option to show all employees who are clocked in on any of the employee lookup screens.
Show Non Clocked in Employees on Lookup Screens
Enable this option to show all employees who are not clocked in on any of the employee lookup
screens.
69
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
’ž›ŽȱśřȱȬȱ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱŽ•ŽŒȱŒ›ŽŽ—
Display 'Next Available Stylist'
Enable this option to use the Next Available Stylist algorithm.
Use Logged in Employee as Receptionist
Enable this option to have the receptionist selection screen default to the authenticated user in
SuperSalon. If this option is off, the user is required to select the employee.
Allow Selection of "House Sale" for Ticket Receptionist
Enable this option to enable House Sale as a selectable employee. If this option is disabled, then
House Sale will not show up on any of the employee lists.
Default Employee List for Employee Selection
Select the default employee type to have show up in the employee selection screen. The available
options are "All Active", "Clocked In", and "Production."
Default Employee List for Quick Sale Tickets
Select the default employee type to have show up in the employee selection screen when creating a
Quick Sale. The available options are "All Active", "Clocked In", and "Production."
Default Checkout List
Select whether to display the Service Quick Keys (Manager ĺ Service ĺ Quick Keys), full service
list, or full product list on the Check-Out screen. This option does not affect what appears in the
Actions Menu.
Allow Services to be Pre-Selected
Enable this option to allow services to be pre-selected during new ticket creation.
Sort Pre-Selected Services by
Toggle this option to switch the order of pre-selected services by either code or description.
70
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Require Pre-Selected Services
Enable this option to require employees pre-select services during new ticket creation.
Pass Pre-Selected Services to Check-Out
Enable this option to allow services that have been pre-selected to move to the check-out screen. If
this option is disabled, services will need to be selected again once the ticket moves to check-out.
Show Service Price When Pre-Selecting Services
Enable this option to display the service price when pre-selecting services during new ticket creation.
Void Reasons
Enter the void reasons for your location here. There are 10 available slots.
71
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Reports
Setup Tab ĺ Software Settings ĺ6DOHVĺ5HSRUWV
’ž›ŽȱśŚȱȬȱŽ™˜›ȱ˜ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œ
Show Today Sales Stats
If enabled, Users will be allowed to view Sales Stats by selecting the More button on the Sales tab.
Stats include the number of tickets in waiting, in servicing, completed, voided, and the totals of all
tickets included in these stats.
Haircut Min Flag Time
Specify a minimum flag time for haircuts for anti-theft. If an employee performs a service without
entering it in the computer, but enters it at the last minute because the customer wants a receipt, or
because another employee arrives, this will be flagged.
72
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Haircut Max Flag Time
Specify a Maximum flag time for haircuts for anti-theft. If a haircut typically takes 15 minutes, you
might set the maximum to 20 minutes. If a haircut takes 40 minutes it will be flagged. Sometimes this
can indicate that a more expensive service was performed, but the employee only entered a haircut
and kept the extra money.
Base Cut Price
Used in the reports system to determine the cuts per hour equivalent when other services are figured
into production.
Include Requests in Service Sales
If enabled, requests will be listed as service on the Production report.
Age Definitions - Child/Teen/Adult
Customize your customer age group. If you are using the Customer Database, customers will be
tracked automatically based on their birthday.
Mini-Production Report - Display Gross Column
If enabled, this feature will add a Gross $ column to the Sales Summary on the Mini-Production
Report.
Weekly Report Start Day
Specify the day of the week you would like the Weekly Report to start from. Try to match this day
with your pay period to reduce confusion.
Show 'Additional Time' as 'Personal Time'
Enable this option to change 'Additional Time' to show as 'Personal Time' on the Timecard Report
(Reports ĺ Payroll ĺ Timecard). This change is purely cosmetic.
73
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Tips
Setup Tab ĺ Software Settings ĺ6DOHVĺ7LSV
’ž›ŽȱśśȱȬȱ’™ȱ˜ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œ
Tip Adjustments on Timeclock
ȱŽ—Š‹•Žǰȱ‘’œȱŽŠž›ŽȱŠœȱŠȱ’™ȱ“žœ–Ž—ȱ’Ž•ȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ’–Žȱ•˜Œ”ǯȱ‘’œȱ’Ž•ȱŠ••˜ œȱžœŽ›œȱ˜ȱ
Š“žœȱ‘Ž’›ȱ’™œȱ’—ȱ‘ŽȱŽŸŽ—ȱ‘Ž¢ȱ Ž›ŽȱŽ—Ž›Žȱ’—Œ˜››ŽŒ•¢ǯ
Subtract Tips on Close Out
If enabled, tips will be included in the total dollar amount to be balanced at Close Out. A line is also
added to the Close Out to add in the amount of tips.
Subtract Tips From Change on Checkout
If enabled, the system will automatically display the change with the tip subtracted so that the user
knows exactly how much to take from the drawer that doesn't include the tip.
74
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Track Employee Tips
If enabled, an additional pop-up will be displayed on the check-out screen. This screen allows the
user to enter tip amounts for additional employees involved in the transaction.
Only Show Tip Prompt for Service Sales
If enabled, the popup for tips will only be presented for service sales.
Auto Credit Tip ĺ Employee
If enabled, a "Keep the Change" feature will automatically track tips which are generated from a
credit card transaction. When a credit card is processed through SuperSalon's integrated card
processing system and a tip is entered, the tip amount automatically gets put into the "Employee
Tips" box. These tips are carried over to the Payroll Report.
Force Minimum Tip Amount
If enabled, sets a mandatory tip of at least $1.00 for all transactions in instances where a customer
give an employee a tip.
Force All Change as Tip
If enabled, sets all change as the tip amount.
Enable Tips Paid Out
If enabled, adds an Employee Tips button to the Open Till Section.
Allow tips to be adjusted negatively
If enabled, SuperSalonȱ ’••ȱŠ••˜ ȱ’™œȱ˜ȱ‹ŽȱŠ“žœŽȱ—ŽŠ’ŸŽ•¢ȱ’—ȱ‘Žȱ’–Ž•˜Œ”ȱ’™ȱ“žœ–Ž—ȱ
section.
Credit Card Tip Warning
If enabled, the system will warn the user if a tip exceeds a certain percentage of the total amount of a
ticket, enter the percentage in this field. Enter 0 to disable.
Allow Tip Limit
If enabled, SuperSalon will allow a tip limit.
Tip Limit Percentage
Enter the Tip Limit percentage. This feature runs in tandem with "Allow Tip Limit".
75
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Walk Accounts
Setup Tab ĺ Software Settings ĺ6DOHVĺ:DON$FFRXQWV
’ž›ŽȱśŜȱȬȱŠ•”ȱŒŒ˜ž—ȱ˜ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œ
Text Before Balance
—Ž›ȱ‘ŽȱŽ¡ȱ¢˜žȱ ˜ž•ȱ•’”Žȱ˜ȱ’œ™•Š¢ȱ‹Ž˜›ŽȱŠ—¢ȱ›Š—œŠŒ’˜—œȱŠ›ŽȱœŽȱž™ǯȱ˜›ȱŽ¡Š–™•ŽDZȱȈžœ˜–Ž›ȱ
owes the following amount".
Text After Balance
Enter the text you would like to display after any transactions are paid.
Show During Appointment Booking
If enabled, Alert note(s) will prompt during Appointment booking.
Show in Servicing From Appointment
If enabled, Alert note(s) will prompt during the Servicing of an Appointment booking.
76
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Show During New Ticket Creation
If enabled, Alert note(s) will prompt during New Ticket Creation.
Show in Servicing From Waiting Tickets
If enabled, Alert note(s) will prompt when the ticket is in waiting.
Show in Service Ticket Receipt
If enabled, Alert note(s) will prompt during Servicing.
Add Walk Account
Create new walk accounts. Each account requires a code, a name, and a type. The available types are
in or out.
’ž›ŽȱśŝȱȬȱŽ ȱŠ•”ȱŒŒ˜ž—ȱŽž™
77
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
SMS & E-mail
Setup Tab ĺ Software Settings ĺ0DUNHWLQJĺ606(PDLO
’ž›ŽȱśŞȱȬȱȱǭȱȬ–Š’•ȱ˜ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œ
Allow SMS Feedback System
If enabled, the SMS feature can be used to instantly communicate with customers. It can provide
electronic receipts, thank you's, reduce customer no-shows, increase customer return rate, send
promotional messages, and send "Happy Birthday" message.
Tip: SuperSalonȱœŠěȱ—ŽŽœȱ˜ȱŽ—Š‹•Žȱȱ˜›ȱ¢˜ž›ȱŠŒŒ˜ž—ǯȱ˜žȱ ’••ȱ
need to select which stores will be active.
78
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Enable SMS Messaging
If enabled, the SMS Feature will become active in the POS. SuperSalon only sends SMS messages to
customers who are set to receive them. In order to opt customers in, select "Yes" under allow SMS on
the customer record (Manager Tab ĺ Customers ĺ Customer Search ĺ Select Customer ĺ Allow
SMS).
Salon Mobile Number
Enter your Salon Mobile Number
SMS Account Balance
SMS messages must be purchased through SuperSalon Accounting to use the SMS system. This
field will let you view your balance.
Appointment Alert Message
Enter the message you want be sent out to customers after booking an appointment. In order for the
message to be sent, "Send this message after appointment booking" will need to be enabled. There is
a 140 character limit.
Appointment Confirmation Message
Enter the message you want be sent out to customers after confirming an appointment. In order for
the message to be sent, "Send this message on appointment confirmation" will need to be enabled.
There is a 140 character limit.
Appointment Reminder Message
Enter the message you want to be sent out to customers as a reminder for an appointment. In order
for the message to be sent, "Send reminder (X) hours before appointment time" will need to be
enabled. There is a 140 character limit.
Checkout Alert Message
Enter the message you want to be sent out to customers after Check-Out. In order for the message to
be sent, "Send message (X) minutes after checkout" will need to be enabled. There is a 140 character
limit.
Return Visit Reminder Message
Enter the message you want to be sent out to customers as a reminder to return to the salon. In order
for the message to be sent, "Send message (X) days after checkout" will need to be enabled. There is a
140 character limit.
Birthday Alert Message
Enter the message you want to have sent out to customers as a congratulation for their birthday. In
order for the message to be sent, "Send message (X) days before customer's birthday" will need to
be enabled. As an additional option, it is possible to configure a send time. The format should be as
follows (
DZȱ) or (
DZȱ).
79
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Memberships
Setup Tab ĺ Software Settings ĺ0DUNHWLQJĺ0HPEHUVKLSV
’ž›ŽȱśşȱȬȱŽ–‹Ž›œ‘’™ȱ˜ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œ
Enable Membership Auto Discounting
If enabled, a customer who has purchased a Membership will have the membership discount
automatically applied at the Check-Out screen.
80
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Loyalty & Gift
Setup Tab ĺ Software Settings ĺ0DUNHWLQJĺ/R\DOW\*LIW
’ž›ŽȱŜŖȱȬȱ˜¢Š•¢ȱǭȱ’ȱ˜ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œ
Enable Gift Certificate System
If enabled, a Gift Certificate feature will be added to the Check-Out screen for the sale of gift
certificates as well as a gift certificate look-up and payment button enabled on the Payment screen.
Prevent Negative Gift Certificate Balances
If enabled, this feature to prevent negative gift certificate balances and deter possible theft. If
disabled, users will be allowed to redeem gift certificates with negative balances. If you are new to
SuperSalon and still need to redeem gift certificates from an old POS, then you may want to disable
this.
Accept SVS Reward Cards
If enabled, you will be allowed to issue and redeem SVS gift cards. Once enabled, navigate to Setup
81
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Tab ĺ Payment Methods ĺȱ’ĞȱŠ›ȱ›˜ŒŽœœ˜›ȱŽž™ȱĺ SVS to enter your SVS information.
When 'Pay Now' Pressed, Prompt for SVS Reward Cards
If enabled, a pop-up menu will request the customers SVS reward card when selecting Pay Now.
This can be cancelled if the customer does not have a SVS card.
Apply Reward Cards to
Specify if whether you want Reward Cards to apply to products, services, or both.
SVS Reward Card Discount Code
Specify the SVS Reward Card discount code here.
Points System
If enabled, the Points System allows you to assign point values to services and products. When the
customer points system is enabled, new sections relating to the customer points system will appear
throughout SuperSalon.
Manager ĺ Services — Use this screen to set the credit points, redeem points, and
discounts used to redeem points for services.
Manager ĺ Products — Use this screen to set the credit points, redeem points, and
discounts used to redeem points for products.
Sales ĺ Check-Out — In the check-out screen, you will be able to redeem the
customer's points.
Reports ĺ Customer Points — This report shows the total points credited, points
redeemed, and dollar amount of the discounts used to redeem customer points.
Allow Manual Changes to Customer Points
ȱŽ—Š‹•ŽǰȱœŽ›œȱ ’••ȱ‹ŽȱŠ‹•Žȱ˜ȱŠ“žœȱŒžœ˜–Ž›ȱ™˜’—œȱž—Ž›ȱManager tab ĺ Customers ĺ
Customer Panel.
Add Points When Redeemed
If enabled, Customers will obtain additional points while redeeming points for service(s) and or
product(s).
Add Loyalty Card on Add Customer Screen
If enabled, this feature will add the ability to include Loyalty card information on the New Customer
check-in screen.
Loyalty Cards Able to Track Commissions
If enabled, this feature will credit stylists with Loyalty card transactions, disabling will always credit
these to House.
82
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Customer Lookup & Tracking
Setup Tab ĺ Software Settings ĺ0DUNHWLQJĺ&XVWRPHU/RRNXS7UDFNLQJ
’ž›ŽȱŜŗȱȬȱžœ˜–Ž›ȱ˜˜”ž™ȱǭȱ›ŠŒ”’—
Use Customer Database
If enabled, the customer lookup screen will appear when the New Ticket button is selected. While
enabled, all customer data is stored and return visits from the customers will append to their existing
history. If disabled, the customer lookup screen is skipped and users are directed to the new ticket
creation screen. If the customer database is disabled, you can still enter a customer name for the
ticket, but customer history will not be maintained.
Allow Customer Lookup "Skip" button
If enabled, a Skip button is available at the bottom of the Customer Search screen allowing users to
proceed without entering a customer name.
83
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Require Last Name
If enabled, Customer(s) last name will be required throughout various Super Salon features.
Auto-Select Repeat for Customers
If enabled, the "Repeat" box for customers who have previously been entered into the database will
be selected automatically.
Auto-Select New for Customers
If enabled, a new customer added to the Super Salon Database will automatically be selected as
"New".
New Customer Entry Mode
˜•Žȱ˜›ȱ‘ŽȱŽœ’›Žȱ¢™Žȱ˜ȱ—Ž ȱŒžœ˜–Ž›ȱŽ—›¢ȱ–˜Žǯȱ‘ŽȱŠŸŠ’•Š‹•Žȱ¢™ŽœȱŠ›ŽDZ
Traditional — In the traditional mode, the customer database fields flow in a
›Š’’˜—Š•ȱ–Š——Ž›DZȱ—Š–ŽǰȱŠ›ŽœœǰȱŒ’¢ǰȱœŠŽǰȱ£’™ȱŒ˜Žǯ
Quick — In the quick mode, the most common customer information is arranged first.
Also, the zip code field comes before city, state, etc. which populate based on the zip
code entered.
Enter Customer Description When Creating Ticket
If enabled, this feature will provide a Description field for new tickets. Enter a visual characteristic
of the customer, this allows staff to view the details on the ticket while in waiting and approach the
customer, rather than calling out for the customer by name.
Show Membership ID on Customer Search
If enabled, Membership ID will appear next to customer(s) name during the customer search.
Customer Gender
Toggle for the desired customer demographic collection method. Yes will allow the selection,
Required will allow the selection as well as make it required to progress the ticket past customer
entry, and No will not provide an option for selection.
Customer Age
Toggle for the desired customer demographic collection method. Yes will allow the selection,
Required will allow the selection as well as make it required to progress the ticket past customer
entry, and No will not provide an option for selection.
Customer Source
Toggle for the desired customer demographic collection method. Yes will allow the selection,
Required will allow the selection as well as make it required to progress the ticket past customer
entry, and No will not provide an option for selection.
Require New/Recurring
Enable to require the selection of New or Recurring for customers during new ticket creation.
84
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Require Quick Sale Demographics
If enabled, users will be able to enter customer information when selecting Quick Sale. Typically
Quick Sales are reserved for product only sales.
Current Offer
Toggle for the desired customer demographic collection method. Yes will allow the selection,
Required will allow the selection as well as make it required to progress the ticket past customer
entry, and No will not provide an option for selection.
Default Gender for New Customer
Toggle the desired gender that new customer's will default. Available options are Male, Female, and
No Default.
Customer Sources
Enter Customer Sources and their Codes here. There are 6 available slots.
85
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Centralized Customer Data
Setup Tab ĺ Software Settings ĺ0DUNHWLQJĺ&HQWUDOL]HG&XVWRPHU'DWD
’ž›ŽȱŜŘȱȬȱŽ—›Š•’£Žȱžœ˜–Ž›ȱŠŠȱ˜ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œ
Show World Search button
If enabled, the New Ticket Customer Search screen will display a new feature, World Search. If
your salons are using World Search - World Customer Database (WCD), this feature will allow you
to search for customers from all your grouped salons allowing you to access your customers full
history, color information, etc. By default, this option is not available. SuperSalon technical support
will need to enable this for your location (Contact 888-458-1001 ext 1 or [email protected]).
Use Regis World Search
World Search managed and maintained by Regis. If you are a Regis Franchisee and you would like
to use the Regis WCD, contact your Regis Representative.
86
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Enable Auto-Update During Customer Selection
Enable to have the system automatically update customer information during customer selection.
Search by Name and Postcode
If enabled, World Search will search for customers by their Name and Postal code.
Search by Primary Phone Number
If enabled, World Search will search for customers by their Phone Number.
Search by Loyalty Number
If enabled, World Search will search for customers by their Loyalty Number.
Search by Quickpass ID
If enabled, World Search will search for customers by their Quickpass ID.
87
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
WebCheckin
Setup Tab ĺ Software Settings ĺ0DUNHWLQJĺ:HE&KHFNLQ
’ž›ŽȱŜřȱȬȱŽ‹‘ŽŒ”’—ȱ˜ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œ
WebCheckin Settings
These options are not available by default. If you wish to use the WebCheckin feature, allowing
customers to check into your salon for appointments and call aheads via the internet, then
SuperSalon technical support will need to be contacted to enable it for your location (888-458-1001
ext. 1 or [email protected]).
Tip:ȱ—ŒŽȱŽ—Š‹•Žǰȱ˜ȱ—˜ȱŒ‘Š—ŽȱŠ—¢ȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱœŽĴ’—œȱ™›ŽœŽ—ȱ˜—ȱ‘’œȱ
page, doing so could result in the feature not working properly.
88
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Birthday
Setup Tab ĺ Software Settings ĺ0DUNHWLQJĺ%LUWKGD\
’ž›ŽȱŜŚȱȬȱ’›‘Š¢ȱ˜ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œ
Enable Today's Birthday Pop-Up
If enabled, a customer's birthday notice will appear with the selected Alert Note entered below.
Show During Appointment Booking
If enabled, the birthday pop-up alert note will appear during Appointment Booking.
Show in Servicing From Appointment
If enabled, the birthday pop-up alert note will appear when servicing an appointment.
Show During New Ticket Creation
If enabled, the birthday pop-up alert note will appear when creating a New Ticket.
89
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Show in Servicing From Waiting Tickets
If enabled, the birthday pop-up alert note will appear when a ticket is moved to waiting.
Show in Service Ticket Receipt
If enabled, the birthday pop-up alert note will appear on the servicing receipt when the ticket is
moved from Waiting to Servicing.
90
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
School Settings
Setup Tab ĺ School Settings
If you have School functions enabled (Setup Tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱĺ System ĺȱŒ‘˜˜•ȱŽĴ’—œǼ a
—Ž ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱŒŠ••ŽȱŒ‘˜˜•ȱŽĴ’—œȱ’œȱŠŽȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱŽž™ȱŠ‹ǯ
ŽĴ’—œ
SuperSalon allows you to prompt for credits and grades at ringout. This is usually used if an
instructor is present.
’ž›ŽȱŜśȱȬȱ›˜–™ȱ˜›ȱ›Ž’œȱǭȱ›ŠŽœȱŠȱ’—˜žȱŽĴ’—
Prompt for Credits at Ringout
When "Yes" is selected on this screen, a popup appears at ringout allowing an instructor to enter
credits for services performed. If this setting is set to "No," students automatically receive full credit
for the services they perform which can be edited by navigating to the Reports Tab ĺ School ĺ
Student Credits.
Tip: Credits must be set to
̎¡’‹•Žȱ˜›ȱ‘Žȱ™˜™ž™ȱ˜ȱŠ™™ŽŠ›ȱ
at ringout. If credits are non̎¡’‹•Žǰȱ‘Žȱ™˜™ž™ȱ ’••ȱ—˜ȱ
appear and students will be
Šœœ’—Žȱ‘ŽȱŽę—ŽȱŒ›Ž’œȱ
Šž˜–Š’ŒŠ••¢ǯȱȱ̎¡’‹•Žǰȱ‘Žȱ
popup will appear allowing
‘ŽȱžœŽ›ȱ˜ȱŽę—Žȱ™Š›’Š•ȱŒ›Ž’ȱ
or split the credits between
multiple students.
’ž›ŽȱŜŜȱȬȱœœ’—ȱ›Ž’œȱ˜™ž™ȱŠȱ’—˜ž
91
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Prompt for Grades at Ringout
When "Yes" is selected on this screen, a popup appears at ringout allowing an instructor to enter
grades for services performed as well as a space for customers to grade the service as well.
’ž›ŽȱŜŝȱȬȱœœ’—ȱ›ŠŽœȱ˜™ž™ȱŠȱ’—˜ž
Grades can be edited and unassigned grades can be entered at Reports ĺ School ĺ Student Grades
(Grades are unassigned if the Skip button is used at ringout). The grade field supports up to two
decimal places of precision, for example 98.75.
Grades and credits can also be assigned for services performed on mannequins. This allows students
to receive adequate grades and credits to graduate in a reasonable amount of time in the event there
are not enough customers.
92
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Import File Type
SuperSalon allows schools to directly import/export Fame Freedom/Premiere, as well as time
clock systems such as Accuengine. This allows schools using SuperSalon for their clinic work to
automatically push student data to these systems.
’ž›ŽȱŜŞȱȬȱ›ŽŽ˜–ȱ–™˜›
Fame Freedom Integration
Select the Freedom Import File Type
Enter fame.ini path
1. Click and browse for the FAME.ini file from the Freedom installation path and select.
Enter the Credit export path
1. Browse to the StudList.txt file and select.
a) •’Œ”ȱŠ—ȱ‹›˜ œŽȱ˜›ȱ‘Žȱǯ’—’ȱꕎȱ›˜–ȱ‘Žȱ›ŽŽ˜–ȱ’—œŠ••Š’˜—ȱ™Š‘ȱŠ—ȱœŽ•ŽŒǯ
93
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Enter the Timeclock export path
1. Browse to the import directory and select.
a) ¡™˜›ȱŽ¡Š–™•ŽDZȱDZȧŠ›Žȧȧ–™˜›ȧ˜›Š–ŽȘǯȘ
Tip: The user can make a choice to export only the students in
ŒŠœŽȱŠ••ȱ˜‘Ž›ȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽœȱŠ›Žȱ˜ȱ’쎛Ž—ȱŽ™Š›–Ž—œǯȱ¢ȱŽŠž•ȱ’ȱ
is set to export only student data.
Exporting service tickets info of FAME students from POS
1. Select Export button to export clinic work done by students.
SuperSalon retrieves the path from the FAME.ini settings. During each export it saves the time
when the export was completed last and the next data export starts from the previous time saved. It
considers only completed tickets of SuperSalon for export.
Accuengine Clock Import
1. First import the student list from Freedom
2.
Select Non-Biometric or Biometric
a) Biometric is selected by default
3.
Browse for file
4.
Select Import Clock In button
’ž›ŽȱŜşȱȬȱ›Ž–’Ž›ȱ–™˜›
Premiere Integration
1. Select a date range
2.
Select the Export TimeClock button
94
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Tuition Settings
Select the New Tuition Type button to create
new types. Enter the name of your new
Tuition Type and select the Save Type button.
Your new tuition type will be added to the
list. To edit a tuition type, select the note pad.
To delete tuition types, select the red circle.
These Tuition Types are used when students
pay their tuition
(Manager Tab ĺ School ĺ Make Payment).
’ž›ŽȱŝŖȱȬȱŽ ȱž’’˜—ȱ¢™Žȱ˜™ž™
Service Setting Categories/Service Credits
All credits are categorized into categories.
First create a category by selecting the New
Category button, enter a name for category
and select the Save Category button.
Next, select the New Credit button, then
on the New Service Credit screen choose a
service a category by selecting the Service
Category button.
The new Service Credit screen pops up. Select
the Service Select button, select a service
category, a service you wish to create credits
for and you are returned to the new Service
Credit screen.
’ž›ŽȱŝŗȱȬȱŽ ȱŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱ›Ž’ȱ˜™ž™
On the New Service Credit screen enter a set amount of credits and check the Flexible Credit box
if desired. The credit field supports up to two decimal places of precision, for example 98.75. Select
your state from the drop down list and select the Save Credit button. The state you choose here
must match the state chosen under Store Setup section on the Company Info screen. If you have
multiple schools in different states only credits that are applied to each state are shown (Setup tab ĺ
Company info ĺ Store Setup). Click Ok to save.
Credit categories and service credits can be edited by selecting the Notepad associated with the credit
category or service credit. They can be deleted by selecting the red circle.
Credits can be assigned for services in multiple categories. For example, a perm service could provide
credits for Hair, Color, and Style categories.
95
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Local Settings
Setup Tab ĺ Local Settings
’ž›ŽȱŝŘȱȬȱ˜ŒŠ•ȱŽĴ’—œȱŒ›ŽŽ—
To identify your computer, enter a user friendly name in the System Name field. The name is used to
identify computers using a multi-system setup.
Throughout SuperSalon you will see a "lock" icon in the upper right hand corner. By entering a
time in the Authentication Timeout field, users will be required to log back in to the system if they
are inactive for the interval of time entered. The user may select the icon to show who is currently
authenticated in the system, and to log out the current user. By using this feature, the employee
will be associated with various functions they perform. For example, when you select an existing
appointment, a screen comes up showing who booked the appointment in addition to what
technician performed the service.
96
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Internet Setup
Setup Tab ĺ Internet Setup ĺTech Support
’ž›ŽȱŝřȱȬȱ—Ž›—ŽȱŽž™ȱ‹žĴ˜—œȱŠ—ȱŽŒ‘ȱž™™˜›ȱŒ›ŽŽ—
The Internet Setup screen is used to enter your dial-up networking information and other
information required to enable your system to upload data to the I-Office.
The Tech Support Dialup is a special tool that allows Tech Support or the salon owner to work on
the computer from a remote location via the Internet. While the computer is being accessed, it will
not interfere with the salon staff’s use of the computer. Press Connect only when advised to do so by
technical support.
97
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Dialup Account
Setup Tab ĺ Internet Setup ĺDialup Account
’ž›ŽȱŝŚȱȬȱ—Ž›—ŽȱŽž™ȱ’Š•ž™ȱŒŒ˜ž—ȱŽĴ’—œ
Dial Account information is provided by your local Internet service provider or the SuperSalon
technical support staff (we can provide a local Internet access phone number). Once set up, your
computer will automatically upload and backup your data to the iOffice and download updates if
available.
If your computer is connected to a constant Internet connection (cable modem, DSL), leave the Dialup
Account fields blank and the Enable Dialup check box unchecked.
98
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Office Upload
Setup Tab ĺ Internet Setup ĺDialup Account
’ž›ŽȱŝśȱȬȱĜŒŽȱ™•˜ŠȱŽž™ȱŒ›ŽŽ—
The Office Upload information is provided by the SuperSalon technical support staff.
Do not enter more than one upload time unless specifically directed to do so by our support staff.
The SuperSalon upload system features a highly reliable system that includes error detection and a
persistent data push.
99
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Upload Estimate
Setup Tab ĺ Internet Setup ĺUpload Estimate
’ž›ŽȱŝŜȱȬȱ™•˜Šȱœ’–ŠŽȱ¢œŽ–
The upload estimate provides a list of tables and rows that will be part of the next standard upload.
This particular screen is for diagnostic purposes only.
100
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Upload Settings (UpSys)
Setup Tab ĺ Internet Setup ĺUpload Settings
’ž›ŽȱŝŝȱȬȱĜŒŽȱ™•˜Šȱǻ™¢œǼ
UpSys runs in the background and does not utilize a popup window to notify you of uploads. Miniuploads can occur as frequently as every five minutes. UpSys uses the latest encryption for all data
being transmitted.
UpSys Status
The status section provides technical support with network connection information and your
connection status.
Upload Overview
The Upload Overview provides an UpSys Overview Report & Upload Detail Report.
Settings
The settings (Upload Host, Username, Password) should only be set by the Rogers technical support
staff.
101
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Schedule
The new system has two modes, Interval and List.
Interval allows you to set when uploads start occurring and how often they will occur throughout
the day, and at what time they will stop. This is only designed for stores who require frequent intraday uploads. We suggest that users stagger stores.
List uploads occur only at the designated times. This system should be adequate for most users. One
nightly time can be set, and a few intra-day times can be set.
Tip: For locations using dial-up, we highly recommend that customers
do not use the Interval Mode. It will disrupt calls and disrupt credit
card transactions. For locations with shared dial-up lines, we strongly
›ŽŒ˜––Ž—ȱžœ’—ȱ‘Žȱ’œȱ˜ŽȱŠ—ȱŽ—Ž›’—ȱŠĞŽ›Ȭ‘˜ž›œȱž™•˜Šȱ’–Žœǯ
UpSys Password Management
’ž›ŽȱŝŞȱȬȱ™¢œȱŠœœ ˜›ȱŠ—ŠŽ–Ž—
In the rare case that the password for UpSys needs to be changed, the new system will prompt you
for a key. This screen is for diagnostic purposes and could potentially cause problems with uploads if
it is not used under the direction of Rogers technical support.
102
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Utilities
Setup Tab ĺ Utilities
’ž›ŽȱŝşȱȬȱ’•’’Žœ
The options on the Utilities screen should only be used under expressed direction from Rogers
Software Technical Support. Improper use of the Utilities could potentially harm the system
database.
103
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Permissions
Setup Tab ĺ Permissions
’ž›ŽȱŞŖȱȬȱŽ›–’œœ’˜—œȱŽž™ȱŒ›ŽŽ—
The Permissions screen allows you to choose almost any setup function, management function, or
report in SuperSalon and enable or disable an employee's access to them based on the permissions
group to which they are assigned.
Highlight a permissions group name by selecting the name, and then highlight an area of the
œ˜Ğ Š›Žǯȱȱ˜›ȱ›Ž–˜ŸŽȱ™Ž›–’œœ’˜—œȱ‹¢ȱ‘’‘•’‘’—ȱ‘ŽȱœŽŒ’˜—ȱ—Š–Žȱ ’‘ȱ‘ŽȱŠ™™›˜™›’ŠŽȱŒ˜•˜›ǯ
Create Employee Permission Groups
‘ŽȱꛜȱœŽ™ȱ’œȱ˜ȱŽę—Žȱ‘ŽȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ™Ž›–’œœ’˜—œȱ›˜ž™œǯȱ¢ȱŽŠž•ǰȱSuperSalon has three
›˜ž™œDZȱŠ—ŠŽ›ǰȱŽŒŽ™’˜—’œǰȱŠ—ȱ¢•’œǯȱŠ•˜—ȱ˜ —Ž›œȱ‘ŠŸŽȱŠŒŒŽœœȱ˜ȱŠ••ȱŠ›ŽŠœȱžœ’—ȱthe Owner
password, a special user, which is always available and does not require a permission group (See
Owner Password page 118). Additional permissions groups are easily created using the Create
Ž›–’œœ’˜—ȱ›˜ž™ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱŠȱ‘Žȱ˜™ȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱŽ›–’œœ’˜—œȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯȱ’–’•Š›•¢ǰȱžœŽȱ‘ŽȱŽ•ŽŽȱŽ›–’œœ’˜—ȱ
›˜ž™ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱ›Ž–˜ŸŽȱŠȱ™Ž›–’œœ’˜—ȱ›˜ž™ǯ
104
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Enabling and Disabling Access
For each screen or report in SuperSalon, you can select who is allowed access by setting the
permission to green. You can disable access by setting the permission to red. Setting the permission
to gray allows anyone access. After making all necessary changes on the Permissions screen, you will
need to select the Save Permissions button for the changes to take place.
Assigning Employees to a Group
Each employee that will be granted some level of access must be assigned to a Permission Group.
This is done on the Employee information screen (Manager Tab ĺ Employees ĺ Select Employee ĺ
General Information).
’ž›ŽȱŞŗȱȬȱŽ›–’œœ’˜—ȱ›˜ž™ȱœŽž™ȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ—˜›–Š’˜—ȱŒ›ŽŽ—
105
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Cash Drawer
Setup Tab ĺ Cash Drawer
’ž›ŽȱŞŘȱȬȱŠœ‘ȱ›Š Ž›ȱŽž™ȱŒ›ŽŽ—
The Cash Drawer Setup screen must be set correctly for your cash drawer to open properly. First
you need to determine what type of connector your cash drawer has. Some have a DB-9 connector
that plugs into a COM port located on the back of some computers. Some are designed to plug into
Tip: Some DB-9 cash drawers must be plugged in to an external
power source to work properly while others do not.
specific receipt printers. SuperSalon recommends connecting the cash drawer through the receipt
printer using an Epson TM T-88III compatible receipt printer and a MCD 240 or equivalent cash
drawer with an Epson Interface.
If your cash drawer plugs into a receipt printer, then select the Connected through printer option.
If not, select the COM Port the cash drawer will connect to. Our systems typically have the receipt
printer on COM1, the touch screen on COM2 or USB and the Modem on COM4. If the receipt printer
instructions call for a special code to open the cash drawer, enter it in the Open String field. If you
are using one of our recommended configurations, leave this field blank.
106
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Receipt Printer
Setup Tab ĺ Receipt Printer ĺHardware
’ž›ŽȱŞřȱȬȱŽŒŽ’™ȱ›’—Ž›ȱ
Š› Š›ŽȱŽž™ȱŒ›ŽŽ—
To set up a receipt printer, you first select the port you are connecting the receipt printer to. You can
select COM1 through COM4 or LPT1 (COM1 is most common). If your receipt printer connects to
the parallel port (standard printer port) select LPT1. Typically a null modem serial cable is connected
to the COM1 port; make sure your computer is turned off before connecting and disconnecting
peripherals.
Next select the receipt printer. If yours is not listed, contact SuperSalon technical support. Next,
add any text that you wish to print on your receipts. When you boot up your computer you can
come back to this screen and select the test button. If it is connected properly, it will print out a
confirmation receipt. The Receipt Printer Reports dynamically change depending on the width of the
receipt printer.
Tip: To ensure compatibility, do not purchase peripherals like receipt
™›’—Ž›œǰȱ ’‘˜žȱŒ˜—ŠŒ’—ȱ˜Ž›œȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽŸŽ•˜™–Ž—ǯ
107
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Options
Setup Tab ĺ Receipt Printer ĺOptions
’ž›ŽȱŞŚȱȬȱŽŒŽ’™ȱ›’—Ž›ȱ™’˜—œȱŽž™ȱŒ›ŽŽ—
Print Receipt When Clock In/Out
When enabled, a receipt will be printed for employees when they clock in and out.
Print Appointments When Clocking In
If the line above is set to “Yes”, you can choose here whether you would like an appointment list to be
printed when the stylist clocks in.
Print Receipt When Servicing Customer
This option, when selected to “Yes” prints a service receipt when the customer is placed from waiting
108
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
to servicing. The service receipt is useful to the employee performing the service by providing
information about the client, the client’s history, and the services desired on this visit.
Show Customer Color Card
If you do color services, this will show you the color information from their last visit before you
service them. When set to “Yes” the color information is printed on the service receipt.
Show Customer Perm Card
If you do perm services, this will show you the perm notes from their last visit before you service
them. When set to “Yes” the perm and chemical notes are printed on the service receipt.
Show Customer Hair Card
When set to “Yes” the hair notes from their last visit will print on the service receipt before you
service them.
Print Default Service Price
If you select “Yes” on the line “Print receipt when servicing customer” you have the option on this
line to print the default price of the service performed or the actual price (services can be set up to
‘ŠŸŽȱŠȱŽŠž•ȱ™›’ŒŽȱ‹žȱŠ•œ˜ȱŠ••˜ ȱŠȱœ¢•’œȱ˜ȱŠ“žœȱ‘Žȱ™›’ŒŽȱŠœȱ—ŽŽŽǼǯȱȱ¢˜žȱœŽ•ŽŒȱȃŽœȄȱ‘Ž›Žǰȱ‘Žȱ
default price will print on the receipt.
Print Receipt for Quick Sales
Set to “Yes” to enable receipts for quick sales.
Print Receipt Automatically
This option allows you to choose if you want receipts to automatically print after each sale, or if you
manually print them by pressing the Print Receipt button on the bottom of the sales screen. Some
salons will want to enable this option so that all customers are offered a receipt. This option can be
useful in deterring internal theft.
Tip: If your salon is using integrated credit card processing, this
must be set to "Yes" so the merchant copy of the credit card receipt
’‘ȱ‘Žȱ’™ȱꎕȱŠ—ȱœ’—Šž›Žȱ•’—Žȱ™›’—œǯ
Print Duplicate Receipt
Set to “Yes” if two receipts are desired for each transaction. If you will occasionally need duplicates,
set this to “No”. There is an option to print duplicate receipts on the payment screen.
Print Quick Lookup Barcode
If you select “Yes” the system will print a barcode on the receipt for quick reference at a later time.
Show Stylist Name on Receipt
Set to “Yes” to have the employee’s name printed on the receipt.
Show Service Codes on Receipt
Set to “Yes” if you would like service codes printed on receipts.
Skip Customer Name on Receipt
If set to “Yes” the customer name will not be printed on receipts.
109
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Show Ticket Status on Receipt
If set to “Yes” the ticket status will be printed on receipts.
Display Sale ID in Receipt
If set to "Yes" the receipt will include the internal ID SuperSalon uses to track the sale.
Show Stats on Receipt
Enabling this setting will cause “new or recurring”, “child, adult or senior”, and “male or female” to
be printed on the sales receipt.
Print Package Services on Receipt
Set to “Yes” to have package contents printed on receipts.
Combine Taxes on Receipt
If you are required to charge multiple taxes, i.e. product and service, state and local, etc., you may
wish to combine all taxes into one line item. If you would like to combine taxes into one line, select
“Yes”.
If this setting is set to “No”, the fields for the Label for Tax Rate #1 and #2 will become editable. Enter
the tax type in the fields for display on the receipt.
Auto Print VOIDED Receipt
Set to “Yes” to automatically print a receipt when voiding a transaction.
Print Signature Lines on VOIDED Receipt
Set to “Yes” to add signature lines on voided receipts.
Default Footer
Setup Tab ĺ Receipt Printer ĺDefault Footer
The Default Footer is the message at the “foot” of each receipt. It can have any kind of message you
wish to send your customers, for example, “Thank you for visiting”.
New Customer Footer
Setup Tab ĺ Receipt Printer ĺNew Cust Footer
In addition to the default footer, SuperSalon also has a special New Customer Footer that will print
a special message for new customers. This may include a discount offer to induce them to return. In
order to enable the footer, check the box at the bottom labeled "Use New Customer Footer." This can
help with customer retention.
110
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Additional Footer
Setup Tab ĺ Receipt Printer ĺAdditional Footer
The Additional Footer can be programmed to print out at desired increments, perhaps every 100th
customer. This might be a message that says “You win a free haircut on your next visit”. This is an
inexpensive way to influence customers to take receipts. Select Additional Footer to add text and set
how often you would like it to print. We recommend a sign that says, “Check your receipt to see if
you have won!” To disable this option, set it to “0”.
Custom Header
Setup Tab ĺ Receipt Printer ĺCustom Header
Any text added to the Custom header field will be added to all receipts.
Membership
Setup Tab ĺ Receipt Printer ĺMembership
This text will contain membership contract information and a signature line. The receipt will print
when a membership is approved.
Chemical Release Options
Setup Tab ĺ Receipt Printer ĺChemical Release Options
The Release Text setup screen allows you to enter text that you would like to be printed on your
Liability release form. This is a form that is printed by the receipt printer when you select the
Chemical Release button on the New Ticket screen. This is usually signed by the customer and
retained by the salon. An option to automatically print the release is available at the bottom of the
screen. Please consult your franchisor or attorney before using this function.
111
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Chemical Release Questions
Setup Tab ĺ Receipt Printer ĺChemical Release Questions
’ž›ŽȱŞśȱȬȱ‘Ž–’ŒŠ•ȱŽ•ŽŠœŽȱžŽœ’˜—œ
There are five chemical release questions available. It is up to the discretion of the salon as to which
questions to ask, though it is advised that questions involving the use of chemicals be asked. The
available answer types for the questions are either "Yes/No" or "Numerical."
112
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Rate My Visit Footer
Setup Tab ĺ Receipt Printer ĺRate My Visit Footer
This is an optional footer which is visible once you have subscribed to the RateMyVisit.com service.
This service gives your customers the opportunity to go online to www.RateMyVisit.com and rate
their visit to your salon using a unique visit number printed on their receipt.
Customers do not need to remember their stylist name, wait time, when they received their service or
what they purchased, etc. The unique number printed on the receipt matches the transaction.
This footer should be used to advertise incentives or discounts to use RateMyVisit.com
The system can generate a discount code that customers can use on subsequent visits. This will
encourage customers to use the Rate My Visit system.
The results of their survey are viewable from the SuperSalon I-Office.
’ž›ŽȱŞŜȱȬȱ‘ŽȱŠŽȱ¢ȱ’œ’ȱȬĜŒŽȱŽ™˜›
If you do not have the SuperSalon Rate My Visit service and would like to learn more, please
contact our sales department at 888-458-1001 then press 3 or e-mail [email protected]
113
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Label Printer
Setup Tab ĺ Label Printer
’ž›ŽȱŞŝȱȬȱLabel Printer Setup
SuperSalon can utilize a label printer to print labels for your products. Printing labels requires a
Zebra model 2824 label printer.
Zebra Printer Windows Installation
First install the drivers from the disk that came with your printer. The printer is the ZebraEPL
LP2824. Make sure you select USB as the port during installation. Leave everything else as default.
Sharing the Zebra Printer
To use the Zebra you must share the printer. In Windows, go to Start>Settings>Printers and Faxes.
Right click on the Zebra printer icon and select “sharing…”from the context menu. This will take you
to the Share tab of the Zebra Properties window. Once there select “Share this Printer”. Set the printer
share name to “ZebraLP2”.
Setting the Zebra Printer Port
In the Zebra printer’s properties window, click on the Port tab. Select USB Port as your option.
Make sure the Zebra printer name is listed. If no name is listed, reinstall. To send communication to
the Zebra printer, click on the printer tab. Click Advanced. Click Tools. In the field named “Direct
Command for Printer” type “default command”, then click send.
Aligning the Labels and Printing a Test Page
Load the labels according to the manual or Quick Reference Guide. Turn the printer off. Hold down
the feed button. Turn the printer back on while holding the feed button. When the light blinks let go
of the feed button. This will print off some words onto the labels. Press the feed button once more.
This should print one more word and center the label. In Windows, go to Start>Settings>Printers and
114
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Faxes. Right click on the Zebra icon and go to Properties. Click on the General tab. Click “Print Test
Page” to send the test page to the printer and to make sure the printer is ready to print.
SuperSalon Configuration
Go to Setup ĺ Label Printer. On the Label Printer Options page, put a check mark next to Enable
Label Printer, then type “ZebraLP2” in the Share Name field. Change the Device drop down to
“Zebra LP2824 CPCL”. Change Font Size to “2 – (7pts/6pts)”. Print Group Separator can be “Yes” or
“No” depending on if you would like an extra label to print between each item on an order. In the
Command field enter “@”.
Your Label printer should now be set up. Please contact SuperSalon technical support if you need
help.
115
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Pole Display
Setup Tab ĺ Pole Display
’ž›ŽȱŞŞȱȬȱ˜•Žȱ’œ™•Š¢ȱ™’˜—œȱŒ›ŽŽ—
To set up a pole display, you first select the port you are connecting the pole display to. You can select
COM1 through COM4 or LPT1. If your pole display connects to the parallel port (standard printer
port) select LPT1. Make sure your computer is turned off before connecting and disconnecting
peripherals.
Be sure to select the “Enable Pole Display” box. Next select the brand of pole display you have from
the drop down menu next to “Device”. If you do not have one of the brands listed, the pole display
may not work and may not be a supported display device. It is always a good idea to check with
Rogers Software Development before purchasing peripherals to make sure of compatibility. In
the “Idle Text” fields enter the text you wish to display when the pole display is not in use such as
“Welcome to your salon name”. Next set up the text you would like your pole display to list during a
transaction. This text displays in addition to the product or service you are ringing up. An example
might be “Thank you for visiting us today, please come again”. When you are ready select the Test
button. The system will test your configuration of the pole display and will attempt to display the
idle text you entered.
116
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Connecting Peripherals
Below is a diagram of a typical computer setup with one serial port. Shown is a Dell Optiplex
Computer, an ELO Touch Screen Monitor with a USB interface, Epson TM T88III Receipt Printer
with a serial interface, a MMF 240 Cash Drawer with an Epson interface. Also shown are a standard
keyboard and a USB optical mouse. In the example we also added a USB barcode scanner.
’ž›ŽȱŞşȱȬȱ¢™’ŒŠ•ȱŽŒ˜––Ž—Žȱ
Š› Š›ŽȱŽž™ȱ’Š›Š–
117
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Owner Password
Setup Tab ĺ Owner Password
’ž›ŽȱşŖȱȬȱ —Ž›ȱŠœœ ˜›ȱŽž™ȱŒ›ŽŽ—
The owner Password screen allows owners to set or reset their password. Follow the instructions in
the setup wizard to complete the process properly. This is also where the registration key is entered
when registering your software for the first time. After registering the software for the first time, the
system prompts for the creation of an “Owner Password.” This password is case sensitive.
SuperSalon will need to be registered before it can be used, however, you can register it as a demo
for 30 days by typing “demo” in the registration field.
To register, call 888-458-1001 then press 1 for tech support.
118
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
The Manager Tab
Adding Employees, Services, Product, and Discounts
The Manager Tab contains all of the management tools for operating SuperSalon. From here, users
can add employees, services, products, discounts, view ticket information, and perform closeout
operations.
Departments
Manager Tab ĺ Departments
’ž›ŽȱşŗȱȬȱDepartment Setup Screen
On this screen, departments can be set up which add a layer above employees. Examples of
departments might be hair, skin, nails, and administrative. Unlike employee groups, an employee
may only belong to a single department. Employees are added to a department on the employee
General Information screen. Simply select the department from the drop down menu under
“Department”.
˜ȱŒ›ŽŠŽȱŠȱŽ™Š›–Ž—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱȈȱŽ ȱŽ™Š›–Ž—Ȉȱ‹žĴ˜—ǰȱŽ—Ž›ȱŠȱŽ™Š›–Ž—ȱŠ–ŽǰȱŒ‘˜˜œŽȱ
“Yes” or “No” for Production, whether the department is Active or Not, and then whether to
Breakout Positions or not. If you select “Yes” for Breakout Positions, reporting on departments will be
broken down into smaller sections based on positions.
119
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Employees
Manager Tab ĺ Employees
’ž›ŽȱşŘȱȬȱEmployee Setup Screen
The employee setup screen is used to add employees, update existing employee information, as well
Šœȱ›Ž–˜ŸŽȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽœȱ—˜ȱ•˜—Ž›ȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽȱŠȱ‘Žȱ•˜ŒŠ’˜—ǯȱ˜ȱŒ‘Š—ŽȱœŽĴ’—œȱ˜›ȱŠ—ȱŽ¡’œ’—ȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽǰȱ
select their name to get to the employee data.
120
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Add New Employee
Manager Tab ĺ Employee ĺAdd New Employee
’ž›ŽȱşřȱȬȱAdd New Employee Setup Screen
˜ȱŠȱŠ—ȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱȱŽ ȱ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ•‘˜ž‘ȱ–˜œȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱꎕœȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ
Employee Information screen are for reference purposes, some are required for SuperSalon to
operate properly.
Enter the employee's name and employee number. SuperSalonȱ›Žšž’›ŽœȱŠȱꛜȱŠ—ȱ•Šœȱ—Š–Žǯȱ
˜ ŽŸŽ›ǰȱ¢˜žȱ–Š¢ȱ ’œ‘ȱ˜ȱŽ—Ž›ȱŠȱꛜȱ—Š–ŽȱŠ—ȱŠȱ•Šœȱ’—’’Š•ȱ’ȱ¢˜žȱŠ›ŽȱŒ˜—ŒŽ›—Žȱ˜›ȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ
privacy or security.
Tip: Only employees that have the "Performs Services"
box checked will show up in the stylist selection box when
servicing customers.
121
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
General
The General section contains basic employee setup information such as name, date hired, etc. This
’œȱŠ•œ˜ȱ ‘Ž›Žȱ¢˜žȱ ’••ȱŽ—Ž›ȱ‘Ž’›ȱ™Šœœ ˜›ȱ ‘’Œ‘ȱ ’••ȱ ˜›”ȱ’—ȱŒ˜—“ž—Œ’˜—ȱ ’‘ȱŸŠ›’˜žœȱž—Œ’˜—œȱ
within SuperSalon such as the Permissions system.
Nick Name
If desired, an employee nick name can be entered. When entered, this is the name which will appear
throughout SuperSalon when selecting employees, accessing password protected areas of the
software, etc. It may be left blank and the name will be displayed in the traditional "Last Name, First
name" format. This can protect employee's privacy or can help if multiple employees have the same
name.
Password
It is important for employees to select a password if you will be restricting access to some areas of
the program. If the password field is left blank, then that employee’s password will also be blank. In
other words, if they have permissions for a specific area, it will be accessible by selecting their name
and leaving the password field blank.
Position
Select this button to assign a position to the employee.
Status
Active/Inactive – Employees set to inactive will no longer be available throughout the program. To reactivate an inactive employee, select the Inactive Employees button, then select an employee from the
inactive list and set them to Active.
Tip: Once an employee is entered, they cannot be deleted.
They can only be set to inactive. To view the Inactive
–™•˜¢ŽŽœȱ•’œǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ—ŠŒ’ŸŽȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯ
Marital Status
Select this button to record the employee's marital status.
Department
Select which department the employee belongs to from the drop down menu.
Permission Group
SuperSalon allows you to create different employee groups. Each group can be set to have
permission to access specific screens or reports (or denied access to specific screens or reports). Select
Manager, Shift manager, Stylist, Receptionist or any other permission group you have created, this
tells SuperSalon what access level this employee has. For instance, you might setup managers only to
have access to edit time cards, but shift managers and managers may have access to the discount setup
screens. Receptionists may be denied access to both of these.
122
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Scheduling Group
If you have set up scheduling groups, use this button to assign the employee to a group.
Price Group
If you have set up price groups, use this button to assign the employee to a group.
Optimum Book Interval
If this feature is enabled, you can select an Optimum Book Interval for each employee. A visual
indicator will be added on the appointment book.
Personal Information/Emergency Contact
The information in this area is of a sensitive, personal nature. Permissions for this area should
be restricted to only those who need access, such as owners and some managers. Users without
permission will not even see this tab.
Payroll
The Payroll section is where the employee payroll information is setup. You can also select any
days they may receive an hourly bonus time. This is commonly used when owners wish to pay a
premium for Sundays, etc.
Pay Period
Select the pay period that applies for each employee. Pay periods are defined by going to the Setup
Tab ĺ Payroll/Bonuses ĺ Pay-periods.
’ž›ŽȱşŚȱȬȱEmployee Payroll Setup Screen
123
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Commission Plan
—ŒŽȱŠȱŒ˜––’œœ’˜—ȱ™•Š—ȱ’œȱŒ˜—ꐞ›Žǰȱ’ȱ ’••ȱ—ŽŽȱ˜ȱ‹ŽȱŠœœ’—Žȱ˜ȱŽŠŒ‘ȱŒ˜––’œœ’˜—ŽȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽǯȱ
Whether you have one plan for everyone or a different plan for managers, stylists, product managers,
and receptionists you will need to assign each employee the appropriate plan to enable SuperSalon
to calculate the proper commissions and bonuses for each employee. Each employee can be set to
none, one, or multiple plans. See Figure 37 for a view of the employee commission setup screen.
Notes
Use the notes section to enter any information relevant to the employee that is not entered in other
sections.
Allowed Service Categories & Allowed Services
No services will be listed in the appointment screen for your employee if you do not set up the
Allowed Service Categories and Allowed Services.
’ž›ŽȱşśȱȬȱAllowed Service Categories Setup Screen
124
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Ž•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ••˜ ŽȱŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱŠŽ˜›¢ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱ ’••ȱ‹Žȱ’œ™•Š¢Žȱ ’‘ȱŠ••ȱ‘ŽȱŸŠ’•Š‹•ŽȱŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱ
ŠŽ˜›’Žœȱ•’œŽȱ’—ȱ‘Žȱ•ŽĞȱŒ˜•ž–—ǯȱŽ•ŽŒ’—ȱ‘ŽȱŒŠŽ˜›’Žœȱ¢˜žȱ ’œ‘ȱ˜ȱŠ••˜ ȱ˜›ȱ‘ŽȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ ’••ȱ
move them to the Applied Categories column. When complete, save your entries.
ŠŽ˜›’Žœȱ–Š¢ȱ‘ŠŸŽȱœŽŸŽ›Š•ȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽœȱ ’‘’—ȱ‘Ž–ǯȱ¢ȱŽŠž•ǰȱŠ••ȱŠ›ŽȱœŽ•ŽŒŽǯȱ˜ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱœ™ŽŒ’ęŒȱ
œŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽœȱ ’‘’—ȱŠȱŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱŠŽ˜›¢ȱ‘ŽȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱŒŠ—ȱ™Ž›˜›–ǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ••˜ ŽȱŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽœȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯ
’ž›ŽȱşŜȱȬȱApplied Categories Screen
The Applied Services Categories you chose are selected. Select the category you wish to choose
œŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽœȱ›˜–ǯȱ—ȱ‘Žȱꐞ›Žȱ‹Ž•˜ ȱ Žȱ‘ŠŸŽȱŒ‘˜œŽ—ȱ‘Žȱ
Š’›ŒžȱŒŠŽ˜›¢ǯ
’ž›ŽȱşŝȱȬȱApplied Services Screen
All available services within the category are applied by default. Choose the services the employee
’••ȱ—˜ȱ‹Žȱ™Ž›˜›–’—ȱ‹¢ȱœŽ•ŽŒ’—ȱŠȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱ›˜–ȱ‘Žȱ›’‘ȱŒ˜•ž–—ǯȱ‘ŽȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱ ’••ȱ–˜ŸŽȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ•ŽĞȱ
column. The services in the right column will now be listed for this employee on the appointment
screen. Make sure you save your entries.
125
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Service Times
All services the employee is allowed to perform are listed. If you wish to enter a time specific to the
employee for a particular service enter it in the field next to the service. SuperSalon will use the
time entered instead of the default time entered on the service setup screen.
Employee Scheduler
Manager Tab ĺ Employee ĺEmployee Scheduler
This button sends you the employee scheduler. Instructions for adding employee schedules are
included on page 225.
The employee schedule is very important if the Appointment system is enabled. If there is no
schedule, no employees will appear for scheduling appointments.
Appointment Groups
Manager Tab ĺ Employee ĺGroups ĺ Appointment Groups
’ž›ŽȱşŞȱȬȱEmployee Groups Setup Screen
126
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
SuperSalon allows you to create employee groups for different services that are performed.
For instance, some employees perform nail services. You would create a Nail Services group by
entering “Nail Services” in the Add Group field then selecting Save. The group is added to the
Groups list. Once the Group is set up it allows you to view only the relevant staff when making
appointments, and ensures that appointments are only made with staff that can perform the service.
To add an employee to a group select their name from the left. To remove an employee from the
group select the red circle on the right. The order of the employees in the list can also be modified by
selecting the up or down arrows by their name.
’ž›ŽȱşşȱȬȱEmployee Group View on Appointment Screen
127
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Scheduling Groups
Manager Tab ĺ Employee ĺGroups ĺ Scheduling Groups
’ž›ŽȱŗŖŖȱȬȱScheduling Groups Screen
SuperSalon allows you to create scheduling groups and assign employees to those groups. This
allows you to edit whole groups of employees at one time simply by editing the schedule group times
and dates.
˜ȱŒ›ŽŠŽȱŠȱœŒ‘Žž•’—ȱ›˜ž™ǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŒ‘Žž•’—ȱ›˜ž™œȱ‹žĴ˜—ǰȱŠ—ȱ‘Ž—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŒ‘Žž•’—ȱ
›˜ž™ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ‘ŽȱŒ‘Žž•’—ȱ›˜ž™ȱœŽž™ȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱ™˜™œȱž™ǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŽ ȱ›˜ž™ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǰȱŽ—Ž›ȱŠȱ
name for your group, and save.
128
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
The Scheduling Group editing screen will then appear. Enter the times and dates for the schedule
and save.
’ž›ŽȱŗŖŗȱȬȱScheduling Groups Edit Screen
˜ȱŒ›ŽŠŽȱ˜›ȱŽ’ȱŠ—˜‘Ž›ȱŒ‘Žž•’—ȱ›˜ž™ǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŒ‘Žž•’—ȱ›˜ž™ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱŠŠ’—ǯȱ‘’œȱ ’••ȱŠ”Žȱ
you back to the Scheduling Group set up screen. To edit a group select the group and edit.
Individual members of this group can still have exceptions to the schedule by modifying their
schedule using the Employee Scheduler (Manager Tab ĺ Employees ĺ Employee Scheduler or select
the Scheduler Tab if enabled).
¡ŒŽ™’˜—œȱ ’••ȱ›Ž–Š’—ȱ’—ŠŒȱ’ȱ‘Žȱ›˜ž™ȱœŒ‘Žž•Žȱ’œȱ–˜’ꮍǰȱ‘˜ ŽŸŽ›ǰȱŒ‘Š—’—ȱ‘Žȱ–Ž–‹Ž›ȱ˜ȱŠȱ
’쎛Ž—ȱ›˜ž™ȱ ’••ȱ›Ž–˜ŸŽȱŽ¡ŒŽ™’˜—œǯ
129
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Employees are assigned to scheduling groups under the General Information section of the employee
record (Manager Tab ĺ Employees ĺȱŽ—Ž›Š•ȱ‹žĴ˜—Ǽ.
’ž›ŽȱŗŖŘȱȬȱ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱŽ—Ž›Š•ȱ—˜›–Š’˜—ȱŒ›ŽŽ—ȱ’‘ȱŒ‘Žž•’—ȱ›˜ž™ȱ‹žĴ˜—
Ž•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŒ‘Žž•’—ȱ›˜ž™ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱŠ—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ›˜ž™ȱ¢˜žȱ ˜ž•ȱ•’”Žȱ˜ȱŠœœ˜Œ’ŠŽȱ‘ŽȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ
with. The Group is added to the employee record.
’ž›ŽȱŗŖřȱȬȱGeneral Information Screen With Assigned Group
130
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Customers
Manager Tab ĺ Customers
’ž›ŽȱŗŖŚȱȬȱCustomer Lookup Screen
Customers can be reviewed, added, edited and inactivated. Customer lists can be exported from
‘ŽȱȬĜŒŽȱ’—˜ȱ¡ŒŽ•ȱŠ—ȱ˜›ǯȱ‘Ž—ȱŠ’—ȱŒžœ˜–Ž›œȱ’—˜ȱ‘Žȱœ¢œŽ–ȱ¢˜žȱŒŠ—ȱœ˜•’Œ’ȱŠœȱ•’Ĵ•Žȱ
or as much information as you like. We recommend asking for an E-mail Address. This can be an
inexpensive tool for marketing, follow-ups, loyalty discounts, etc.
If you enter the Male/Female information and the customer’s date of birth information, SuperSalon
will automatically enter their age and gender when creating tickets.
‘Ž—ȱœŽŠ›Œ‘’—ȱ˜›ȱŠȱŒžœ˜–Ž›ǰȱŽ—Ž›ȱŠ—¢ȱ™Š›ȱ˜ȱ‘Ž’›ȱꛜȱ—Š–Žǰȱ•Šœȱ—Š–Žȱ˜›ȱ™‘˜—Žȱ—ž–‹Ž›ȱ’—ȱ‘Žȱ
žœ˜–Ž›ȱŽŠ›Œ‘ȱꎕǯȱȱ•’œȱ ’••ȱ™˜™ȱž™ȱ ’‘ȱ–ŠŒ‘Žœȱ˜›ȱ¢˜ž›ȱœŽŠ›Œ‘ǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱŠȱ—Š–Žȱ˜ȱŸ’Ž ȱ˜›ȱŽ’ȱ
the customer information.
131
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Show Last Search
Manager Tab ĺ Customers ĺ Show Last Search
ȱ¢˜žȱ—ŽŽȱ˜ȱŸ’Ž ȱ‘Žȱ›Žœž•œȱ˜ȱ¢˜ž›ȱ•ŠœȱœŽŠ›Œ‘ǰȱœ’–™•¢ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ‘˜ ȱŠœȱŽŠ›Œ‘ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ‘Žȱ
results of your most recent search will be displayed.
World Customer Search
Manager Tab ĺ Customers ĺ World Customer Search
’ž›ŽȱŗŖśȱȬȱCustomer Lookup With World Search
‘’œȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ ’••ȱ˜—•¢ȱ‹ŽȱŠŸŠ’•Š‹•Žȱ’ȱ¢˜žȱŠ›Žȱžœ’—ȱ‘Žȱ˜›•ȱŽŠ›Œ‘ȱž—Œ’˜—Š•’¢ǯȱ‘Ž—ȱꛜȱ
searching for a customer, use the Customer Lookup screen. If the customer is not found, select the
˜›•ȱžœ˜–Ž›ȱŽŠ›Œ‘ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ‘Žȱ˜›•ȱžœ˜–Ž›ȱŽŠ›Œ‘ȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱŠ™™ŽŠ›œǯȱ˜ȱœŽȱž™ȱ˜›•ȱŽŠ›Œ‘ǰȱ
see page 86. If you do not have access to this function and would like it, please contact our sales
department at 888-458-1001, then press 3 or e-mail [email protected]
The Customer Database must be “Online” for it to work.
132
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
’ž›ŽȱŗŖŜȱȬȱWorld Search Enter Screen
Enter all or part of the name, phone number, postal code, or the full Quick Pass number, and then
œŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŽŠ›Œ‘ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱȱ‘ŽȱŒžœ˜–Ž›ȱ’œȱ˜ž—ȱ’—ȱ‘Žȱ˜›•ȱŠŠ‹ŠœŽǰȱ‘Žȱ›ŽŒ˜›ȱ’œȱŒ˜™’Žȱ˜ —ȱ˜ȱ
the local database.
’ž›ŽȱŗŖŝȱȬȱWorld Search Results Screen
133
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
If no results are found, select
‘ŽȱŽ ȱžœ˜–Ž›ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ‘Žȱ
customer information screen pops
up. Fill in the information for the
new customer and save.
’ž›ŽȱŗŖŞȱȬȱCustomer Information Screen Page 1
Ў›ȱœŠŸ’—ǰȱ‘ŽȱŒžœ˜–Ž›ȱ’œȱŠŽȱ
to both the World Customer database
and the local database.
’ž›ŽȱŗŖşȱȬȱCustomer Information Screen Page 2
134
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Add Customer
Manager Tab ĺ Customers ĺ Add Customer
If you have performed a search giving no results, then you can add the customer by selecting the
ȱžœ˜–Ž›ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ—Ž›ȱ‘Ž’›ȱ’—˜›–Š’˜—ȱŠ—ȱŠŸŽǯȱŽŽȱFigure 108 and Figure 109 for the panels
available when adding new customers.
Customer Panel
Manager Tab ĺ Customers ĺ Add Customer
‘Žȱžœ˜–Ž›ȱŠ—Ž•ȱ’œȱ˜—•¢ȱŠŸŠ’•Š‹•ŽȱŠĞŽ›ȱŠȱ—Ž ȱŒžœ˜–Ž›ȱ‘Šœȱ‹ŽŽ—ȱŒ›ŽŠŽǯȱ—ŒŽȱ‘ŽȱŒžœ˜–Ž›ȱ‘Šœȱ
been added into the system, the customer panel will appear at the top of the standard information
screen.
’ž›ŽȱŗŗŖȱȬȱžœ˜–Ž›ȱŠ—Ž•ȱ‹žĴ˜—œ
Personal
When entering personal information, you can collect as little or as much as you like. For data
integrity and ease of searching, it is recommended that you use a first name/last name combination.
If last names are not required, then it is a good idea to enter a phone number. In either case, phone
numbers are excellent customer identifiers and when used as a search tool, provide excellent results.
Alerts
You can enter Notes that will show at various times throughout the program. Enter your note in the
Alert Note field, and then select the red X to include the note in the various areas of SuperSalon.
Select a green arrow to remove the note from an area. Examples of Alerts are an allergy warning
when going into service, a bad check warning when going to the payment screen, and a note that
states the customer prefers a female technician when making an appointment for the customer.
Hair, Perm, Body, Nails, Skin, Color
Notes can be added to the Hair section to keep a record of information such as specific hair texture,
porosity, condition, amount of gray, and current treatments applied. Additional, specific information
can be added in the Perm, Color, Body, Nails and Skin sections. When text is submitted, the system
will display a descending history below the text area stamped with the name of the employee
who entered the information and the date the information was entered. These notes remain on a
customer’s profile permanently. Notes from these sections can be printed to the receipt printer by
selecting the print button.
135
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
History
A record of all a customer’s purchases of services and products can be viewed in this area.
Additional buttons are included within the History section to display the customer’s historical Gift
Certificate purchases and redemptions as well as the customer’s historical Series Sales purchases and
redemption information.
Appointments
The customer’s appointments will be listed. Select the Print Itineraries button to print the list.
Edit Children
SuperSalon supports the ability to add customer's children to the parent record. This will copy the
parent information to the child record reducing the time it takes to add them into the system.
Billing
Enter billing information such as addresses, city, state and postal code.
Customer Clubs
Manager Tab ĺ Customers ĺ Customer Clubs
’ž›ŽȱŗŗŗȱȬȱCustomer Clubs Menu
žœ˜–Ž›ȱŒ•ž‹œȱŒŠ—ȱ‹ŽȱŒ›ŽŠŽȱŠ—ȱŒžœ˜–Ž›œȱŒŠ—ȱ‹ŽȱŠœœ˜Œ’ŠŽȱ ’‘ȱŠȱœ™ŽŒ’ęŒȱŒ•ž‹ȱ‹¢ȱœŽ•ŽŒ’—ȱ
the club name in the customer information area. Customer clubs are used for various reasons.
Sometimes a discount might be applied for members of a particular organization. For instance, a
salon owner might want to give a discount to members of a church organization or maybe actually
make a donation to an organization based on the patronage of its members. By assigning the
customers to a customer club, reports can be created providing information on how much patronage
came in based on that club.
136
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Customer Type
Manager Tab ĺ Customers ĺ Customer Type
’ž›ŽȱŗŗŘȱȬȱCustomer Type Menu
‘Žȱœ¢œŽ–ȱŠ••˜ œȱ¢˜žȱ˜ȱŒŠŽ˜›’£Žȱ¢˜ž›ȱŒžœ˜–Ž›œȱ‹¢ȱ¢™ŽȱŠ—ȱŠ••˜ ȱœ™ŽŒ’ęŒȱž—Œ’˜—œȱ˜›ȱ‘˜œŽȱ
types such as discounts, etc. The customer is assigned to a type in the Personal section of the
Customer Panel.
Ž•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱžœ˜–Ž›ȱ¢™Žȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱŸ’Ž ȱ¢™Žœȱ˜›ȱŠȱ—Ž ǯȱ˜ȱŠȱŠȱ—Ž ȱ¢™ŽȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱȱ
žœ˜–Ž›ȱ¢™Žȱ‹žĴ˜—ǰȱŽ—Ž›ȱŠȱ—Š–ŽȱŠ—ȱœŠŸŽǯȱ
137
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
School
Manager Tab ĺ School
’ž›ŽȱŗŗřȱȬȱSchool Screen
If you have School Functions enabled, (Setup Tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱĺ System ĺȱŒ‘˜˜•ȱŽĴ’—œȱ
ĺ Enable School Functions)ȱ‘ŽȱŒ‘˜˜•ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ ’••ȱ‹ŽȱŠŽȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱŠ—ŠŽ›ȱŠ‹ǯȱ—ȱ‘’œȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱ¢˜žȱ
can record and edit tuition payments your students make, assign credits and grades to students
performing services on mannequins, and merge student records.
Tuition
˜ȱ–Š”ŽȱŠȱ™Š¢–Ž—ǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŠ”ŽȱŠ¢–Ž—ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǰȱ‘Ž—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ¢™Žȱ˜ȱž’’˜—ǰȱ‘Ž—ȱŽ—Ž›ȱ‘Žȱ
œžŽ—Ȃœȱ—Š–ŽȱŠ—ȱ™Š¢–Ž—ȱŠ–˜ž—ǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŠ”ŽȱŠ¢–Ž—ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱŠŠ’—ȱŠ—ȱ¢˜žȱ ’••ȱ‹ŽȱŠ”Ž—ȱ
˜ȱ‘ŽȱŠ¢–Ž—ȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱ˜ȱꗒœ‘ȱ‘Žȱ›Š—œŠŒ’˜—ǯ
Ž•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŽŸŽ›œŽȱŠ¢–Ž—ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱ›ŽŸŽ›œŽȱŠȱ™Š¢–Ž—ǯȱ—ȱ‘Žȱž’’˜—ȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱŠȱŠŽȱ›Š—Žȱ
Š—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŽŠ›Œ‘ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ™Š¢–Ž—ȱ˜ȱ›ŽŸŽ›œŽȱŠ—ȱŒ˜—ę›–ǯȱ‘ŽȱŠ¢–Ž—ȱŽ‘˜œȱ
œŒ›ŽŽ—ȱ ’••ȱŒ˜–Žȱž™ǯȱȱŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ’—ȱžȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱꗒœ‘ȱ‘Žȱ›Š—œŠŒ’˜—ǯȱž’’˜—ȱ™Š¢–Ž—œȱŒŠ—ȱ‹Žȱ
viewed by navigating to the Reports Tab ĺ School ĺ Tuition payments.
Student Credit/Student Grades
Grades and credits can be assigned for services performed on mannequins. This allows students to
receive adequate grades and credits to graduate in a reasonable amount of time in the event there are
not enough customers.
138
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
To assign credits, select the Assign Mannequin Credits button, then on the popup screen select
the Add Service button, select a service category, then select a service. Next select the Add Student
button, then the Done button.
To assign grades, select the Assign Mannequin Grades button, then on the popup screen select
the Add Service button, select a service category, then select a service. Next select the Add Student
button, enter a Service Grade and Customer Grade, then the Done button.
Student credits and grades can be viewed by navigating to the Reports Tab ĺ School ĺ Student
Credit Totals, Student Credits or Student Grades.
Student Merge
To merge two or more student records, select the Student Merge button. Enter a student name or
number in the search field. Select the first student to be merged from the results listed. The Student
Information screen pops up. Select OK, or cancel to start over. Follow the same procedure for the
second student. Once you have chosen the students to merge, select the Merge Records button, then
select New Merge to merge other records or Done to finish.
139
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Products
Manager Tab ĺ Products
The Product management screens are used for adding new products, editing existing products,
Ž•Ž’—ȱ™›˜žŒœǰȱŒ›ŽŠ’—ȱ™›˜žŒȱ˜›Ž›œǰȱ›ŽŒŽ’Ÿ’—ȱ™›˜žŒœǰȱŠ“žœ’—ȱ™›˜žŒœȱŠ—ȱ›Š—œŽ››’—ȱ
products. It can also be used for searching for products that meet any criteria you wish to search for.
’ž›ŽȱŗŗŚȱȬȱProduct Management Screen
Important Notes for using a Barcodes Scanner: If you do not wish to
enter separate Product Codes for a product, you can use the barcode
number as the Product Code. If you do this, leave the Scanner Code
ꎕȱŽ–™¢ǯȱǻ‘Ž—ȱ¢˜žȱœŒŠ—ȱŠȱ™›˜žŒȱž›’—ȱŠȱœŠ•ŽǰȱSuperSalon
’••ȱœŽŠ›Œ‘ȱ‘ŽȱŒŠ——Ž›ȱ˜Žȱꎕȱ’—ȱŠ’’˜—ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ›˜žŒȱ˜Ž
ꎕǼǯȱ‘’œȱ’œȱ—˜ȱ›ŽŒ˜––Ž—ŽȱŠœȱœŒŠ——Ž›ȱŒ˜ŽœȱŒŠ—ȱŒ‘Š—Žǯ
140
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Adding/Editing/Deleting Products
To add a product, press the New Product button. Be sure all brands and categories are entered into
SuperSalon before adding products. Fill out the screen as shown below and press Save or Save and
Receive Product.
’ž›ŽȱŗŗśȱȬȱ’ȱ›˜žŒȱŒ›ŽŽ—
To Edit or Delete a product, you must first pull it up using the search tool. Once it is displayed, simply
select the row to bring up the Edit Product screen as shown. To delete, select the Delete Product
button. When a product is deleted, it is not available for future transactions but it will be included in
historical data. To edit, make any changes you wish and select the Save or Save and Receive button.
Most screen fields are self-explanatory, but a brief description of each one follows.
141
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Product Code
Enter any unique numeric code for this product. Usually this will be a 4 digit number that
corresponds to a price tag you might stick on the bottle. The receptionist can key this number in
during a sale to add the product. You may use alpha-numeric product codes; however, we suggest
you use numeric product numbers. The reason for this is SuperSalon’s use of keyboard quick key
shortcuts. While trying to key in an alpha-numeric product code, you may inadvertently invoke one
of these shortcuts.
Description
The product description should show the name of the product and the size. Try to keep the format of
the descriptions consistent. They do not need to include redundant information like brand, category
or pricing.
Brand, Vendor, and Category
To select a brand, vendor or category, these must first be set up on their respective screens under
the Manager tab. This information enables the use of the Quick Pick system and helps for searching
and ordering. For instance, you can generate orders by vendor, or search for all products of a specific
brand.
Pay Commission
Products with Pay Commission set to “Yes” will be included in the commission calculation on the
payroll report assuming that a commission plan is defined. Typically this will be set to “Yes”. For
special products such as closeout products, owners may wish to not pay commission.
Number of Allowed Discounts
This option allows you to limit the number of discounts that may be used on this product in a
single transaction. This can keep someone from ringing up a sale with a senior citizen discount, a
newspaper coupon, a $2.00 discount card, and a student discount all on one ticket by limiting the
product to one or two discounts. Set to No Limit, if you want to disable it. Applicable discounts can
be selected at the bottom of the screen.
#Points to Credit
This field will only appear if the point system is enabled. Enter the number of points that a customer
will be credited on their account each time this product is purchased.
#Points to Redeem
This field will only appear if the point system is enabled. Enter the number of points needed before a
customer can redeem their points for a discount.
Discount to Use When Redeeming Product
This field will only appear if the point system is enabled. Choose the discount the customer will
receive when they redeem their points. You may use any discount you wish. The default discount is
the “Redeem Points” discount the system creates when the customer points system is first enabled.
This discount is 100% of the cost of the product. The points system only works with discounts which
do not have an amount of zero. A discount’s amount must be defined.
142
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Cost $
This is what you pay wholesale for the product. This can be left blank, but it is useful to enter an
amount so you can see how much you are spending on purchase orders and product profitability on
reports. You can report on the value of inventory by cost or retail.
Last Received Cost $
The system will enter the cost for the product from the last order.
Retail $
This is the amount that you sell the product for at retail.
Variable Priced
If you would like the product to be variable priced, choose “Yes” from the drop down. Employees
will be able to change the price when a customer is purchasing the product.
In Stock
This is the quantity the computer calculates that you should currently have on hand. You can see
how this number was derived by viewing the Inventory Report on the Reports tab (Reports tab ĺ
Products ĺ Inventory).
Employee Points
Enter points to assign to an employee who sells this product. These points might be used as
incentives and bonuses to encourage employees to offer certain products to customers thereby
increasing the per customer transaction amount.
Track Inventory
Select “Yes” from the drop down if you want the system to track the product’s inventory.
Alert Qty
When the quantity on hand reaches the level you set here or below, the next order you create
automatically suggests you order whatever quantity it takes to get back to the par level.
Par Level
This is the quantity that you would like to maintain on your shelf. When you display a product
Purchase Order, it will show suggested quantities. These quantities are calculated by subtracting
the current number on hand from the par level. If the par level is 6, and the number on hand is 3,
SuperSalon will suggest ordering 3.
Min/Max Days Cover
This is where you set the minimum and maximum days on hand you would like to have for the
product to cover you between orders.
Taxable
This option allows you to set a product as non-taxable. Usually this option will be set to “Yes” in
order for proper taxes to be added to sales.
143
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Additional Tax
Additional taxes can be added for specific products. Create the additional tax on the tax setup screen
(Setup tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱĺ Sales ĺ Taxes ĺ Current Taxes ĺ Add Tax). Select the Additional
Tax button and choose the additional tax to apply to the product.
Additional Tax Behavior
Select the Additional Tax Behavior button to choose whether the additional tax should replace the
current tax for the product or add to it. This is useful in situations where a specific product has a
higher tax rate than other products you may sell.
Scanner Code/UPC
This field allows you to enter the UPC code for a product. If you are using a barcode scanner you
will need to enter these numbers. The quickest way to enter these numbers is by using the barcode
scanner. Select the Scanner Code/UPC field. Scan the item with the barcode scanner. The code will be
added.
Transition Scanner Code/UPC
This is a special field for use when a particular product is in a transition. For example, a particular
product is re-packaged but there are both types in stock. Enter the newly packaged barcode into the
Transition Scanner Code/UPC field and either barcode will bring up the same product.
Applicable Discounts
Choose the discounts you wish to allow for the product. Choose All or None, or use the Ctrl key to
choose multiple discounts.
144
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Product Category
Manager Tab ĺ Products ĺ Product Category
’ž›ŽȱŗŗŜȱȬȱCategory Menu
When you add new products you can enter a category, therefore categories should be created before
adding products. This is where you add, edit and delete those categories. These typically include
shampoo, conditioner, styling aids, etc. This allows you to sort various lists and reports by category. It
Š•œ˜ȱŠ••˜ œȱ¢˜žȱ˜ȱœŽŠ›Œ‘ȱ˜›ȱ™›˜žŒœȱ‹¢ȱŒŠŽ˜›¢ǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱȱŠŽ˜›¢ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǰȱ‘Ž—ȱ—Š–Žȱ¢˜ž›ȱ
category and save. The category will be added to the Category List.
145
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Edit Multiple
Manager Tab ĺ Products ĺ Edit Multiple
’ž›ŽȱŗŗŝȱȬȱEdit Multiple Screen
‘Žȱ’ȱž•’™•ŽȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱ’œ™•Š¢œȱ‘ŽȱŽ—’›Žȱ•’œȱ˜ȱ™›˜žŒœȱ ’‘ȱŽ’Š‹•Žȱꎕœǯȱ‘’œȱŠ••˜ œȱ‘ŽȱžœŽ›ȱ
to make many changes to the product database at one time as opposed to editing a product and
saving, selecting a new product, editing and saving, etc. The drawback is that it is easier to make a
–’œŠ”ŽȱŠœȱ’ȱ•ŠŒ”œȱ‘ŽȱŒ˜—›˜•œȱŠ—ȱŒ˜—ę›–Š’˜—œȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ’ȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯȱ••ȱŒ‘Š—ŽœȱŠ›ŽȱŠž˜–Š’ŒŠ••¢ȱ
saved.
In Figure 117, no particular brand is chosen. It is possible to filter by a single brand, thus allowing
the user to quickly go through all of the products of a single brand and edit the retail prices. It could
Š•œ˜ȱ‹ŽȱžœŽȱ˜ȱ˜ȱŠ—ȱ’—ŸŽ—˜›¢ȱŒ˜ž—ȱ˜—ȱŠȱœ’—•Žȱ‹›Š—ȱŠ—ȱŽ—Ž›ȱŠ••ȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱŠ“žœ–Ž—œȱŠȱ˜—ŒŽǯȱȱ
›˜žŒȱ˜ž—ȱ‘ŽŽȱŒŠ—ȱ‹Žȱ™›’—Žȱ‹¢ȱœŽ•ŽŒ’—ȱŠ—ȱ’Ž–ȱ˜›ȱ’Ž–œǰȱœŽ•ŽŒ’—ȱ‘Žȱ“žœȱ˜ž—ȱ‹ž˜—ȱ
and the Product Count Sheet button.
Tip:ȱ’ȱž•’™•Žȱ˜ěŽ›œȱŠœȱŽ’’—ȱ‹žȱ•ŠŒ”œȱŒ˜—ę›–Š’˜—ǯ
BE CAREFUL!
146
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Auto Set Min Days/Max Days
Set the minimum days and maximum days. Set the filter to all or part of the product list you would
like to apply this to. Click Apply.
Auto Set Min/Max
Choose a date range and set filter to all or part of the product list you would like to apply this to.
Click Apply. The system will look at the sales over the time frame and calculate an average per day
per item formula and then will apply this to the minimum days on hand to set the Min/Max Days on
Hand settings.
Receive Order
The Receive Order button offers a quick way to receive products. Just click the box in the Receive
column where you want to start, and then enter the amount received. Use your Enter key to move to
the next product.
Adjust Count
œŽȱ‘Žȱ“žœȱ˜ž—ȱ‹ž˜—ȱ˜ȱšž’Œ”•¢ȱŽ—Ž›ȱŠȱŽ ȱ˜ž—ȱ˜—ȱ’Ž–œǯȱžœȱŒ•’Œ”ȱ‘Žȱ‹˜¡ȱ’—ȱ‘ŽȱŽ ȱ
Count column where you want to start. Enter the new number and use your Enter key to move to the
next product.
˜žȱŒŠ—ȱŠ•œ˜ȱ™›’—ȱŠȱ›˜žŒȱ“žœȱ˜ž—ȱ‘ŽŽȱ‹¢ȱœŽ•ŽŒ’—ȱ‘Žȱ›˜žŒȱ˜ž—ȱ‘ŽŽȱ‹ž˜—ǯȱ‘’œȱ
will print a sheet with all items listed and a New Count column where you can write down the new
counts when doing an inventory. Use the filters to list and print specific products you would like to
inventory.
147
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Quick Enter UPC
Manager Tab ĺ Products ĺ Quick Enter UPC
’ž›ŽȱŗŗŞȱȬȱQuick Enter UPC
œŽȱ‘Žȱž’Œ”ȱ—Ž›ȱȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱšž’Œ”•¢ȱŽ—Ž›ȱŠȱ™›˜žŒœȱȱŒ˜Žǯȱ’•Ž›ȱ‹¢ȱ‹›Š—ȱ‘Ž—ȱžœŽȱ‘Žȱ
”’™ȱ™›˜žŒȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱꗍȱ‘Žȱ’Ž–ȱ¢˜žȱ ’œ‘ȱ˜ȱŠȱ‘ŽȱȱŒ˜Žȱ˜ǰȱŠ—ȱ‘Ž—ȱžœŽȱ¢˜ž›ȱ‹Š›ȱŒ˜Žȱ
reader to add the UPC. Be sure to save.
Product Orders
Manager Tab ĺ Products ĺ Product Orders
The SuperSalon product ordering system is designed to make the difficult task of preparing
product orders much simpler, On the Products screen, select the Product Orders button. Once in the
Product Orders section select the Create Product Order button on the right.
If you order your products from Regis choose “Regis” from the Type drop down, otherwise leave
this as Manual. Select whether this will be an order for product Inventory, Back Bar, or Supplies. The
system automatically assigns a name for the purchase order, but you can enter a different name if
you choose.
Adding Products
Ȋȱ Ž•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱȱ›˜žŒȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯ
Ȋȱ This step can be done multiple times to add multiple types of products.
Ȋȱ Select a vendor, brand, or category for the products that are to be added. You may also search
by the product code.
Ȋȱ Ž•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ’œ™•Š¢ȱ›˜žŒȱ’œȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱ’œ™•Š¢ȱŠ••ȱ–ŠŒ‘’—ȱ™›˜žŒǯ
Ȋȱ Ž•ŽŒ’—ȱ‘Žȱž˜ȱŽ•ŽŒȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ ’••ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱŠ••ȱ™›˜žŒœȱ‘ŠȱŠ›Žȱ‹Ž•˜ ȱ‘Žȱ•Ž›ȱŽŸŽ•ǯ
Ȋȱ Selecting a product row will select or deselect the item to be added to the Product Order.
Ȋȱ “žœȱ˜›Ž›ȱŠ–˜ž—ȱ˜—ȱŠ••ȱœŽ•ŽŒŽȱ™›˜žŒœǯ
148
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Ȋȱ Ž•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱȱŽ•ŽŒŽȱ›˜žŒœȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ ‘Ž—ȱ¢˜žȱŠ›Žȱꗒœ‘ŽȱœŽ•ŽŒ’—ȱ‘Žȱ™›˜žŒœǯ
Ȋȱ ȱ‘Ž›ŽȱŠ›ŽȱŠ’’˜—Š•ȱ™›˜žŒœȱ‘ŠȱŠ›Žȱ˜ȱ‹ŽȱŠŽȱ›˜–ȱŠȱ’쎛Ž—ȱ‹›Š—ǰȱŒŠŽ˜›¢ǰȱ˜›ȱ
ŸŽ—˜›ǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱȱ›˜žŒœȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱŠŠ’—ǯ
You can quickly add a product on the Product Order Information page by entering a product code in
the SKU field and entering a quantity. Select the Add button to add to the PO.
Finalize the Order
Ȋȱ ›˜žŒȱ˜›Ž›œȱ–žœȱ‹Žȱꗊ•’£Žȱ‹Ž˜›Žȱ‘Ž¢ȱŒŠ—ȱ‹Žȱ™›’—Žǰȱ›ŽŒŽ’ŸŽȱ˜›ȱŠ›Œ‘’ŸŽǯ
Ȋȱ •ŽŠœŽȱ’—œž›Žȱ‘ŠȱŠ••ȱ’Ž–œȱ’—ȱ‘Žȱ™›˜žŒȱ˜›Ž›ȱŠ›ŽȱŒ˜››ŽŒȱ‹Ž˜›Žȱꗊ•’£’—ǯ
Ȋȱ Important — Any products that have a zero order quantity will be deleted from the order at
this point.
Ȋȱ Ў›ȱ‘Žȱ™›˜žŒȱ˜›Ž›ȱ‘Šœȱ‹ŽŽ—ȱꗊ•’£Žȱ—˜ȱ–˜›ŽȱŒ‘Š—Žœȱ ’••ȱ‹ŽȱŠ••˜ Žȱž—’•ȱ’ȱ’œȱ›ŽŠ¢ȱ˜ȱ
be received.
Ordering
Ȋȱ —ŒŽȱ‘Žȱ˜›Ž›ȱ’œȱ’—Š•’£ŽǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ›’—ȱ›Ž›ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱ™›’—ȱ‘Žȱ˜›Ž›ǯȱ‘Žȱ˜›Ž›ȱ ’••ȱ
print to your receipt printer at the salon or display the print properties if used from the
ȬĜŒŽǯȱ˜žȱŒŠ—ȱŠ•œ˜ȱŽ¡™˜›ȱ‘Žȱ˜›Ž›ȱ˜ȱŠȱȱꕎȱ‹¢ȱœŽ•ŽŒ’—ȱ‘Žȱ¡™˜›ȱȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱœ˜ȱ‘Šȱ
you may e-mail the order to your vendor.
Ȋȱ —ŒŽȱ‘Žȱ˜›Ž›ȱ’œȱ™•ŠŒŽǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŠ›”ȱŠœȱ›Ž›Žȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ•˜ŒŠŽȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ›’‘ȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯ
Receiving an Order
Ȋȱ ˜ȱ›ŽŒŽ’ŸŽȱŠ—ȱ˜›Ž›ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ›˜žŒȱ›Ž›œȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ‘Ž—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ›˜ ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ˜›Ž›ȱ¢˜žȱ
˜ž•ȱ•’”Žȱ˜ȱ›ŽŒŽ’ŸŽȱ’—ǯȱ‘Ž—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŽŒŽ’ŸŽȱ›Ž›ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯ
Ȋȱ Š”ŽȱŠ••ȱꗊ•ȱŒ‘Š—Žœȱ˜ȱ˜›Ž›ȱŒ˜œȱ˜›ȱœŽ•ŽŒŽȱ™›˜žŒœǯ
Ȋȱ —Ž›ȱ™›˜žŒȱ›ŽŒŽ’ŸŽȱŒ˜ž—œǯȱ˜ȱšž’Œ”•¢ȱœ ’Œ‘ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ—Ž¡ȱŽŒŽ’ŸŽȱ˜ž—ȱꎕǰȱ™›Žœœȱ‘Žȱ
tab key on your keyboard.
Ȋȱ OptionalȱȯȱȱŠȱ™Š›’Š•ȱ˜›Ž›ȱ’œȱ›ŽŒŽ’ŸŽȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ›ŽŠŽȱŠŒ”˜›Ž›ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱŒ›ŽŠŽȱŠȱ—Ž ȱ
order that contains only the products that have not been received. The Backorder will show in
the Purchase Order list.
Ȋȱ Ў›ȱŽ—Ž›’—ȱ‘Žȱ›ŽŒŽ’ŸŽȱ™›˜žŒȱŒ˜ž—œǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŠ›”ȱȱŠœȱŽŒŽ’ŸŽȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ••ȱ
changes to the products will be applied to the product database and inventory counts will be
Š“žœŽǯ
General — Misc. Information
Ȋȱ Save OrderȱȯȱŽ•ŽŒȱ‘’œȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱœŠŸŽȱŠ—¢ȱŒ‘Š—Žœȱ‘ŠȱŠ›Žȱ–ŠŽȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ™›˜žŒȱ˜›Ž›ǯȱ••ȱ
Œ‘Š—ŽœȱŠ›ŽȱŠ•œ˜ȱœŠŸŽȱ ‘Ž—ȱŒ‘Š—’—ȱ‹Ž ŽŽ—ȱ‹žĴ˜—œǯ
Ȋȱ Delete Order — If you choose to delete an order you will no longer be able to make any
changes or receive the order.
149
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Create Product Order (Wizard)
You can also use the Create Product Order Wizard to create an order. This will generate an order
based on the Min/Max levels vs. quantity on hand. You must have the Min/Max fields set and
accurate quantity on hand for the wizard to order. You will be able to delete items or add new items
after the wizard finishes.
Ȋȱ Ž•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ›ŽŠŽȱ›˜žŒȱ›Ž›ȱǻ’£Š›Ǽȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯ
Ȋȱ Enter a name for your Purchase Order and choose the Type.
Ȋȱ Select the vendor and brand.
Ȋȱ Ž•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ›ŽŠŽȱȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯ
150
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Transfer Orders
Manager Tab ĺ Products ĺ Transfer Orders
’ž›ŽȱŗŗşȱȬȱTransfer Orders Screen
‘Žȱ›Š—œŽ›ȱ›Ž›ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱŠ••˜ œȱ¢˜žȱ˜ȱ”ŽŽ™ȱŠȱ›ŽŒ˜›ȱ˜ȱ›Š—œŽ›œȱ˜Ȧ›˜–ȱ˜‘Ž›ȱ•˜ŒŠ’˜—œǯ
Ȋȱ Ž•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱȱ›Ž›ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱœŠ›ǯ
Ȋȱ —ȱ‘Žȱȱ›˜žŒœȱ˜ȱ›Ž›ȱ‹˜¡ȱžœŽȱ‘Žȱ›˜žŒȱŽŠ›Œ‘ȱꎕȱ˜›ȱꕝŽ›œȱ‹¢ȱœŽ•ŽŒ’—ȱŠȱ‹›Š—ǰȱ
vendor, or category.
Ȋȱ Select the green arrow next to the product you wish to transfer. The system will add the
product to the Transfer Order box. Do this for any items you wish to add.
Ȋȱ Ž•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ’ȱŽŠ’•ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯ
Ȋȱ Enter the Salon ID and select the Transfer Type.
Ȋȱ “žœȱ‘ŽȱŒ˜œȱŠ—ȱšžŠ—’¢ȱŠœȱ—ŽŽŽǯ
Ȋȱ ‘Ž—ȱ˜—ŽǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ˜™ȱ’’—ȱŽŠ’•ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ˜ ȱ¢˜žȱŒŠ—ȱŠ™™›˜ŸŽȱ‘Žȱ˜›Ž›ȱŠ—ȱ™›’—ȱŠȱ
Œ˜™¢ǯȱ‘Žȱœ¢œŽ–ȱ ’••ȱ–Š”Žȱ‘ŽȱŠ“žœ–Ž—œȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ’—ŸŽ—˜›¢ǯ
151
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Inventory Manager
Manager Tab ĺ Products ĺ Inventory Manager
’ž›ŽȱŗŘŖȱȬȱInventory Manager Screen
‘Žȱ—ŸŽ—˜›¢ȱŠ—ŠŽ›ȱ’œȱžœŽȱ˜ȱ›ŽŒŽ’ŸŽȱ™›˜žŒœȱ’—ȱ›˜–ȱŠ—ȱ˜›Ž›ǰȱŠ“žœȱ™›˜žŒœȱ ‘Ž—ȱ˜’—ȱ
inventory, and transferring products to and from back the back bar and other salons. This screen is
Žœ’—Žȱ˜ȱ‹ŽȱŸŽ›¢ȱŠœȱŠ—ȱŽĜŒ’Ž—ǯȱ••ȱŽ—›’Žœȱ–ŠŽȱ’—ȱ‘Žȱ—ŸŽ—˜›¢ȱŠ—ŠŽ›ȱŠ›Žȱœ‘˜ —ȱ’—ȱ‘Žȱ
ŽŒŽ’ŸŽȦ›Š—œŽ›Ȧ“žœȱ›Ž™˜›ȱ(Reports tab ĺ Products ĺȱŽŒŽ’ŸŽȦ›Š—œŽ›Ȧ“žœǼ. You can view
™›˜žŒœȱ›ŽŒŽ’ŸŽȱǻ˜›ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱŠ“žœŽȱ˜›ȱ›Š—œŽ››ŽǼȱ˜›ȱŠ—¢ȱŠŽȱ›Š—Žȱ‹¢ȱŒ˜œȱ˜›ȱ™›’ŒŽǯȱ˜Š•ȱŸŠ•žŽȱ’œȱ
calculated.
Receive/Adjust In/Adjust Out/Transfer In/Transfer Out/Count
When you start the Inventory Manager screen, the cursor is already in the Code/UPC field. Enter
a product number. The product and current quantity will be displayed for confirmation. Select the
Receive button (or other button depending on what is needed), select or enter a description if needed,
Š—ȱŠ‹ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ¢ȱ’Ž•ǯȱ—Ž›ȱ‘ŽȱšžŠ—’¢ȱŠ—ȱ™›Žœœȱ‘Žȱ—Ž›ȱ”Ž¢ǯȱ‘ŽȱŒž›œ˜›ȱ ’••ȱ“ž–™ȱ‹ŠŒ”ȱž™ȱ˜ȱ
‘Žȱ˜ŽȦȱ’Ž•ȱŠ—ȱ‘Žȱ’—ŸŽ—˜›¢ȱŒ‘Š—Žȱ ’••ȱ‹ŽȱŒ˜—’›–Žǯȱ—Ž›ȱ‘Žȱ—Ž¡ȱŒ˜ŽȱŠ—ȱŒ˜—’—žŽDZ
1. Enter the product code
2. Select the Receive button (or other button depending on what is needed)
3. Select or enter a description
4. Tab to the Qty field and enter a quantity
5. Hit the Enter key. Repeat for the next product.
If you make a mistake search for the product on the main products screen or use the Edit Multiple
function to find the product and make the correction. Remember to use the arrow keys on your
keyboard, tab, and your enter key for speed.
152
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Duplicate SKU Tool
Manager Tab ĺ Products ĺ Duplicate SKU Tool
Sometimes when you import products into your system you may get duplicate SKUs. The Duplicate
SKU Tool will check to see if you have multiple products sharing the same SKU and allow you to
–Š”ŽȱŠ“žœ–Ž—œȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ’—ŸŽ—˜›¢ȱ˜ȱ’¡ȱ‘’œǯ
Import Counts
Manager Tab ĺ Products ĺ Import Counts
Select the Import Counts button on the Product screen to bring up the Import Inventory Count
screen. From here you can import inventory counts by browsing Inventory Count files on your
computer. The file format used is CSV.
Once you have selected the file, you can verify the products and inventory counts of the file imported
by selecting the “Check File” button. This will display a report called ‘Exception Product List’. The
Exception Product List supplies the user with the SKU code, the description, the inventory count, the
On hand quantity and a reason for the displayed discrepancy.
‘ŽȱŠŸŠ’•Š‹•Žȱ›ŽŠœ˜—œȱŠ›ŽDZ
Ȋȱ Products not found in database
Ȋȱ Count not matched with On hand quantity
’ž›ŽȱŗŘŗȱȬȱImport Inventory Count Screen with Popup Browse Screen
153
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
˜ȱ˜ȱŠ—ȱ’–™˜›ȱŠ—ȱŒ›ŽŠŽȱ‘ŽȱŠŒžŠ•ȱ’—ŸŽ—˜›¢ȱŠ“žœ–Ž—œǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱȃ–™˜›ȱ˜ž—œȄȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱŠȱ
‘Žȱ‹˜Ĵ˜–ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ¡ŒŽ™’˜—ȱ›˜žŒȱ’œǯ
‘Žȱ’—ŸŽ—˜›¢ȱŒ˜ž—œȱ ’••ȱ‹ŽȱŠ“žœŽȱŠŒŒ˜›’—ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ’–™˜›Žȱ—ŸŽ—˜›¢ȱ˜ž—ȱꕎǯȱȱ™˜™ž™ȱ
window will read “Import complete”.
ȱ‘ŽȱžœŽ›ȱ Š—œȱ˜ȱŒ‘ŽŒ”ȱ‘Žȱ—Ž ȱ’—ŸŽ—˜›¢ȱŒ˜ž—œȱŠĞŽ›ȱ‘ŽȱŒ˜–™•ŽŽȱ’–™˜›ǰȱ‘ŽȱœŠ–Žȱ’–™˜›ȱꕎȱ
should be downloaded and reviewed again (Check File ĺ Exception Product List).
With a successful import, none of the lines should state reason two, “Count not matched with
—ȱ‘Š—ȱšžŠ—’¢ȄȱŠœȱ‘Žȱ’—ŸŽ—˜›¢ȱŠ“žœ–Ž—œȱ‘ŠŸŽȱ‹ŽŽ—ȱŒŠ››’Žȱ˜žȱ ’‘ȱ‘Žȱ’–™˜›ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱꕎǯ
ȱ‘ŽȱžœŽ›ȱ Š—œȱ˜ȱŒ‘ŽŒ”ȱœ™ŽŒ’ęŒȱ™›˜žŒœȱ˜—•¢ǰȱ‘Ž—ȱ‘Žȱ—ȱ‘Š—ȱšžŠ—’’ŽœȱŒŠ—ȱ‹ŽȱŒ‘ŽŒ”Žȱ
manually (Manager Tab ĺ Products ĺȱŽŠ›Œ‘ȱ˜›ȱœ™ŽŒ’ęŒȱ™›˜žŒǼ.
ȱ˜›ȱŠ—¢ȱ›ŽŠœ˜—ǰȱ‘Žȱ’–™˜›ȱ—ŽŽœȱ˜ȱ‹Žȱ›ŽŸŽ›ŽǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱȃŽœ˜›ŽȱŠŒ”ž™Ȅȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ‘Šȱ’œȱ—˜ ȱ
ŠŸŠ’•Š‹•Žȱ˜—ȱ‘ŽȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯȱ‘’œȱ ’••ȱž—˜ȱ‘Žȱ’—ŸŽ—˜›¢ȱŠ“žœ–Ž—œȱŒ›ŽŠŽȱ‹¢ȱ‘Žȱꕎȱ’–™˜›ȱŠ—ȱ
restore the inventory counts to their previous values.
154
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Brands
Manager Tab ĺ Brands
’ž›ŽȱŗŘŘȱȬȱBrands Screen
When you add new products, you can enter a brand. This is where you add, edit and delete brands,
therefore brands should be created before adding products. These might include Biolage, Redken,
Joico, etc. This allows you to sort various lists and reports (such as product orders) by brand. It also
allows you to search by brand.
Note to Fantastic Sams Users:
The brand "FS" must be used to properly report FS
product sales in FS reports.
155
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Services
Manager Tab ĺ Services
’ž›ŽȱŗŘřȱȬȱService Actions Screen
This section allows you to add and edit services. The services listed on this screen are used when
pre-selecting a service during ticket creation, booking an appointment, or checking a customer out.
The Quick Key section determines the order of service when using the Check-Out screen. Services
can be organized based on the frequency with which they are used. Because it is possible to select
services under the action menu, it is not necessary to add all of your services to the Quick Keys list.
156
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Add/Edit Service
Manager Tab ĺ Services ĺ Add Service
’ž›ŽȱŗŘŚȱȬȱEdit Service Screen
˜ȱŠȱŠȱ—Ž ȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱȱŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ˜ȱŽ’ȱŠȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱ›˜–ȱ‘Žȱ
œŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽœȱ•’œȱŠ—ȱŒ‘Š—ŽȱŠ—¢ȱœŽĴ’—œȱ¢˜žȱ ’œ‘ǯȱ‘Ž—ȱ¢˜žȱŠ›Žȱꗒœ‘ŽǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱŠŸŽȱŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽǯȱ˜ȱŽ•ŽŽȱŠȱ
service, select it and select Delete Service.
‘Ž—ȱŠ’—ȱŠȱ—Ž ȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽǰȱꛜȱŠȱ¢˜ž›ȱŽœ’›ŽȱŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱ˜ŽǰȱŠ—ȱ‘Ž—ȱŠȱŠȱŽœŒ›’™’˜—ǯȱ˜žȱ
–Š¢ȱ—˜ȱœ‘Š›ŽȱŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱ˜›ȱ›˜žŒȱ˜ŽœȱŠœȱ‘’œȱ ’••ȱŒ›ŽŠŽȱŠȱŠŠ‹ŠœŽȱŒ˜—Ě’Œǯȱ˜ ȱŠȱŠȱŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱ
Category and enter an amount. This will be used for various categorizing and reporting functions,
including the category list for pre-selecting services when creating new tickets.
157
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Edit Service Menu
Service Code
The service code can be any unique numeric code – alpha-numeric codes are not recommended. You
may wish to use this to categorize services by setting the most common services, like cuts, as 1-10, 20s
for color services, 30s for perms, 40s for styles, 50s for waxing, etc. We recommend using codes 1-9 for
most common services. If “Haircut” is the most common service, use service code 1, then use 2-19 for
similar services. You may not share Service or Product Codes as this will create a database conflict.
Description
The service description should show the name of the service and any other descriptive information.
¡Š–™•ŽDZȱȃ
Š’›ŒžȱœŽ—’˜›ȱŠ—ȱ‘Š’›Œžȱ“ž—’˜›Ȅǯȱ›¢ȱ˜ȱ”ŽŽ™ȱ‘Žȱ˜›–Šȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱŽœŒ›’™’˜—œȱŒ˜—œ’œŽ—ǯȱ
They do not need to include redundant information like type or price.
Category
This option allows you to assign a category to a service. For example, a Kids Cut might belong to
the Hair Cuts category. When making an appointment you would select the Service Category first
and then select Kids Cut for the service. This allows you to quickly select a specific service without
navigating through a long list.
For the Select Category buttons (on the New Ticket screen) to work properly, each service must have
its category selected. For services that combine two types, such as Haircut and Style, you might select
“Other”. It is not critical to have the correct category selected, but it will be more intuitive throughout
the program, and reporting will be more accurate. Often salons offer package services such as a
Haircut, Color and Style as a single offering. By creating a single service, you limit yourself to one
service category, such as “Color Services”. When you sell this service, SuperSalon will only report
one color service sold and will not report that haircut and style services were also performed. To
solve this, we recommend that you create each service separately with standard pricing. Next create a
package (page 163) (Manager Tab ĺ Packages). You will be able to enter special pricing.
Max Number of Discounts
This option allows you to set a maximum number of discounts allowed on any single service. This
keeps someone from ringing up a sale with a senior citizen discount, a newspaper coupon, a $2.00
discount card, and a student discount all on one ticket. Set to No Limit, if you want to disable it.
Price
This is the amount that you sell the service for at retail. The price can be a set price, a variable price
with a minimum price, or a variable price with no minimum. To use a set price enter an amount
and leave the boxes next to use Minimum Price and Variable Price unchecked. If you would like a
variable price but want to set a minimum amount, enter an amount and check the box next to Use
Minimum Price. The retail price will become the minimum price this item may be sold for. If do not
want a minimum price set, enter “0” or other amount and check the box next to Variable price. A
variable price allows you to select an amount each time the service is used. This feature is typically
used for up-dos, perms and other services that you charge different amounts for depending on how
long the service takes.
Available for Preselect
This option allows you to choose the services that will show up on the service buttons on the New
Ticket screen. Generally, you will want to include all services.
158
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Estimated Time to Complete
Enter the average time it takes to complete the service. This will be used by the Wait Time Calculator
to estimate wait time for walk in and call ahead customers based on how much time is needed
for the prior customers. Note that SuperSalon will allow you to enter custom times for specific
employees that will override this time (Manager Tab ĺ Employees ĺ Service Times).
Employee Points
Here is where you enter a point value for the service. These points might be used as incentives and
bonuses to encourage employees to offer certain services to customers thereby increasing the per
customer transaction amount. For example, you might encourage your employees to sell “trade-up”
services.
Customer Points System
The customer points system allows you to assign point values to services which are tracked for each
customer so that they may earn free services. For example, a haircut might be defined as earning one
point for the customer (# Points to Credit). The haircut is also assigned a point value for redemption
with collected points, let’s say 10. In this example, it would amount to “buy 10 haircuts, get one free.”
SuperSalon will track and display the customer points every time they buy.
Additional Costs
This information allows you to enter your estimated costs for professional products associated with
this service. You can then run a report for a date range to see approximately how much product
should have been used. If this amount is very different from your actual usage, it may warrant
further review.
Includes Extra Service?
If a service which has multiple components is defined, such as a haircut with a shampoo, the
shampoo is an extra service. The amount the extra service is worth is entered in this field and this
amount is carried to the extra services report. This way, the stylist is credited for their up-sell.
Non Commissionable Shop Charge
This is the amount the shop considers as overhead for the performance of the service. For example,
on a $40 color service, $5 might be considered overhead. Therefore, $35 would be the commissionable
amount on this service.
Show on Kiosk
If you are using the SuperSalon Check-In Kiosk and want customers to be able to select this service
on the Check-in screen select “Yes” here.
Show on Webcheckin
If you are using the SuperSalon Webcheckin and want customers to be able to select this service on
the check in screen select “Yes” here.
Taxable?
This option allows you to set a service as non-taxable. Usually this option will be set to “Yes” in order
for proper taxes to be added to sales.
159
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Additional Tax
Additional taxes can be added to specific services. Create the additional tax on the tax setup screen
(Setup Tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱĺ Sales ĺ Taxes ĺ Current Taxes ĺ Add Tax). Select the Additional
Tax button and choose the additional tax to apply to the product.
Additional Tax Behavior
Select the Additional Tax Behavior button to choose whether the additional tax should replace the
current tax for the product or add to it. This is useful for situations where a particular service is taxed
at a higher rate than your other services.
Requires a Resource
If the service requires a resource such as a tanning bed, etc., Select the resource from the drop
down menu. Resources are setup under the Resources button on the Manager tab (Manager Tab ĺ
Resources).
Applicable Discounts
Here you can limit the discounts that will be allowed to be used for the service. Select the discounts
you want to allow or disallow. By default all discounts are allowed. Use the Ctrl key on your
keyboard to select multiple items.
Included in Packages
If the service is included in a Package, it will be listed here. Packages are setup under the Packages
button on the Manager Tab (Manager Tab ĺ Packages).
160
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Service Category
Manager Tab ĺ Services ĺ Service Category
’ž›ŽȱŗŘśȱȬȱNew Service Category
Ž›Ÿ’ŒŽȱŒŠŽ˜›’ŽœȱŒŠ—ȱ‹ŽȱŠŽȱ‹¢ȱœŽ•ŽŒ’—ȱ‘ŽȱŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱŠŽ˜›¢ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǰȱ‘Ž—ȱœŽ•ŽŒ’—ȱ‘Žȱȱ
ŠŽ˜›¢ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ—Ž›ȱŠȱ—Š–Žȱ˜›ȱ‘Žȱ—Ž ȱŒŠŽ˜›¢ȱŠ—ȱŠŸŽǯ
Subitem
Manager Tab ĺ Services ĺ Subitem
œŽȱ‘Žȱž‹’Ž–œȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱŒ›ŽŠŽȱž‹ȱŽ–ȱŽ–™•ŠŽœȱ˜›ȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽœǯȱ˜›ȱŽ¡Š–™•Žȱ’ȱ¢˜žȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ
ž‹’Ž–ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ–Š’—ȱŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽœȱŒ’˜—ȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǰȱ¢˜žȱŒ˜ž•ȱŠȱŠȱȃ˜—ȱ
Š’›ȱ‘Š›ŽȄǯȱ—Ž›ȱŠȱ
brief description, time, and price. Save. To apply a subitem, select the Haircut service to edit it. Select
‘Žȱž‹’Ž–ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱŠ—ȱ¢˜žȱ ’••ȱœŽŽȱ‘Žȱœž‹ȱ’Ž–ȱ•’œŽȱ’—ȱ‘Žȱ•ŽĞȱŒ˜•ž–—ǯȱȱ¢˜žȱ Š—ȱ˜ȱŠȱ‘’œȱ
sub item to the Haircut service, select the sub item row then select the green arrow. When a customer
chooses the Haircut service, a popup will allow you to add the sub item to the ticket. This also serves
as a reminder to up charge for things like longer hair.
’ž›ŽȱŗŘŜȱȬȱSub Item Setup
161
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Quick Keys
Manager Tab ĺ Services ĺ Quick Keys
‘Ž—ȱ¢˜žȱꛜȱŽ—Ž›ȱ‘ŽȱŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱŒ’˜—œȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱ¢˜žȱ ’••ȱœŽŽȱŠȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱŒŠ••Žȱž’Œ”ȱŽ¢œǯȱœŽȱ‘’œȱ
œŒ›ŽŽ—ȱ˜ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ¢˜ž›ȱ–˜œȱ™˜™ž•Š›ȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽœǰȱŠ—ȱŠȱž’Œ”ȱ‹žĴ˜—œȱ˜›ȱ‘Ž–ȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ‘ŽŒ”Ȭžȱ
screen. This allows you to sell common items with one click.
˜ȱŠȱŠȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ’ȱ›˜–ȱ‘ŽȱŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱ’œǯȱȱ¢˜žȱ ’œ‘ȱ˜ȱ›Ž–˜ŸŽȱŠȱšž’Œ”ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŽ•ŽŽȱ
‹žĴ˜—ȱ—Ž¡ȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱ¢˜žȱ ’œ‘ȱ˜ȱŽ•ŽŽǯȱ˜ȱ™žȱ‘Žȱ–˜œȱ™˜™ž•Š›ȱ‹žĴ˜—œȱꛜǰȱžœŽȱ‘Žȱœ˜›ȱ
arrows. Select the up or down arrow next to a service to move it up or down the list.
Žȱ›ŽŒ˜––Ž—ȱ—˜ȱŠ’—ȱ–˜›Žȱ‘Š—ȱŽ’‘ȱ‹žĴ˜—œǯȱ˜›Žȱ‘Š—ȱŽ’‘ȱ‹žĴ˜—œȱ ’••ȱ–Š”Žȱ‘ŽȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱ
longer and will occasionally require the user to scroll down.
’ž›ŽȱŗŘŝȱȬȱž’Œ”ȱŽ¢œȱ˜—ꐞ›Š’˜—ȱŒ›ŽŽ—
162
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Packages
Manager Tab ĺ Packages
’ž›ŽȱŗŘŞȱȬȱService and Product Packages
ŠŒ”ŠŽœȱŠ••˜ ȱ¢˜žȱ˜ȱ˜ěŽ›ȱ–ž•’™•Žȱ’Ž–œȱǻœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽœȱŠ—ȱ™›˜žŒœǼȱŠœȱ˜—Žȱ‹ž—•Žȱ˜ěŽ›’—ǯȱœ’—ȱ
packages allows you to properly record the sale of all the component items and properly allocate
sales dollars and discounts across the component items. Packages can be set up for any combination
of services and products.
As an example, you may want to run a Mother’s Day special. The package can include a manicure,
pedicure, facial, and a massage. Packages allow you to combine all these services with a special price
’ȱŽœ’›Žǯȱ—Ž›ȱŠȱ—Š–ŽȱŠ—ȱ™›’ŒŽȱ˜›ȱ‘Žȱ™ŠŒ”ŠŽȱ’—ȱ‘ŽȱŠ–ŽȱŠ—ȱ›’ŒŽȱꎕœǯȱ‘Ž—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱȱ
ŠŒ”ŠŽȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ‘ŽȱŠŒ”ŠŽȱ’œȱŠŽȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱž››Ž—•¢ȱ˜—ꐞ›ŽȱŠŒ”ŠŽœȱ•’œǯ
Select the red circle to delete the package. To add the services or products you wish to include in the
package, or to edit the package information, select the notepad. When you select the notepad, the Edit
Package screen comes up where you can change the name, edit the price and add and delete services
or products you wish to include in the package.
ŠŒ‘ȱ’Ž–ȱœ˜•ȱ’—ȱ‘Žȱ™ŠŒ”ŠŽȱ’œȱŽŠ’•ŽȱœŽ™Š›ŠŽ•¢ȱ’—ȱ›Ž™˜›’—ȱŠ—ȱ˜ěŽ›ȱŒžœ˜–Ž›ȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱ’–Žœȱ˜›ȱ
the entire package.
163
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Edit Packages
Manager Tab ĺ Packages ĺ Notepad Icon
’ž›ŽȱŗŘşȱȬȱEdit Package Screen
Services and products can be added by entering all or part of the item name, description, code or
ȱ’—ȱ‘ŽȱŽ–ȱ˜˜”ž™ȱꎕȱŠ—ȱœŽ•ŽŒ’—ȱ‘ŽȱŽŠ›Œ‘ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ˜ȱŠȱŠ—ȱ’Ž–ȱ›˜–ȱ‘Žȱ›Žœž•’—ȱ•’œǰȱ
simply select the green plus sign. If you wish to delete an added item, select the red circle next the
’Ž–ȱ’—ȱ‘ŽȱŠŒ”ŠŽȱŽ–œȱ•’œǯȱ‘Ž—ȱŒ˜–™•ŽŽǰȱŠŸŽȱŠ—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŽž›—ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱŠŒ”ŠŽœȱŠ›Žȱ•’œŽȱ
‘Ž—ȱ‘ŽȱŠŒ”ŠŽȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ‘ŽŒ”ȬžȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱ’œȱœŽ•ŽŒŽǯ
164
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Series Sales
Manager Tab ĺ Series Sales
’ž›ŽȱŗřŖȱȬȱSeries Sale Setup Screen
If you want to give your customers the option to prepay for a series of future services this is where
you set this up. An example of a series sale might be if you would like to reward your regular
Œžœ˜–Ž›œǯȱ˜žȱŒ˜ž•ȱœŽȱž™ȱŠȱœŽ›’ŽœȱœŠ•Žȱ‘Šȱ˜ěŽ›œȱ˜—Žȱ›ŽŽȱ‘Š’›ŒžȱŠĞŽ›ȱŽ—ȱ‘Š’›Œžœǰȱ˜›ȱ¢˜žȱ–’‘ȱ
“žœȱ˜ěŽ›ȱŠȱ‹ŽĴŽ›ȱ™›’ŒŽȱ’ȱ‘ŽȱŒžœ˜–Ž›ȱ™›Ž™Š¢œȱ˜›ȱŽ—ȱ‘Š’›Œžœǯȱ‘Žȱ–Š’—ȱŽ›’ŽœȱŠ•ŽȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱœ‘˜ œȱ
Š—¢ȱœŽ›’ŽœȱœŠ•Žœȱ¢˜žȱ‘ŠŸŽȱ™›ŽŸ’˜žœ•¢ȱœŽȱž™ǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜›ȱŠȱœŽ›’ŽœȱœŠ•Žȱ˜ȱŽ’ȱ‘Žȱ—Š–Žȱ˜›ȱŒ˜Žȱ
of a series sale, or to delete the series. If you wish to change a price or other feature of a series, you
must create a new Series Sale.
˜ȱŒ›ŽŠŽȱŠȱ—Ž ȱœŽ›’ŽœȱœŠ•ŽǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱȱŽ›’ŽœȱŠ•Žȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱ‹›’—ȱž™ȱ‘ŽȱŽ ȱŽ›’ŽœȱŠ•ŽȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯȱ
Enter the name and a code if you wish. Select the service you wish to apply the sale to from the drop
˜ —ȱ•’œȱž—Ž›ȱŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱŠ—ȱŽ—Ž›ȱŠȱšžŠ—’¢ǯȱȱ¢˜žȱ ’œ‘ȱ˜ȱ’ŸŽȱŠȱ›ŽŽȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱŠĞŽ›ȱ‘Žȱ¢ȱ’—ȱŽ›’Žœȱ
Š–˜ž—ȱ’œȱŠŒ‘’ŽŸŽǰȱŽ—Ž›ȱ‘ŽȱŠ–˜ž—ȱ’—ȱ‘Žȱ¢ȱ›ŽŽȱꎕǯȱȱ¢˜žȱ ’œ‘ȱ˜ȱ‘ŠŸŽȱ‘ŽȱœŠ•ŽȱŽ¡™’›ŽȱŠĞŽ›ȱŠȱ
number of days select “Yes” under “Expires?” and enter the number of days you wish the sale to run
for. The system suggests a price for the series sale but you can enter any price you wish in the Series
›’ŒŽȱꎕǯȱ‘Ž—ȱ¢˜žȱŠ›Žȱꗒœ‘ŽǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŠŸŽȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱ˜ȱ‹ŠŒ”ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ–Š’—ȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯ
165
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Ž›’ŽœȱŠ•ŽœȱŠ›Žȱ•’œŽȱ ‘Ž—ȱ‘ŽȱŽ›’ŽœȱŠ•Žȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ’œȱœŽ•ŽŒŽȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ‘ŽŒ”ȬžȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯȱ‘Ž—ȱŠȱ
customer who has purchased a series sale comes back and chooses the service that applies to the
œŽ›’ŽœȱœŠ•ŽȱŠȱ™˜™ȱž™ȱ ’••ȱŠ™™ŽŠ›ȱœ‘˜ ’—ȱ‘Žȱ—ž–‹Ž›ȱ•ŽĞȱŠ—ȱŠœ”ȱ¢˜žȱ’ȱ¢˜žȱ ˜ž•ȱ•’”Žȱ˜ȱŠ™™•¢ȱ‘Žȱ
purchased series sale to the current sale.
Series Sales data is shown on the Daily report and Series Sales Activity report (Reports Tab ĺ
Services ĺ Series Sales Activity). Historical Series Sales purchases and redemption information can
Š•œ˜ȱ‹ŽȱŸ’Ž Žȱ‹¢ȱœŽ•ŽŒ’—ȱŠȱŒžœ˜–Ž›Ȃœȱ‘’œ˜›¢ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ(Manager Tab ĺ Customer ĺ History ĺ
Series Sales).
166
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Discounts
Manager Tab ĺ Discounts
’ž›ŽȱŗřŗȱȬȱDiscounts Menu
‘Žȱ’œŒ˜ž—ȱ•’œȱ™˜™œȱž™ȱž›’—ȱŠȱœŠ•Žȱ ‘Ž—ȱ¢˜žȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ’œŒ˜ž—ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ’œŒ˜ž—œȱŒŠ—ȱ‹ŽȱœŽȱ
ž™ȱŸŽ›¢ȱŽŠœ’•¢ȱŠ—ȱŒŠ—ȱ‹ŽȱœŽȱ˜ȱŠ™™•¢ȱ˜ȱœŠ•ŽȱŒ˜––’œœ’˜—œǰȱ˜›ȱŠȱœ™ŽŒ’ęŒȱŠŽȱ›Š—ŽǰȱŠ—ȱ˜ȱœ™ŽŒ’ęŒȱ
services and products. For information about applying discounts on tickets please refer to page 197.
167
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Edit Discount
Manager Tab ĺ Discounts ĺSelect Discount
’ž›ŽȱŗřŘȱȬȱEdit Discount Menu Screen
˜ȱŽ’ȱŠȱ’œŒ˜ž—ǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ’ȱ›˜–ȱ‘Žȱ•’œȱŠ—ȱŒ‘Š—ŽȱŠ—¢ȱœŽĴ’—œȱ¢˜žȱ ’œ‘ǯȱ‘Ž—ȱ¢˜žȱŠ›Žȱꗒœ‘Žǰȱ
œŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŠŸŽȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ˜ȱŽ•ŽŽȱŠȱ’œŒ˜ž—ǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ’ȱ›˜–ȱ‘Žȱ•’œȱŠ—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŽ•ŽŽȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯ
168
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Add New Discount
Manager Tab ĺ Discounts ĺSelect Discount
˜ȱŠȱŠȱ—Ž ȱ’œŒ˜ž—ǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱȱŽ ȱ’œŒ˜ž—ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ’œŒ˜ž—ȱŽ—žȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯȱ’›œȱŠȱ
any unique Code (this code is used for searching for the discount). Next add a Description. Now add
a discount value and discount type. Leaving a discount value at “0” will make this amount variable.
This allows you to select a value each time it is used. This also works with percentage discounts.
Discount Code
The discount code can be any unique alpha-numeric code (Rogers Software Development
recommends using numeric codes only). You may wish to use this to categorize discounts by using
the 10s for coupons, 20s for in-store specials, etc. It is possible to use the same code as one of the
products or service previously entered into the system, but not recommended.
Name
This is the short version of the description. For instance, if the description is “Student Discount $5.00
˜Ȅȱ‘Žȱ—Š–Žȱ–’‘ȱ“žœȱ‹Žȱœ’–™•¢ȱȃžŽ—ȱ’œŒ˜ž—Ȅǯ
Apply Discount to Sale Commission
This option allows you to determine how this discount will affect the commission paid on a product
or service after this discount is used. Usually this will be set to “Yes/100%”. As an example, when
an employee sells a $15.00 item with a $1.50 discount, they are paid commission on the $13.50 sale.
In other words, 100% of the discount was removed from the commission. If this is set to “Yes”, you
can also select a lower amount to affect the commission. This is useful when services are deeply
discounted, maybe to the point they are free, to attract new customers. If you determine that you
still want your employees to get a reasonable commission, you might set it to “Yes/50%”. As another
example, if $20.00 haircuts are discounted to $10.00 because of a $10.00 discount, only half of the
discount will be removed from their commission. Their commission will be based on $10.00 as only
$10.00 will be subtracted. If you set this to “No”, their commission will always be based on the full
value of the service or product without regard for discount. This might be used in a new shop where
services are discounted 100% for a period of time, but stylist still need to earn commissions based on
the value of the work they performed.
Discount Valid From/Through
Enter the date you wish for the discount to initially be made available for selection, as well as the
date you wish the discount to expire. This will allow you to enter an entire group of promotional
discounts in advance. For example, if you receive a promotion calendar for an entire year, you can
enter them all at once. Discounts appear when their start date occurs, and disappear when the end
date passes. If you leave these dates blank, the discount will immediately be accessible and it will not
expire.
Free Service/Bounce-Back
Enter the date you wish for the discount to initially be made available for selection, as well as the
date you wish the discount to expire. This will allow you to enter an entire group of promotional
discounts in advance. For example, if you receive a promotion calendar for an entire year, you can
enter them all at once. Discounts appear when their start date occurs, and disappear when the end
date passes. If you leave these dates blank, the discount will immediately be accessible and it will not
expire.
169
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
House Sale Only/Requires Override
If the discount applies only to a House Sale or Requires an Override, check these boxes.
Discount Value
This is the amount of the discount that will be subtracted from the retail price. If you leave this
field set to “0” you will be asked to enter an amount during the sale. This allows the discount to be
variable. This works well for discounts such as “Dollars off”, “Percentage off”, “Spin the wheel for
your discount” or other variable dollar or percentage off discounts that will be entered at the time of
the sale.
Applies To
If you select “Line” here, the discount will be applied to any items selected. If you select “Subtotal”
the discount will be shared by any items you select. For example, if you have a $4 discount applied
to “Line”, each item you select will be reduced by $4. If you have a $4 discount applied to “Subtotal”,
part of the $ will be applied to each of the items you select depending on what percentage each item
is of the total.
If you select “Subtotal” a new field called Restricted Amount will appear. Here you can enter a
minimum amount you would like the total ticket to amount to before the discount will be allowed.
Discount Type
Select if this discount is based on a dollar amount or a percentage. Optionally, the discount can be
žœŽȱ˜ȱ›ŽžŒŽȱ‘Žȱ’Ž–ȱ˜›ȱ’Ž–œȱ˜ȱŠȱ™›ŽœŽȱ›ŽŠ’•ȱŸŠ•žŽDZȱŽǯǯȱŠȱȃ ˜ȱ˜›ȱǞŘŖȄȱœ™ŽŒ’Š•ǯȱ˜ȱŠŒŒ˜–™•’œ‘ȱ‘’œȱ
see the description below.
Discounts to Retail Price
When you apply a discount with the Discounts to Retail Price option selected, the resulting retail
price will be whatever amount you enter in the field.
Choose this option by selecting the radio button to the left. This will enable the option, requiring
¢˜žȱ˜ȱŽ—Ž›ȱŠ—ȱŠ–˜ž—ȱ’—ȱ‘Žȱ’Ž•ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ›’‘ǯȱ‘Žȱ’œŒ˜ž—ȱŠž˜–Š’ŒŠ••¢ȱŠ“žœœǰȱŽ™Ž—’—ȱ˜—ȱ
the regular price of the product or service, to result in the retail you enter. The program subtracts the
amount entered from the regular price to calculate the discount.
If the retail amount entered in the field is higher than the regular price of an item, the discount
will be negative and actually increase the price of the item. This feature is very useful for product
specials. For instance, if you want to put all of your slow moving products on a table and sell them
all for $5.00, use this discount for the special. They will all be discounted to $5.00 regardless of their
regular price. If you are selling 2 for $20.00, then create a discount called “Two for $20” and set this
discount to result in a $10.00 price and use it for both items sold. SuperSalon will proportionately
’œŒ˜ž—ȱ‘ŽœŽȱ’Ž–œǯȱ—ȱ˜‘Ž›ȱ ˜›œȱŽŠŒ‘ȱ’Ž–ȱ ’••ȱ‘ŠŸŽȱ‘ŽȱœŠ–Žȱ™Ž›ŒŽ—ŠŽȱ›Ž–˜ŸŽǯȱ¡Š–™•ŽDZȱ
If you offer 2 for $20.00, and the regular price for the shampoo is $12.00 and the conditioner is
$18.00, the shampoo will have “X” discount and the conditioner will have “Y”. This feature allows
SuperSalon to maintain the relative profitability of each item. This is far more desirable than
discounting the shampoo by $2.00 and the conditioner by $8.00 to reach the $20.00.
Apply to Services
Select the services to which this discount can be applied. You can select “All” or “None” or use your
Ctrl key to select multiple services.
170
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Apply to Products
Select the products to which this discount can be applied. You can select “All” or “None” or use your
Ctrl key to select multiple products.
Apply to Customer Types
Select which Customer Type this discount is applicable to. You can select “All” or “None” or use your
Ctrl key to select multiple types.
’ž›ŽȱŗřřȱȬȱCustomer Discount Types
171
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Auto Discount
Manager Tab ĺ Discounts ĺAuto Discount
’ž›ŽȱŗřŚȱȬȱAuto Discount Screen
SuperSalon allows you to set up a discount that will automatically be applied when a ticket reaches
Šȱœ™ŽŒ’ęŒȱŠ–˜ž—ǯȱ‘’œȱŒŠ—ȱ‹ŽȱœŽȱ˜ȱ’—Œ•žŽȱ“žœȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽœǰȱ“žœȱ™›˜žŒœǰȱ˜›ȱ‹˜‘ǯȱȱŒŠ—ȱŠ•œ˜ȱ‹ŽȱœŽȱ˜ȱ
Š™™•¢ȱ˜ȱœ™ŽŒ’ęŒȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽœȱŠ—ȱ™›˜žŒœǯȱȱŠŽȱ›Š—ŽȱŒŠ—ȱŠ•œ˜ȱ‹ŽȱŠ™™•’Žǯ
Enter a name for the discount and the total amount you wish the ticket to reach before applying the
’œŒ˜ž—ǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱ ‘Ž‘Ž›ȱ‘Žȱ’œŒ˜ž—ȱ ’••ȱ‹ŽȱŠ™™•’ŒŠ‹•Žȱ˜ȱ“žœȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽœǰȱ™›˜žŒœȱ˜›ȱ‹˜‘ǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ
ȱž˜ȱ’œŒ˜ž—ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ‘Žȱ’œŒ˜ž—ȱ ’••ȱ‹Žȱ•’œŽȱ’—ȱ‘Žȱž››Ž—•¢ȱ˜—ꐞ›Žȱž˜ȱ’œŒ˜ž—ǯ
˜ȱœŽȱŠȱŠŽȱ›Š—Žȱ˜›ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱœ™ŽŒ’ęŒȱ
product and services, select the Note Pad
on the discount.
œŽȱ‘ŽȱŽ–ȱȱ˜˜”ž™ȱꎕȱ˜ȱœŽŠ›Œ‘ȱ
for services or products.
Select the plus sign under the Add column
to add services or products.
‘Ž—ȱꗒœ‘Žǰȱ‹Žȱœž›Žȱ˜ȱŠŸŽǯ
’ž›ŽȱŗřśȱȬȱEdit Auto Discount Screen
172
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Vendors
Manager Tab ĺ Vendors
’ž›ŽȱŗřŜȱȬȱVendor Menu
When you add new products, you can enter a vendor. This is where you add, edit or delete vendors.
‘ŽœŽȱ–’‘ȱ’—Œ•žŽȱ•˜ŒŠ•ǰȱ—Š’˜—Š•ȱ˜›ȱ›Š—Œ‘’œ˜›ȱŸŽ—˜›œǯȱ‘’œȱŠ••˜ œȱ¢˜žȱ˜ȱ™›’—ȱ˜›Ž›œȱ˜›ȱœ™ŽŒ’ęŒȱ
vendors and sort various lists and reports by vendor. It also allows you to search for products by
ŸŽ—˜›ǯȱ˜ȱŠȱŠȱŸŽ—˜›ǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱȱŽ—˜›ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱŠ—ȱŽ—Ž›ȱ‘Žȱ—Š–ŽȱŠ—ȱ˜‘Ž›ȱ’—˜›–Š’˜—ȱ
that applies to the vendor.
173
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Resources
Manager Tab ĺ Resources
’ž›ŽȱŗřŝȱȬȱManage Resources Screen
If you have resources that are required for some services, here is where you set these up. Examples
might include a massage room for a massage or a tanning bed for a tan. Select the Manage Resource
ŠŽ˜›’Žœȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ—Ž›ȱŠȱ—Š–Žȱ˜›ȱ‘ŽȱŽœ˜ž›ŒŽȱŠŽ˜›¢ȱŠ—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱȱŠŽ˜›¢ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ
‘Ž—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŠ—ŠŽȱŽœ˜ž›ŒŽœȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱŠȱ‘Žȱ’—’Ÿ’žŠ•ȱ›Žœ˜ž›ŒŽœǯȱ—Ž›ȱ‘Žȱ›Žœ˜ž›ŒŽȱ—Š–Žȱ
’—ȱ‘Žȱ—Š–ŽȱꎕȱŠ—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱȱŽœ˜ž›ŒŽȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ˜—’—žŽȱž—’•ȱŠ••ȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱŽœ’›Žȱ›Žœ˜ž›ŒŽœȱ
are entered. The Resource Categories will be listed in the Requires Resource drop down on the Edit
Service Menu and the resources and Resource Categories are listed on the Appointment screen when
žœ’—ȱŽœ˜ž›ŒŽȱ’Ž ǯȱ‘Ž—ȱœŒ‘Žž•’—ǰȱ¢˜žȱŒŠ—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱœ™ŽŒ’ęŒȱ›Žœ˜ž›ŒŽœǰȱœžŒ‘ȱŠœȱ–ŠœœŠŽȱ›˜˜–ȱǛŘǯ
Resources can be applied manually or SuperSalonȱŒŠ—ȱŠœœ’—ȱ‘Ž–ȱ˜›ȱ¢˜žǯȱŽĴ’—œȱ˜›ȱ‘’œȱŽŠž›Žȱ
are located at Setup tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱĺ System ĺ Appointments ĺ Manually Assign
Resources.
174
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Search Sales
Manager Tab ĺ Search Sales
’ž›ŽȱŗřŞȱȬȱSearch Sales Screen
ŽŠ›Œ‘ȱŠ•Žœȱ’œȱŠ—ȱŽ¡ŒŽ••Ž—ȱŠž’’—ȱ˜˜•ǯȱ’–’•Š›ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ˜Š¢ȇœȱŠ•Žœȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱŠŒŒŽœœ’‹•Žȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ•˜ Ž›ȱ
›’‘ȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱŠ•ŽœȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǰȱ‘ŽȱŽŠ›Œ‘ȱŠ•Žœȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱŠ••˜ œȱ›Š—œŠŒ’˜—œȱ˜ȱ‹Žȱ’œ™•Š¢ŽȱŠ—ȱ’Œ”Žœȱ
›Ž˜—Žǯȱ—ȱ‘ŽȱŽŠ›Œ‘ȱŠ•ŽœȱœŽŒ’˜—ǰȱ’Œ”ŽœȱŒŠ—ȱ‹ŽȱœŽŠ›Œ‘ŽȱŠ—ȱꕝŽ›Žȱ‹¢ȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽǰȱ’Œ”ŽȱœŠžœǰȱ
ticket type, customer name, service sold, product sold, discount, used and/or payment type used.
This section is protected under the Manager tab due to its ability to search any date or date range,
and the ability to completely void a ticket without generating a duplicate.
175
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
’ž›ŽȱŗřşȱȬȱSearch Sales Ticket Information Screen
Commission reassignments can also be done in this area. Once the transaction list is displayed, select
the line item to open the ticket detail. The employee who the commission is assigned to will be listed.
To reassign the commission, simply select the name of the employee next to the service or product
‘Šȱ Šœȱœ˜•ȱŠ—ȱ‘Ž—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ—Š–Žȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ™Ž›œ˜—ȱ¢˜žȱ ’œ‘ȱ˜ȱŒ‘Š—Žȱ‘ŽȱŒ˜––’œœ’˜—ȱ˜ǯȱЎ›ȱ
¢˜žȱŠ›ŽȱœŠ’œęŽȱ ’‘ȱŠ—¢ȱŒ‘Š—ŽœǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱŠŸŽǯ
Editing Payments and Tips
Search Sales also allows employees to edit the payment type for payments and tips received for a
completed transaction. Locations that wish to restrict access to this feature can do so by changing
Setup tab ĺ Permissions ĺ Selected Group ĺ Manager Area ĺ Edit Payment to red. Any changes
to the tip or payment amount on a ticket does not automatically re-calculate close out data. In order to
ensure the closeout data is correct, employees will need to go to Manager tab ĺ Close Out and select
Save.
To edit a tip or a payment, select the Edit Tips/Payment button on the ticket information screen.
176
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
This brings up a box with the choice of either Edit Tips or Edit Payment. These two options can be
edited independently of each other.
When editing tips, you have the
option to change the employee who
received the tip and the payment
type of the tip.
When editing the tip amount, the
new amount can not be less than or
greater than the original amount.
This allows employees to move
the tip amounts around amongst
themselves, but does not allow them
to increase or decrease the amount
the customer tipped. In order to
change the tip total, the entire ticket
needs to be edited.
’ž›ŽȱŗŚŖȱȬȱEdit Tips
When editing payments, you have
the option to change the payment
type of the transaction.
When editing the payment amount,
the new amount can not be less than
or greater than the original amount.
In situations where there are multiple
payments on a ticket, this allows
Ž–™•˜¢ŽŽœȱ˜ȱŠ“žœȱ‘ŽȱŠ–˜ž—ȱ˜›ȱ
each payment type.
’ž›ŽȱŗŚŗȱȬȱEdit Payments
177
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Card Terminal
Manager Tab ĺ Card Terminal ĺ Credit
’ž›ŽȱŗŚŘȱȬȱCard Terminal Screen
Gift Card Balance Inquiries
Manager Tab ĺ Card Terminal ĺ Gift Card ĺ Balance
˜ȱŒ‘ŽŒ”ȱ‘Žȱ‹Š•Š—ŒŽȱ˜—ȱŠȱ’ĞȱŠ›ǰȱ
Ž•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ’Ğȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜—ȱ‘ŽȱŠ›ȱ
Ž›–’—Š•ǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŠ•Š—ŒŽȱ‹žĴ˜—ǰȱ
swipe or enter the card information and
œŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ›˜ŒŽœœȱ›Š—œŠŒ’˜—ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯ
’ž›ŽȱŗŚřȱȬȱ’ĞȱŠ›ȱŠ•Š—ŒŽȱ—šž’›¢
178
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Close Out
Manager Tab ĺ Close Out
Counting Down the Till and Closing Out
The closeout process includes making drops on the Paid Out screen, and entering Mid-Day and
End-Day count totals on the closeout screen. SuperSalon compares this to the computed totals and
beginning till amounts to calculate over/under amounts.
There are two methods for closing out. You can use the Drops screen to enter drops during the day
and have them carried over to the closeout screen automatically (if this option is selected as described
‹Ž•˜ Ǽǰȱ˜›ȱ¢˜žȱŒŠ—ȱ“žœȱ’›ŽŒ•¢ȱŽ—Ž›ȱŠ••ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ–’ȱŠ—ȱŽ—ȱŠ¢ȱŒ˜ž—œȱ’›ŽŒ•¢ȱ’—˜ȱ‘Žȱ•˜œŽ˜žȱ
screen.
To use the Drop screen, select the Open Till button on the lower right of the Sales screen. You will see
Šȱ•’œȱ˜ȱ˜™’˜—œDZ
’ž›ŽȱŗŚŚȱȬȱ™’˜—œȱŒ›ŽŽ—
Ž•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ›˜™ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱŠ—ȱ‘Žȱ›˜™ȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱ ’••ȱŠ™™ŽŠ›ǯȱ—Ž›ȱ¢˜ž›ȱŒŠœ‘ȱŠ—ȱŒ‘ŽŒ”ȱ›˜™œǯ
’ž›ŽȱŗŚśȱȬȱDrop Screen
The drops appear on the Close Out screen. To access the Close Out screen, go to the Manager tab and
select Close Out or enter a prior date on the Close out screen. To view drops from prior days, go to
the Reports Tab ĺ Audit ĺ Drops.
179
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
’ž›ŽȱŗŚŜȱȬȱ•˜œŽȱžȱŒ›ŽŽ—ȱ‘˜ ’—ȱ˜–™•ŽŽȱ•˜œŽ˜ž
At the end of the day remove the opening till amount and count the balance. Enter it in the End-day
Œ˜ž—ȱꎕȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ•˜œŽȱ˜žȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱœŠ–Žȱ˜›ȱ‘Žȱ—ȬŠ¢ȱŒ‘ŽŒ”œȱŠ—ȱŒ›Ž’ȱ˜Š•œǯȱ˜›ȱŽŠŒ‘ȱ
™Š¢–Ž—ȱ¢™Žǰȱ¢˜žȱŒŠ—ȱœŽŽȱ‘Žȱ’쎛Ž—ŒŽȱ‹Ž ŽŽ—ȱ¢˜ž›ȱ˜Š•œȱŠ—ȱ‘ŽȱŒ˜–™žŽȱ˜Š•œǯȱȱ‘Ž›Žȱ’œȱŠȱ
’œ™Š›’¢ȱ ’‘ȱŒ‘ŽŒ”œȱ˜›ȱŒ›Ž’ǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŒ˜››Žœ™˜—’—ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ
Ž•™Ž›ȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯ
It will list all of the transactions entered for the day, and it will show the ticket numbers. This makes
’ȱŽŠœ¢ȱ˜ȱꗍȱŠȱ–’œœ’—ȱŒ‘ŽŒ”ȱ˜›ȱŒ›Ž’ȱœ•’™ǯȱŽ›’¢ȱŽŠŒ‘ȱ’Ž–ȱ‹¢ȱŒ‘ŽŒ”’—ȱ’ȱ˜ěǯ
‘Ž—ȱ¢˜žȱŠ›Žȱꗒœ‘ŽǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŠŸŽȦ•˜œŽȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ‘Žȱ›Žȱȃ™Ž—Ȅȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ˜™ȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱ ’••ȱ
change to “Closed”. This data will transfer to the Daily, Weekly and Monthly reports. If you go back
Š—ȱŽ’ȱŠȱ™›’˜›ȱŠ¢ȂœȱŒ•˜œŽǰȱ‹Žȱœž›Žȱ˜ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŠŸŽȦ•˜œŽȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱŠŠ’—ȱ˜ȱȃ›ŽȬŒ•˜œŽȄȱ‘ŽȱŠ¢ǯȱ‘’œȱ
will update the reports. The system will alert you if there are open tickets before closing out.
180
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
If you want SuperSalon to add drops to the closeout total, check Add Drops to Closeout Totals in
‘Žȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱ(Setup Tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱĺ System ĺ Open & Close ĺ Add Drops
to Close Out Totals). Some salons wanted to have SuperSalon add the drops to the Mid-day and
—ȬŠ¢ȱŽ—›’Žœȱ ‘Ž—ȱŒŠ•Œž•Š’—ȱ‘Žȱꗊ•ȱŒ˜ž—Žȱ˜Š•ȱǻ‘’œȱ’œȱœ˜ȱ‘Ž¢ȱ˜—•¢ȱŒ˜ž—ȱ›˜™œȱ˜—ŒŽǼǯȱ‘Ž›ȱ
œŠ•˜—œȱ Š—Žȱ‘Žȱ›˜™ȱŠ–˜ž—ȱ˜ȱ˜—•¢ȱœ‘˜ ȱŠœȱŠȱ›ŽŽ›Ž—ŒŽǰȱŠ—ȱ’ȱ—˜ȱ Š—ȱ’ȱŠŽȱ’—˜ȱ‘Žȱꗊ•ȱ
counted total (they want to recount everything at the end of the day and add it once). We decided to
accommodate both, so we added the option to choose.
There are several options you can set to modify how the Closeout works. For instance, you can
require an opening till count, set an expected opening till amount or automatically close out at a
œ™ŽŒ’ęŒȱ’–Žȱ˜ȱŠ¢ǯȱ‘ŽœŽȱœŽĴ’—œȱŒŠ—ȱ‹Žȱ˜ž—ȱ‹¢ȱ—ŠŸ’Š’—ȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱSetup Tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱ
ĺ System ĺ Open & Close.
Update
Manager Tab ĺ Update
The Update button should only be used under the guidance of technical support. When pressed,
SuperSalon connects to the Internet and looks for software updates. Updates must be set on our
servers for each location to show them as available.
Upload
Manager Tab ĺ Upload
The Upload button transfers the current location's data to the I-Office. SuperSalon normally
uploads data automatically every day. Sometimes, however, there are circumstances where an upload
may need to be initiated manually.
181
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
The Sales Tab (Wait/Serve Screen)
Sales Tab ĺ Waiting/Servicing Screen
’ž›ŽȱŗŚŝȱȬȱDefault Screen (Waiting/Servicing)
If the Wait/Serve screen is selected as your default screen in setup, then it will be the startup screen in
SuperSalon. You can also set the Appointment screen or the Customer Lookup screen as your start
screen (Setup Tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱĺ System ĺ General ĺ Default Screen).
Statistics are shown for the wait times and number of stylist checked in, customers waiting, and Look
& Walks. Whenever you notice a potential customer look into the salon and leave, select the Look &
Walk button. The time of day and number is noted and used in the scheduling helper which lets you
know where you may need more staff.
182
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
More Options
Default Screen ĺ (M) More
’ž›ŽȱŗŚŞȱȬȱ˜›Žȱ™’˜—œ
Select the More button, then select the Price check button to find or confirm a product price. Scan or
enter the product code and select the Search button for results.
For a list of the next available stylist, select the Next Stylist button. Stylists are listed in order with the
stylist waiting the longest at the top.
Locations that are using the WebCheckin service can also view a list of tickets that were booked
online by selecting the Online Tickets button.
183
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Today's Sales Screen
Default Screen ĺ (M) More ĺ Today's Sales
’ž›ŽȱŗŚşȱȬȱ˜Š¢ȇœȱŠ•ŽœȱŒ›ŽŽ—
Ž•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ˜›Žȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ‘Ž—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ˜Š¢ȇœȱŠ•Žœȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱ‹›’—ȱž™ȱ‘ŽȱŠ¢œȱ›Š—œŠŒ’˜—œǯȱ•’Œ”ȱ
˜—ȱŠȱ›˜ ȱ˜ȱŸ’Ž ȱ‘ŽȱœŠ•ŽœȱŽŠ’•œǯȱ˜ŽDZȱȱ¢˜žȱ—ŽŽȱ˜ȱŽ’ȱ˜›ȱŸ˜’ȱŠȱ’Œ”Žȱ¢˜žȱ ’••ȱ—ŽŽȱ˜ȱ˜ȱ˜ȱ
Manager Tab ĺ Search Sales. The edit functions are there so that access controls can be set if desired.
184
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Checking in Customers
Default Screen ĺ (N) New Ticket ĺ Enter Name ĺ
Select Customer/New Customer
’ž›ŽȱŗśŖȱȬȱChecking in an Existing Customer
›˜–ȱ‘ŽȱŽŠž•ȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŽ ȱ’Œ”Žȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯ
If you are using the customer database, the screen will change to the Customer Search screen. Type
’—ȱ™Š›ȱ˜›ȱŠ••ȱ˜ȱŠȱŽ•Ž™‘˜—Žȱ—ž–‹Ž›ȱ˜›ȱ—Š–Žȱ˜ȱœŽŠ›Œ‘ȱ˜›ȱ‘ŽȱŒžœ˜–Ž›ȱ’—ȱ‘ŽȱŠŠ‹ŠœŽǯȱ˜›ȱŽ¡Š–™•ŽDZȱ
John Doe, John, Doe, J Doe, John D, 555-1212, 1212 will all bring up customers with all or part of the
information you entered.
Ž•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŽœ’›Žȱ—Š–Žȱ‘Ž—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŽ¡ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱȱ¢˜žȱŠ›Žȱ—˜ȱžœ’—ȱ‘ŽȱŒžœ˜–Ž›ȱŠŠ‹ŠœŽǰȱ
œŽ•ŽŒ’—ȱ‘ŽȱŽ ȱ’Œ”Žȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ ’••ȱŠ”Žȱ¢˜žȱ’›ŽŒ•¢ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ’Œ”Žȱ™’˜—œȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯȱȱ¢˜žȱ˜ȱ—˜ȱ
ꗍȱ‘ŽȱŒžœ˜–Ž›ȱ’—ȱ‘ŽȱŠŠ‹ŠœŽǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱȱŽ ȱžœ˜–Ž›ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱŠȱ‘Ž–ȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱŠŠ‹ŠœŽǯȱ
ȱ‘Ž›Žȱ’œȱŠȱœ™ŠŒŽȱ‹Ž ŽŽ—ȱ‘ŽȱꛜȱŠ—ȱ•Šœȱ—Š–ŽǰȱSuperSalon will automatically enter their first
name in the first name field and the last name in to the last name field. SuperSalon also detects
phone numbers and puts them in the phone field. For product only customers, you will always want
to use the Quick Sale button.
185
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
View Existing Customer Information
Default Screen ĺ (N) New Ticket ĺ Enter Name ĺ Select Customer
’ž›ŽȱŗśŗȱȬȱView Customer Information
After selecting or creating a customer, an overview of the customer information will appear on the
right.
Select the Next button at the bottom right of the screen to continue creating a ticket.
Select the Customer Info button to update customer information and access customer history.
186
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Existing Customer Personal Information Screen
Default Screen ĺ (N) New Ticket ĺ Enter Name ĺ Select Name ĺCustomer Info
’ž›ŽȱŗśŘȱȬȱExisting Customer Personal Information
œŽȱ‘ŽȱŠ‹ȱ”Ž¢ȱ˜ȱ–˜ŸŽȱ›˜–ȱꎕȱ˜ȱꎕǯȱ—Ž›ȱ˜›ȱž™ŠŽȱ’—˜›–Š’˜—ȱŠœȱ—ŽŽŽǯȱ‘Ž—ȱ¢˜žȱŠ›Žȱ
ꗒœ‘ŽDZȱŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŠŸŽȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱœŠŸŽȱ¢˜ž›ȱŠŠȱ˜›ȱ‘ŽȱŠŸŽȱŠ—ȱžœŽȱ˜—ȱ’Œ”Žȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱŒ›ŽŠŽȱŠȱ
ticket. Customer information can also be entered by selecting the Manager Tab ĺ Customers and
using the Customer Search.
187
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Customer History
Default Screen ĺ (N) New Ticket ĺ Enter Name ĺ Select Name ĺ
Customer Info ĺ+LVWRU\
’ž›ŽȱŗśřȱȬȱCustomer Panel Showing History
If you need to see a detailed customer history, select the History button.
Customer personal information can be modified by selecting the Personal button.
Alerts that pop up at various times during the transaction can be added by selecting the Alerts
button.
Select the Hair, Perm, Body, Nails, Skin and Color buttons to enter customer preferences and stylist
notes about the customer.
Appointments, gift certificates and series sales associated with the customer can also be viewed.
188
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
New Customer Screen
Default Screen ĺ (N) New Ticket ĺ Add New Customer
’ž›ŽȱŗśŚȱȬȱNew Customer Personal Information
—Ž›ȱŠ••ȱŒžœ˜–Ž›ȱ’—˜›–Š’˜—ȱŠ—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŒ˜››ŽŒȱŽ—Ž›ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŠŸŽȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱœŠŸŽȱ
¢˜ž›ȱŠŠȱ˜›ȱŠŸŽȱ—ȱœŽȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱœŠŸŽȱ¢˜ž›ȱŠŠȱŠ—ȱŒ›ŽŠŽȱŠȱ’Œ”Žǯ
To save time, if you enter a customer name and/or number on the customer search screen, but do not
ꗍȱ‘Ž–ȱ’—ȱ‘Žȱœ¢œŽ–ǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱȃŽ ȱžœ˜–Ž›Ȅȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱžœ˜–Ž›ȱŽŠ›Œ‘ȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯȱSuperSalon will
automatically transfer their name and number to the new customer screen.
New customers can also be entered by selecting the Manager Tab ĺ Customers ĺ Add Customer.
189
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Checking in Customers with World Search
Default Screen ĺ (N) New Ticket ĺ Enter Name ĺ Select Name
˜›•ȱŽŠ›Œ‘ȱ‹žĴ˜—
’ž›ŽȱŗśśȱȬȱCustomer Search Screen With World Search
ȱ˜›•ȱŽŠ›Œ‘ȱ’œȱŽ—Š‹•Žǰȱ¢˜žȱ ’••ȱ‘ŠŸŽȱŠȱ˜›•ȱŽŠ›Œ‘ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜—ȱ¢˜ž›ȱŒžœ˜–Ž›ȱŽŠ›Œ‘ȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯȱ
ȱ‘Žȱœ¢œŽ–ȱ˜Žœȱ—˜ȱꗍȱŠȱ–ŠŒ‘ȱ˜—ȱ¢˜ž›ȱ•˜ŒŠ•ȱȱŒ˜–™žŽ›ǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ˜›•ȱŽŠ›Œ‘ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱ
search the World Customer database.
190
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
’ž›ŽȱŗśŜȱȬȱWorld Search Screen
Enter all or part of the name, phone number, postal code, or the full Quick Pass number, and then
œŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŽŠ›Œ‘ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ‘Žȱ›Žœž•œȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱŒ˜–Žœȱž™ǯ
’ž›ŽȱŗśŝȱȬȱWorld Search Results Screen
Select the customer and proceed with the transaction as usual. If no results come up select the
Ž ȱžœ˜–Ž›ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱŠ—ȱŽ—Ž›ȱ‘ŽȱŒžœ˜–Ž›ȱ’—˜›–Š’˜—ǯȱ‘ŽȱŒžœ˜–Ž›ȱ ’••ȱ‹ŽȱŠŽȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ•˜ŒŠ•ȱ
database as well as the World Customer database.
191
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
New Ticket Options Screen
Default Screen ĺ (N) New Ticket ĺ Enter Name ĺ Select Name ĺNext
’ž›ŽȱŗśŞȱȬȱTicket Options Screen
—Ž›ȱ˜™’˜—Š•ȱ’œ’ȱ
’œ˜›¢ǰȱŽ—Ž›ǰȱŠŽ˜›¢ǰȱ˜ž›ŒŽǰȱŠ—ȱ ‘Ž‘Ž›ȱ‘Žȱž››Ž—ȱ쎛ȱ’œȱŠŒŒŽ™Žȱ
˜›ȱŽŒ•’—Žȱǻ›ŠŒ”’—ȱ˜™’˜—ȱœŽĴ’—œȱŒŠ—ȱ‹ŽȱœŽȱ‹¢ȱ—ŠŸ’Š’—ȱ˜ȱSetup Tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱĺ
Marketing ĺ Customer Lookup & Tracking ĺ Tracking Options). Select a category, the services to
perform, and request an employee, or choose Next Available. Then send the customer to service,
wait or Check-Out. For repeat customers, the visit history, gender, and category are all selected
automatically When a stylist is pre-selected, it constitutes as a request.
The options are displayed so that you can quickly verify and
edit if needed.
ȱ—˜ŽȱŒŠ—ȱ‹ŽȱŠĴŠŒ‘Žȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ’Œ”Žȱ‹¢ȱŽ—Ž›’—ȱ‘Žȱ’—˜›–Š’˜—ȱ
’—ȱ‘Žȱžœ˜–Ž›ȱŽœŒ›’™’˜—ȱꎕǯȱ‘’œȱŒŠ—ȱ’–™›˜ŸŽȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽǰȱ
instead of yelling out a name, an employee will know “Gary” is
the customer with the green cap.
’ž›ŽȱŗśşȱȬȱTicket Notes
192
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Call Aheads
Default Screen ĺ (N) New Ticket ĺ Enter Name ĺ Select Name ĺ
Next ĺ&DOO$KHDG
’ž›ŽȱŗŜŖȱȬȱCall Ahead Option
ȱ‘ŽȱŒžœ˜–Ž›ȱ’œȱŒŠ••’—ȱŠ—ȱ ’••ȱŠ››’ŸŽȱ•ŠŽ›ȱ’—ȱ‘ŽȱœŠ–ŽȱŠ¢ǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŠ••ȱ‘ŽŠȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱȱ
window will appear allowing you to select their expected arrival time, and then select the Wait
‹žĴ˜—ǯ
A ticket will be created and placed in the Wait column
of the Wait/Serve Screen and color-coded blue with the
expected time of arrival noted.
‘Žȱ’Œ”Žȱ ’••ȱ‘ŠŸŽȱŠȱŠŽȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱŠ—ȱŠȱ
Ž›Žȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜—ȱ’ǯ
If the customer arrives on time you might select "Here" and
the customer will keep their position in line, if you select
Late, they go to the back of the line.
’ž›ŽȱŗŜŗȱȬȱCall Ahead Ticket
193
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Chemical Release
Default Screen ĺ (N) New Ticket ĺ Enter Name ĺ Select Name ĺ
Next ĺ&KHPLFDO5HOHDVH
If you want a customer to sign a liability release, select the Chemical Release. This will print a liability
release from the receipt printer for your customer to sign. You can edit the release text (Setup Tab ĺ
Receipt Printer ĺ Release). If you would like to print a blank Chemical card so the stylist can enter
—˜Žœȱ˜›ȱ•ŠŽ›ȱŽ—›¢ǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ•Š—”ȱŠ›œȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯ
Note:ȱ˜Ž›œȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽŸŽ•˜™–Ž—ȱ’œȱ—˜ȱ›Žœ™˜—œ’‹•Žȱ
for correct or appropriate liability release text. You
must edit this to meet your needs.
Redo/Pre-Pay/Send to Check-Out/Select Employee
Default Screen ĺ (N) New Ticket ĺ Enter Name ĺ Select Name ĺ
Next ĺ Redo/Pre-Pay/Send to Check-Out/Employee Select
ȱ‘ŽȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱ’œȱŠȱ›Ž˜ǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŽ˜ȱŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ‘Ž—ȱ‘ŽȱŠ’ȱ
‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ‘ŽȱŒ˜•˜›ȱŒ‘Š—Žœȱ˜ȱ™’—”ȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ’Œ”Žȱ˜ȱ’—’ŒŠŽȱ‘ŽȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱ
is a redo.
Ž•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ›Ž™Š¢ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ’ȱ‘ŽȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱ’œȱ™›Ž™Š’ǯȱ‘Žȱ’Œ”Žȱ ’••ȱ
indicate the service was prepaid.
This unique feature of SuperSalon allows you to prepay tickets
without checking them out.
’ž›ŽȱŗŜŘȱȬȱRedo
For example, a mom brings her son in for a haircut, but there is a
20 minute wait. The mom wants to prepay so she can go shopping
next door, and she tells her son to meet her when he is done with the
haircut.
Most systems simply force you to make a ticket and ring it out.
This means that you need to ring it out as a house sale, and then
remember to change the commission to who you know the employee
is. It also means that wait time and service times are 0 minutes, so
you lose valuable audit information.
With SuperSalon, you can pick a service and allow the customer
to pay, but the ticket stays in the Wait queue. When the ticket is taken
˜ȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽǰȱ‘ŽȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ’œȱœŽ•ŽŒŽȱŠ—ȱ‘Žȱ’–ŽœȱŠ›Žȱ›ŠŒ”Žȱ“žœȱ•’”Žȱ
a regular ticket. When you are done servicing, the ticket will have a
ȃ’—’œ‘Ȅȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ’–™•¢ȱ™›Žœœȱ’ȱ˜ȱŒ˜–™•ŽŽǯ
’ž›ŽȱŗŜřȱȬȱPre-Paid
Ticket
194
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
When creating a ticket, you have the option of requesting an employee. Simply select the preferred
employee. When you do this, the ticket will be color coded yellow. Tickets with special statuses are
striped. If your ticket has multiple statuses such as a Request and a Call-Ahead, it will be striped with
‘ŽȱŒ˜››Žœ™˜—’—ȱŒ˜•˜›œǯȱ‘ŽȱŠ–˜ž—ȱœŽȱž™ȱ’—ȱ‘ŽȱŽšžŽœȱ‘Š›Žȱꎕȱ˜—ȱ‘ŽȱŠ¢›˜••Ȧ˜—žœŽœȱ
‹žĴ˜—ȱ ’••ȱ‹ŽȱŠŽȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱœŠ•Žœȱ’Œ”Žȱ ‘Ž—ȱŠȱŒžœ˜–Ž›ȱ›ŽšžŽœœȱŠ—ȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ(Setup Tab ĺ Payroll/
Bonuses).
Ž•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ‘ŽŒ”Ȭžȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ’ȱ‘ŽȱŒžœ˜–Ž›ȱ’œȱ›ŽŠ¢ȱ˜ȱ˜ȱ’›ŽŒ•¢ȱ˜ȱ‘ŽŒ”Ȭžȱǻ‘’œȱ‹¢™ŠœœŽœȱ
sending the customer to Waiting or Servicing). This is mainly used in instances where a salon would
like to keep a record of what products a customer has purchased.
If sending the customer to service, select the employee from the list. For salons with a high number
˜ȱœŠěȱ¢˜žȱŒŠ—ȱœŽŠ›Œ‘ȱ˜›ȱŠ—ȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ‹¢ȱŽ—Ž›’—ȱŠ—ȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ—Š–Žȱ˜›ȱ™Š›ȱ˜ȱŠȱ—Š–ŽȱŠ—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ
from the list.
195
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Servicing Customers
Sales Tab ĺ Waiting/Servicing Screen
When an employee is ready to take their next customer, they need to move the customer from the
Š’’—ȱ•’œȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱŽ›Ÿ’Œ’—ȱ•’œǯȱ‘Ž›ŽȱŠ›Žȱ ˜ȱ Š¢œȱ˜ȱ˜ȱ‘’œDZ
1.
2.
Choose the ticket from the waiting list (usually the
one on top) and select the right arrow on the ticket.
Alternatively, scroll through the tickets with the up
and down arrow keys and select with the right arrow
key. A list of stylists will appear. Only employees who
are "clocked in" and have "Performs Services" checked
on their Employee Setup will be listed (Manager Tab
ĺȱ–™•˜¢ŽŽœȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱĺ General Information). Select
an employee name. The customer ticket will move
into the Servicing list and a ticket will print out on the
receipt printer if service receipts are enabled (Setup
Tab ĺ Receipt Printer ĺ Options ĺ Print Receipt When
Servicing Customers).
’ž›ŽȱŗŜŚȱȬȱTicket in Waiting
Ž•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱŽ¡ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ
The Customer Waiting list
will appear. With this option
you can "Serve Next" from
any screen, even when the
receptionist is in the middle of
a sales transaction
They can take their next
customer without interrupting
the sale using this method.
Select the customer to put
them into service. The ticket
will move into the Servicing
list and a ticket will print on
the receipt printer if service
receipts are enabled.
’ž›ŽȱŗŜśȱȬȱCustomer Waiting List
196
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Customer Check-Out
2SWLRQ (N) New Ticket ĺ Select Customer ĺ1H[Wĺ&KHFN2XW
Option 2: Servicing Column ĺ Select Ticket ĺ Right Arrow on Ticket
’ž›ŽȱŗŜŜȱȬȱChecking-Out a Customer
When the customer is ready to Check-Out, select the right arrow on the servicing ticket. You can add
–˜›ŽȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽœǰȱ’Ğœǰȱ™›˜žŒœǰȱ’œŒ˜ž—œȱŠ—ȱ›Žž—œǰȱŠ—ȱŽŒǯǰȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ‘ŽŒ”ȬžȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯȱ›ŽœŽ•ŽŒŽȱ
œŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽœȱ ’••ȱŒ˜–Žȱ˜ŸŽ›ȱŠž˜–Š’ŒŠ••¢ȱǻ’ȱȃŠœœȱ™›ŽȬœŽ•ŽŒŽȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽœȱ˜ȱŒ‘ŽŒ”Ȭ˜žȄȱ’œȱŽ—Š‹•ŽDZȱSetup
Tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱĺ Sales ĺ Tickets & Sales ĺ Pre-Selected Services ĺ Pass pre-selected
services to check-out).
ȱ¢˜žȱ”—˜ ȱ‘ŽȱŒ˜Žȱ˜ȱŠȱ™›˜žŒȱ˜›ȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽǰȱœ’–™•¢ȱ¢™Žȱ‘ŽȱŒ˜Žȱ’—˜ȱ‘Žȱ—Ž›ȱŠ—ȱŽ–ȱ˜Žȱꎕȱ
at the top of the screen and hit enter. The product or service will automatically be added to the ticket.
’‘ȱ‘’œȱ–Ž‘˜ȱ¢˜žȱ˜ȱ—˜ȱ—ŽŽȱ˜ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ™›˜žŒȱ˜›ȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱŒŠŽ˜›¢ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ•ŽĞǯ
ȱ¢˜žȱ”—˜ ȱ™Š›ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ—Š–Žȱ˜ȱŠȱ™›˜žŒȱ˜›ȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱ¢˜žȱŒŠ—ȱŠ•œ˜ȱ¢™Žȱ’ȱ’—˜ȱ‘ŽȱꎕȱŠȱ‘Žȱ˜™ȱ˜ȱ
the screen and hit enter. SuperSalon will automatically search for it and show the results. Select the
desired item to add it to the ticket.
Ž›Ÿ’ŒŽœȱŒŠ—ȱŠ•œ˜ȱ‹ŽȱŠŽȱ‹¢ȱœŽ•ŽŒ’—ȱ‘ŽȱŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽœȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱž—Ž›ȱ‘ŽȱŒ’˜—œȱŽ—žǰȱ‘Ž—ȱ‘Žȱ
category, and then selecting the green arrow next to the service.
197
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
›˜žŒœȱŒŠ—ȱŠ•œ˜ȱ‹ŽȱŠŽȱ‹¢ȱœŽ•ŽŒ’—ȱ‘Žȱ›˜žŒœȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱž—Ž›ȱ‘ŽȱŒ’˜—œȱŽ—žǰȱ‘Ž—ȱ‘Žȱ
brand, and then selecting the green arrow next to the product.
With this method, services and products can be added in 3 touches.
For this to work correctly all products must have brands and categories set (Manager Tab ĺ Products
ĺ Edit Product), and all services must have categories set (Manager Tab ĺ Services ĺ Edit Service).
‘ŽȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽœȱ•’œŽȱ’—ȱ‘Žȱ–’•ŽȱŒ˜•ž–—ȱŒŠ—ȱ‹ŽȱŽę—Žȱ’—ȱ‘Žȱž’Œ”ȱŽ¢œȱœŽŒ’˜—ȱ(Manager Tab ĺ
Services ĺ Quick Keys). This way, the most commonly used services will be displayed when you
ꛜȱ˜ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ‘ŽŒ”ȬžȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯȱ‘ŽȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽœȱ•’œŽȱ’—ȱ‘Žȱ–’•ŽȱŒ˜•ž–—ȱŒŠ—ȱ‘Ž—ȱ‹ŽȱŠŽȱ ’‘ȱ
one touch.
’œŒ˜ž—œȱŠ›ŽȱŠŽȱ‹¢ȱœŽ•ŽŒ’—ȱ‘Žȱ’œŒ˜ž—œȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱž—Ž›ȱ‘ŽȱŒ’˜—œȱŽ—žǯȱ‘Ž—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ
›ŽŽ—ȱŠ››˜ ȱ—Ž¡ȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱŠ™™•’ŒŠ‹•Žȱ’œŒ˜ž—ǰȱ˜›ȱ¢™Žȱ‘Žȱ’œŒ˜ž—ȱŒ˜Žȱ’—ȱ‘Žȱ—›¢ȱꎕȱŠȱ‘Žȱ˜™ȱ˜ȱ
the screen. To apply the discount to two or more items, add the desired products to the Check-Out
screen and select all of the items you wish to discount. All Selected items will turn blue. When all
’Ž–œȱŠ›ŽȱœŽ•ŽŒŽǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ’œŒ˜ž—œȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱŠ—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŽœ’›Žȱ’œŒ˜ž—ǯȱȱ’œŒ˜ž—ȱ ’••ȱ‹Žȱ
applied to each product.
Žž—œȱŠ›ŽȱŠŒŒ˜–™•’œ‘Žȱ’—ȱŠȱœ’–’•Š›ȱ–Š——Ž›ǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŽž—ȦŽ˜ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱž—Ž›ȱ‘ŽȱŒ’˜—œȱ
Ž—žǯȱ‘˜˜œŽȱ‘ŽȱŽž—ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱŠȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱ˜›ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱŠȱ™›˜žŒȱ‹¢ȱœŒŠ——’—ȱ˜›ȱœŽŠ›Œ‘’—ȱ˜›ȱ‘Žȱ
product in the search box at the top of the Check-out Screen. Edit the quantity and price as needed.
Select the green arrow next to the service or product to create a refund line item. Select as many items
Šœȱ—ŽŒŽœœŠ›¢ǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŠ¢ȱ˜ ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯ
˜ȱ›Ž–˜ŸŽȱŠ—ȱŽ—›¢ȱ˜—ȱ‘ŽȱœŠ•Žœȱ’Œ”Žǰȱœ’–™•¢ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŽ—›¢ȱŠ—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŽ–˜ŸŽȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱȱ¢˜žȱ
select an entry that has a discount, the discount will automatically be removed also.
ȱ‘ŽȱŒžœ˜–Ž›ȱ’œȱ›ŽŠ¢ȱ˜ȱ™Š¢ǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŠ¢ȱ˜ ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱ˜ȱ˜ȱ
‘ŽȱŠ¢–Ž—ȱŒ›ŽŽ—ȱ˜›ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ
˜•ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱœŽ—ȱ‘Žȱ’Œ”Žȱ˜ȱ
‘ŽȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱœ’Žȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱŠ’ȦŽ›ŸŽȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯȱžĴ’—ȱŠȱ’Œ”Žȱ˜—ȱ‘˜•ȱ
stops the clock on the servicing, but allows you to postpone the
Check-Out process. This can be used when a customer is part of
a group that will pay when everyone is done, or when a customer
œ’–™•¢ȱ—ŽŽœȱ˜ȱ˜ȱꗍȱ‘’œȱ˜›ȱ‘Ž›ȱ Š••Žǯ
’ž›ŽȱŗŜŝȱȬȱHolding For Sale
Tip:ȱ‘’•ŽȱŒ‘ŽŒ”’—ȱ˜žȱŠȱ’Œ”Žǰȱ’ȱ’œȱ’–™˜›Š—ȱ˜ȱ—˜Žȱ‘Šȱ‘ŽȱŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱ‹žĴ˜—œȱ
never go away. Even when ringing a customer out. SuperSalon is designed
this way so that an employee never needs to wait on the computer to get to their
next customer. In the middle of a sale you can select Serve Next to assist another
customer. When done, SuperSalonȱ›Žž›—œȱ˜ȱ ‘Ž›Žȱ’ȱ•ŽĞȱ˜ěȱ’—ȱ‘ŽȱŒž››Ž—ȱœŠ•Žǯȱ
The entire interruption lasts only seconds.
198
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Split Commissions
Search Sales ĺ Click Ticketĺ Edit Commission
’ž›ŽȱŗŜŞȱȬȱSplit Commissions Screen
ȱ¢˜žȱŠ••˜ ȱœ™•’ȱŒ˜––’œœ’˜—œȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ’ȱ˜––’œœ’˜—ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱŒ‘˜˜œŽȱ‘Žȱœ¢•’œœǯ
Select the service you wish to split. Choose
the employee who shares the commission
Š—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ”ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ••ȱ
–™•˜¢ŽŽœȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱœ‘˜ ȱŠ••ȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽœǯ
’ž›ŽȱŗŜşȱȬȱEmployee Selection Screen
199
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Gift Certificate Sales
Check-Out Screen ĺ Giftĺ*LIW&HUWLÀFDWHV
’ž›ŽȱŗŝŖȱȬȱ›ŽŠ’—ȱŠȱ’ĞȱŽ›’ęŒŠŽ
˜ȱžœŽȱ‘Žȱ’ĞȱŽ›’ęŒŠŽȱœ¢œŽ–ǰȱ’ȱ–žœȱꛜȱ‹ŽȱŽ—Š‹•Žȱ(Setup Tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱĺ
Marketing ĺȱ˜¢Š•¢ȱǭȱ’Ğȱĺȱ—Š‹•Žȱ’ĞȱŽ›’ęŒŠŽȱ¢œŽ–Ǽǯȱ‘Ž—ȱŽ—Š‹•Žǰȱ‘Žȱ’Ğœȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ ’••ȱ
Š™™ŽŠ›ȱ˜—ȱ‘ŽȱŒ’˜—œȱŽ—žǯȱ’’˜—Š••¢ǰȱŠȱ’ĞȱŒŽ›’ęŒŠŽȱœŽŠ›Œ‘ȱ’œȱŽ—Š‹•Žȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ™Š¢–Ž—ȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱ
Š—ȱŠ—¢ȱ’–ŽȱŠȱ’ĞȱŒŽ›’ęŒŠŽȱœŽŠ›Œ‘ȱ’œȱžœŽȱŠœȱ™Š¢–Ž—ǰȱ’ȱ’œȱ›ŠŒ”Žȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱŒ•˜œŽ˜žȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱŠœȱŠȱ’Ğȱ
Ž›’ęŒŠŽȱ™Š¢–Ž—ȱ–Ž‘˜ǯȱ
˜ȱœŽ••ȱŠȱ’ĞȱŒŽ›’ęŒŠŽǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ’Ğœȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱž—Ž›ȱ‘ŽȱŒ’˜—œȱŽ—žǰȱŠ—ȱ‘Ž—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ›ŽŽ—ȱ
Š››˜ ȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ’ĞȱŽ›’ęŒŠŽȱ•’—Žǯȱȱ™˜™ž™ȱ ’••ȱŠ™™ŽŠ›ȱ˜ȱŽ—Ž›ȱ‘ŽȱŽ›’ęŒŠŽȱ—˜›–Š’˜—ǯȱ—Ž›ȱ
an account number of your preference (usually the serial number is a unique number listed on
™›Ž™›’—Žȱ™Š™Ž›ȱŒŽ›’ęŒŠŽœǼȱŠ—ȱ‘Ž—ȱŠ—ȱŠ–˜ž—ǯȱ‘Žȱ˜•ȱ˜›ȱŠ—ȱ˜ŽœȱꎕœȱŠ›Žȱ˜™’˜—Š•ǯȱȱ¢˜žȱ
‘ŠŸŽȱœŽȱž™ȱ’ĞȱŽ›’ęŒŠŽȱ¢™ŽœǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ¢™Žȱ›˜–ȱ‘Žȱ›˜™ȱ˜ —ȱ–Ž—žȱ(Setup Tab ĺ Payment
Methods ĺȱ˜’¢ȱ’ĞȱŽ›’ęŒŠŽȱ¢™ŽœǼǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ˜—’—žŽȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱȃŽœȄȱ˜ȱŒ›ŽŠŽȱŠȱ—Ž ȱ
ŠŒŒ˜ž—ȱŠ—ȱžœŽǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŠ¢ȱ˜ ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱŒ˜–™•ŽŽȱ‘ŽȱœŠ•Žǯȱȱ‘ŽȱŠŒŒ˜ž—ȱŠ•›ŽŠ¢ȱŽ¡’œœǰȱ’ȱ ’••ȱ
Šȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ‹Š•Š—ŒŽȱ ‘Ž—ȱ‘ŽȱœŠ•Žȱꗒœ‘Žœǯȱ’ĞȱŒŽ›’ęŒŠŽœȱŠ›Žȱ—˜ȱ˜›ȱ’ĞȱŒŠ›ȱœŠ•Žœǯ
200
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Gift Card Sales
Check-Out Screen ĺ Gift ĺ Gift Card
’ž›ŽȱŗŝŗȱȬȱ‘ŽŒ”ȬžȱŒ›ŽŽ—ȱ’‘ȱœœžŽȱ’ĞȱŠ›ȱ›˜–™
To sell a Gift Card, start a new ticket (can be a regular sales ticket or a Quick sale). Select the Gifts
button under the Actions Menu, and then select the green arrow on the Gift Card item. The swipe
screen will appear.
Swipe or enter the card information and enter a dollar amount. Select the Process button. The card
will be loaded with the amount you entered.
ȱŠ—¢ȱ˜‘Ž›ȱ’Ž–œȱŠ—ȱ™›˜ŒŽŽȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱŠ¢–Ž—ȱŒ›ŽŽ—ǯȱ‘Žȱ›Š—œŠŒ’˜—ȱ’œȱŒ˜–™•ŽŽȱ“žœȱ•’”ŽȱŠ—¢ȱ
other sale and customer can pay with any payment type you accept.
201
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Multi-Ticket Sales
Check-Out Screen ĺ Edit Ticket ĺ Add Ticket
’ž›ŽȱŗŝŘȱȬȱCreatingȱž•’Ȭ’Œ”ŽȱŠ•Žœ
You can Check-Out a family or group together. Select the CheckOut button (right arrow) on the first ticket then at the Check-Out
screen select the Add Ticket button under the Actions Menu and
then select a ticket to add from the popup screen.
All tickets in Waiting or Servicing are displayed in the popup.
If you make a mistake and add the wrong ticket, highlight the
ticket and select the Remove button.
When the tickets are ready to be paid, select the Pay Now button
and complete the sale. The Payment Receipt will list the tickets
paid at the top of the receipt and any tickets not finished yet will ’ž›ŽȱŗŝřȱȬȱAdding a Ticket to
Create a
be marked Paid Multi-Ticket.
Multi-Ticket
202
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Customer Refunds
Check-Out Screen ĺ Actions Menu ĺ Refund
’ž›ŽȱŗŝŚȱȬȱCreating Customer Refunds
Žž—œȱ˜›ȱ™›˜žŒœȱŠ—ȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽœȱŒŠ—ȱ‹Žȱ–ŠŽȱ’—ȱŒ˜—“ž—Œ’˜—ȱ ’‘ȱŠȱ›Žž•Š›ȱœŠ•Žȱ˜›ȱ’—Ž™Ž—Ž—•¢ǯȱ
For refund only transactions involving products, go to the Check-Out screen using the Quick Sale
button.
Select the Refund/Redo button. Then select the Refund/Redo button and choose Refund. Then select
a product by scanning or searching for the item using the search box at the top of the Check-Out
screen. Edit the price and quantity if needed. Select the green arrow next to the product to create a
refund line item. Select as many items as necessary. Select the Pay Now button.
203
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
’ž›ŽȱŗŝśȱȬȱAdditional Refund Information Popup
On the Additional Refund Information screen select the original sales person, if known, from
the drop down menu and whether to put the product back on the shelf. Complete the transaction
as normal. The option to put refunded products back on the Shelf can be enabled or disabled by
navigating to Setup Tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱĺ System ĺ Inventory ĺ Show Option to Add
Returns to Inventory.
˜›ȱ›Žž—œȱžœ’—ȱ’—Ž›ŠŽȱŒ›Ž’ȱŒŠ›ȱ™›˜ŒŽœœ’—ǰȱŒ•’Œ”ȱ‘ŽȱŒ›Ž’ȱŒŠ›ȱ™Š¢–Ž—ȱ¢™Žȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱŠ—ȱ
enter the amount of the refund as a negative number. Credit card transactions entered as a negative
Š–˜ž—ȱ™›˜ŒŽœœȱŠœȱŠȱŒ›Ž’ȱǻ›Žž—Ǽȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱŒŠ›ǯȱ˜›ȱŽ¡Š–™•ŽDZȱȱ‘Žȱ˜Š•ȱŠ–˜ž—ȱ˜ȱ‹Žȱ›Žž—Žȱ˜ȱŠȱ
credit card is $10.00, the entry would be -10.00.
Refunds can also be performed on services, but it is recommended to create a new ticket for these
›Š—œŠŒ’˜—œȱœ˜ȱ¢˜žȱŒŠ—ȱ”ŽŽ™ȱ›ŠŒ”ȱ˜ȱž—œŠ’œęŽȱŒžœ˜–Ž›œǯȱȱ¢˜ž›ȱ•˜ŒŠ’˜—ȱ˜Žœȱ—˜ȱžœŽȱ‘Žȱ
Customer Database or there is no need to keep a record of customers who had services refunded,
then using Quick Sale can be a quicker way to enter these tickets into the system.
’ž›ŽȱŗŝŜȱȬȱRefund on Payment Screen
204
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Payment Screen
Check-Out Screen ĺ Pay Now
’ž›ŽȱŗŝŝȱȬȱPayment Screen
‘ŽȱŠ¢–Ž—ȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱꛜȱœ‘˜ œȱ¢˜žȱ‘Žȱ˜Š•ȱžŽǯȱ˜žȱŒŠ—ȱ‘Ž—ȱŠŒŒŽ™ȱŠ—¢ȱŒ˜–‹’—Š’˜—ȱ˜ȱŒŠœ‘ǰȱ
Œ‘ŽŒ”ǰȱŒ›Ž’ǰȱŽŒǯȱ’–™•¢ȱŽ—Ž›ȱ’—ȱ‘ŽȱŠ–˜ž—ȱŠ—ȱ‘Ž—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ™Š¢–Ž—ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ‘ŠȱŒ˜››Žœ™˜—œȱ
to the type of payment you are receiving. The arrow keys on your keyboard can be used to scroll
through the payment types, hit the Enter key on your keyboard to select. More than one payment
type may be used.
(For instructions on the payment process using integrated credit card processing, see “Integrated
Credit Card Processing” on page 207).
ȱ¢˜žȱ–Š”ŽȱŠȱ–’œŠ”Žǰȱ¢˜žȱŒŠ—ȱž—˜ȱ‘Žȱ•ŠœȱŽ—›¢ȱ‹¢ȱœŽ•ŽŒ’—ȱ‘Žȱ˜’ȱ•ŠœȱŠ¢–Ž—ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ‘Ž—ȱ
you have added the last payment type, select Ring Out. The receipt will print out, the cash drawer
will open, and if Employee Tip Tracking is enabled (Setup Tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱĺ Sales ĺ Tips
ĺ Track Employee Tips)ȱ‘Žȱ’™ȱ›ŠŒ”’—ȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱ ’••ȱŠ™™ŽŠ›ǯȱ‘Žȱ’—ȱžȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ ’••ȱŒ‘Š—Žȱ˜ȱ
˜–™•ŽŽȱŠ•Žǯȱ‘Ž—ȱ¢˜žȱŠ›Žȱ˜—Žȱ ’‘ȱ‘Žȱ›Š—œŠŒ’˜—ǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ˜–™•ŽŽȱŠ•Žȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯ
205
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
If a lot of your clientele pay with cash, you can set this payment type (or any other) to be the default
auto-selected payment (Setup Tab ĺ Payment Methods ĺ Autoselect top payment during ring out).
When a payment is made, simply enter the amount and hit the enter key. It will automatically use the
top payment type.
Payment Screen Tip Allocation
’ž›ŽȱŗŝŞȱȬȱPayment Screen Tip Allocation
—Ž›ȱ‘ŽȱŠ–˜ž—ȱ™Š’ǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ™Š¢–Ž—ȱ–Ž‘˜ǰȱŠ—ȱ‘Ž—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ’—ȱžȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯ
—ȱ‘Žȱ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ’™œȱ™˜™ž™ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱŽŽ™ȱ‘Žȱ‘Š—Žȱ˜›ȱŽ—Ž›ȱŠȱ’쎛Ž—ȱŠ–˜ž—ǯ
˜ȱœ™•’ȱ‘Žȱ’™œȱ ’‘ȱ˜‘Ž›ȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽœǰȱŽ—Ž›ȱ™Š›ȱ˜ȱ‘Ž’›ȱ—Š–Žȱ’—ȱ‘Žȱ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱŽŠ›Œ‘ȱꎕǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱ
the employee then select Keep the Change or enter an amount. Tips can be split evenly by selecting
™•’ȱ’™œǯȱ‘Žȱ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ’™œȱ™˜™ž™ȱŒŠ—ȱŽ—Š‹•Žȱ˜›ȱ’œŠ‹•Žȱ’—ȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱ(Setup Tab ĺ
˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱĺ Sales Tips ĺ Track Employee Tips).
Ž•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ˜—’—žŽȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ‘Ž—ȱ˜–™•ŽŽȱŠ•Žǯȱ‘ŽȱŠ¢–Ž—ȱŽŒŽ’™ȱœ‘˜ œȱ‘ŽȱŠ–˜ž—ȱ™Š’ǰȱ
amount due, net products and service, and taxes along with any change due. To change Receipt
printer options go to the Setup Tab ĺ Receipt Printer ĺ Options.
‘˜˜œŽȱ‘Žȱ˜’ȱŠœȱŠ¢–Ž—ȱŠ—ȱŠŒ”ȱ‹žĴ˜—œȱ˜ȱŒ‘Š—ŽȱŠȱ™Š¢–Ž—ȱ¢™Žȱ˜›ȱ–˜ŸŽȱ‹ŠŒ”ȱŠȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯȱ˜ȱ
Œ˜–™•ŽŽȱ‘Žȱ›Š—œŠŒ’˜—ȱŠ—ȱ›Žž›—ȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱŠ’ȦŽ›ŸŽȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ’—ȱžȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯ
206
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Integrated Credit Card Processing
If your SuperSalon software is configured to run integrated credit card processing, the transaction
sequence is slightly different.
After the payment amount is entered and a credit card type is selected, the screen changes and
prompts for a card swipe. Swipe or enter the card information manually and select the Process
button. The screen will then prompt for a tip amount. The merchant copy of the credit card receipt
will print with a place for the customer to enter a tip, if desired, and sign. The customer gives the
signed receipt back and the amount entered on the tip line is entered into the tip box on the screen.
The tip box must have a value entered, if there is no tip, enter a zero. Select Process Transaction, you
will be prompted to confirm the transaction total. If correct, select “OK” and the transaction will
process. Select the Ring Out button to assign the tip and complete the sale.
’ž›ŽȱŗŝşȱȬȱStandard Credit Card
Prompt
’ž›ŽȱŗŞŖȱȬȱMonetra Credit Card Prompt
207
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Gift Certificate Redemption
To redeem a gift certificate, select the Gift button
on the Payment screen. Enter the account number
and change the amount if desired. The Gift account
balance is shown. Select the Use Account button
and the payment is shown on the Payment Receipt
as Payment – Gift. A note is placed at the bottom of
the Payment screen noting the gift certificate was
successfully used along with the new balance.
’ž›ŽȱŗŞŗȱȬȱ’ĞȱŽ›’ęŒŠŽȱ—˜›–Š’˜—ȱ›˜–™
If a customer attempts to pay with a gift certificate
and SuperSalon cannot find the account, you
will be prompted to allow the transaction and
add the account. This override is there in case the
certificate was purchased elsewhere. Information
about gift certificates can also be viewed under the
customer history and under the Reports Tab.
’ž›ŽȱŗŞŘȱȬȱ’ĞȱŽ›’ęŒŠŽȱ—˜›–Š’˜—ȱ
Prompt (Account Found)
208
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Using Gift Card for Payment
Gift cards must be enabled and configured under the Setup tab. Gift cards are issued and activated
in the Card Terminal under the Manager Tab (Manager Tab ĺ Card Terminal).
If the customer is using a gift card for payment, select the Gift button for the Payment Method. The
Swipe Card box will pop up. Swipe the gift card (you can also hand-key the card number if no card
reader is available or if the card is unreadable), enter the payment amount, and select the Process
button. The system will ask you to confirm. Confirm the information entered is correct and select the
Confirm button. The system will then process the transaction as it would any other sale
To check the balance on a gift card see page 178.
’ž›ŽȱŗŞřȱȬȱ’ȱŠ›ȱ ’™ŽȱŠ¢–Ž—
Once the system has processed the transaction, the Payment Screen will confirm that the amount
was successfully added to the sale and show any amount remaining on the card. Select the Ring Out
button to complete the sale.
If the balance on the card is insufficient it will only apply the available amount. Another payment
method can be used for the balance.
209
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Performing a Quick Sale
Sales Tab ĺ (Q) Quick Sale
’ž›ŽȱŗŞŚȱȬȱQuick Sale
Some locations may wish to use SuperSalonȱŠœȱŠȱ‘ŽŒ”Ȭžȱ—•¢ȱœ¢œŽ–ǯȱ‘’œȱ–Ž‘˜ȱ˜ěŽ›œȱ–žŒ‘ȱ
less management of data, but is quick and easy, especially for busier locations.
To operate this way, do not check in new customers, instead we recommend using a sign-in sheet or
paper tickets to keep track of who is next in line. The only interaction with the computer is to ring-out
completed customers.
If a customer is only purchasing a product or you do not wish to track waiting and servicing
’—˜›–Š’˜—ǰȱžœŽȱ‘Žȱž’Œ”ȱŠ•Žȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ’—ŒŽȱ™›˜žŒȱ˜—•¢ȱŒžœ˜–Ž›œȱ˜ȱ—˜ȱ—ŽŽȱŠ—¢ȱ Š’’—ȱ˜›ȱ
servicing tracking, they should always be treated as Check-Out Only customers.
‘Ž—ȱŠȱŒžœ˜–Ž›ȱ’œȱ›ŽŠ¢ȱ˜ȱ›’—ȱ˜žǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱž’Œ”ȱŠ•Žȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱŠ—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ
who will be assigned commission for the sale, then enter the customer information and Save.
ž’Œ”ȱŠ•ŽȱŽ–˜›Š™‘’ŒœȱŒŠ—ȱ‹Žȱž›—Žȱ˜—ȱ˜›ȱ˜ěȱž—Ž›ȱ‘ŽȱŽž™ȱŠ‹ȱ(Setup Tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›Žȱ
ŽĴ’—œȱȱŠ›”Ž’—ȱĺ Customer Lookup & Tracking ĺ Tracking Options ĺ Require Quick Sales
Demographics). A ticket is created and you will go directly to the Check-Out screen where you can
add products and discounts.
Now that you have bypassed that Check In and Serve Next functions, you can complete the sales as
you would in the Check-Out process.
Tip: Any customer who is purchasing products only (no services)
should be rung out using Quick Sale. This is because there is no need
to track wait time, service time, etc.
Quick Sale Multi-Ticket
To make a multi-ticket sale using Quick Sale tickets, select the Quick Sale button and make the first
ticket. It will appear in the Check-Out screen ready to ring out. Now, select the Quick Sale button
again, and create another ticket. It will be added to the Check-Out screen as a multi-ticket. Complete
the sale as described in the Check-Out process in the prior section.
Quick Sale Pre-Pay
For obvious reasons, you cannot “Prepay” a Quick Sale, as Quick Sales are only entered at the time of
payment. For this reason there is no need to Pre Pay.
210
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Quick Sale Wait Time and Service Time
The service time and wait time are set to zero and removed from the various averaging calculations.
This was designed to minimize the effects on the average cut times, service times, and time
between cuts for salons that use both Check-In and Check-Out only methods, and who wish to have
meaningful timing data.
211
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Voiding Tickets
Sales Tab ĺ Select Ticket ĺ Red X
’ž›ŽȱŗŞśȱȬȱVoiding a Ticket
If for some reason you need to void
a ticket, select the red X on the ticket
and then choose a void reason from
the popup menu. Void reasons
can be added to the void screen by
entering them in the void reasons
ꎕœȱŠȱSetup Tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›Žȱ
ŽĴ’—œȱĺ Sales ĺ Tickets & Sales
ĺ Void Reasons.
Waiting tickets can be set to void
Šž˜–Š’ŒŠ••¢ȱŠĞŽ›ȱŠȱ™›ŽœŽȱŠ–˜ž—ȱ
of time; 180 minutes is the default
(Setup Tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱĺ
Sales ĺ Tickets & Sales ĺ Automatically
Ÿ˜’ȱ Š’’—ȱ’Œ”ŽœȱŠĞŽ›DZȱȃȏȄǼ.
’ž›ŽȱŗŞŜȱȬȱ˜’ȱŽŠœ˜—œ
If permissions are enabled, you will need to enter a password to void tickets (Setup Tab ĺ
Permissions).
212
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
The Appointment Tab (Appointment Screen Main View)
Appointment Tab ĺ Main Screen View
’ž›ŽȱŗŞŝȱȬȱAppointment Screen Main View
‘Žȱ™™˜’—–Ž—ȱŠ‹ȱŒŠ—ȱ‹Žȱž›—Žȱ˜ěȱ˜›ȱ Š•”Ȭ’—ȱ˜—•¢ȱœŠ•˜—œǯȱ˜ȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱSetup Tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›Žȱ
ŽĴ’—œȱĺ System ĺ Appointments ĺ Show Appointment TabǯȱЎ›ȱ’œŠ‹•’—ȱ˜›ȱŽ—Š‹•’—ȱ™›Žœœȱ
the F5 key to refresh SuperSalon.
The main view screen shows all employees scheduled to work. White blocks represent times
employees are scheduled to work. Dark Gray blocks represent unavailable times.
ȱŽ•ŽŒȱŠ—ȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ˜ȱŸ’Ž ȱ“žœȱ‘Ž’›ȱœŒ‘Žž•Žȱ˜›ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŽœ˜ž›ŒŽȱ’Ž ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱŒ›ŽŠŽȱ
Š™™˜’—–Ž—œȱ‹ŠœŽȱ˜—ȱŽœ˜ž›ŒŽœǯȱȱ
Ž•™ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ’œȱŠŸŠ’•Š‹•Žȱ˜›ȱ’—œ›žŒ’˜—œǯ
Ž•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ™’˜—œȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱ›’—ȱ’—Ž›Š›’Žœǰȱ‘ŽŒ”ȱŸŽ›‹˜˜”ǰȱŽŒǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŠ•Ž—Š›ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱŸ’Ž ȱ
‘ŽȱŒŠ•Ž—Š›ǯȱœŽȱ‘ŽȱŽŠ›Œ‘ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱœŽŠ›Œ‘ȱŠ™™˜’—–Ž—œǯ
213
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Appointment Screen Resource View
Appointment Tab ĺ Resource View
’ž›ŽȱŗŞŞȱȬȱAppointment Screen Resource View
Ž•ŽŒ’—ȱŽœ˜ž›ŒŽȱ’Ž ȱ’œ™•Š¢œȱŠ••ȱ›Žœ˜ž›ŒŽœǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ’•Ž›ȱ¢ȱŽœ˜ž›ŒŽȱŠŽ˜›¢ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜—ȱ
‘Žȱ‹˜Ĵ˜–ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ™ŠŽȱ˜ȱŸ’Ž ȱ’—’Ÿ’žŠ•ȱ›Žœ˜ž›ŒŽœȱž—Ž›ȱ‘ŽȱœŽ•ŽŒŽȱŒŠŽ˜›¢ǯȱŽœ˜ž›ŒŽœȱŠ—ȱ
resource groups are created under the Manager Tab (Manager ĺTab Resources ĺ Manage Resource
Categories or Manage Resources).
You may need to use the scroll bumpers to view all resources and times. Simply touch the bumper to
move the view in the direction of the arrow.
Select an individual resource to view only that resource’s appointments for the week.
214
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Appointment Scheduling
Appointment Tab ĺ Schedule Services
’ž›ŽȱŗŞşȱȬȱAppointment Screen
To schedule an appointment, select a time block in a
technician or resource column. Select the Block button
to black out a time the employee will not be available.
A note can be attached to the block.
To schedule a service select the Book Service button.
Select the customer using the Customer Search screen
then select the Next button.
’ž›ŽȱŗşŖȱȬȱSelecting a Service or Block
215
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
The Select Service Category popup appears. Select a category and then select a service.
’ž›ŽȱŗşŗȱȬȱSelect Service Category Popup
’ž›ŽȱŗşŘȱȬȱSelect Service Popup
The Additional Information screen pops up.
Depending on your settings you will have the
opportunity to change the duration, enter a
Request Type, and Customer Source (Setup Tab
ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱĺ System ĺ Appointments
ĺ Allow Duration To Be Edited; Track Request
Types; Track Customer Sources). Select the OK
button.
’ž›ŽȱŗşřȱȬȱAdditional Information Popup
A post booking summary will pop up if you
have this option enabled (Setup Tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›Žȱ
ŽĴ’—œȱĺ System ĺ Appointments ĺ Display
The Post Booking Summary). Select the Ok button
to finish creating the appointment.
’ž›ŽȱŗşŚȱȬȱPost Booking Summary Popup
216
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
If you choose to add a service on the post booking summary, select the Add Service button, select the
service category and service, and select the Done button. You will be returned to the Appointment
screen. You will notice a Now Booking button for the additional service. Select the time block and
employee who will perform this second service. Edit the duration, Request Type, Customer source
(if needed), and select the OK button. You will be returned to the Appointment screen. The Now
Booking button will change to show the added service and stylist who will perform the service.
Select the Done button to bring up the post booking summary again. Select the Ok button to finish
creating the appointment.
’ž›ŽȱŗşśȱȬȱAppointment Scheduling Screen (Booking Additional Services)
217
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
’ž›ŽȱŗşŜȱȬȱAppointment Screen With Request Types
—ȱŠ™™˜’—–Ž—ȱŒŠ—ȱŠ•œ˜ȱ‹ŽȱŒ›ŽŠŽȱ‹¢ȱœŽ•ŽŒ’—ȱ‘ŽȱŒ‘Žž•ŽȱŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽœȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱ˜›ȱŠȱŠȱ—Ž ȱ
Œžœ˜–Ž›ǰȱŠȱŠȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱ˜›ȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽœǰȱŠ—ȱꗒœ‘ȱŒ›ŽŠ’—ȱ‘ŽȱŠ™™˜’—–Ž—ȱŠœȱŽœŒ›’‹ŽȱŠ‹˜ŸŽǯȱ˜žȱ
ŒŠ—ȱŠ•œ˜ȱžœŽȱ‘ŽȱžŽœȱŒ‘Žž•Žœȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱŠœœ’—ȱ‘ŽȱŠ™™˜’—–Ž—ȱ˜ȱ˜—Žȱ˜›ȱ–˜›Žȱœ¢•’œǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱ
‘ŽȱžŽœȱŒ‘Žž•Žœȱ‹žĴ˜—ǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽœȱŠ—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ’–Žȱžœ’—ȱ‘ŽȱŽ•ŽŒȱ’–ŽȱŠ—Žœȱ
‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ
••ȱŠ™™˜’—–Ž—œȱŠ›ŽȱŒ˜•˜›ȱŒ˜ŽǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ
Ž•™ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱŸ’Ž ȱŠȱŒ˜•˜›ȱ•ŽŽ—ȱŠ—ȱ˜›ȱ’—œ›žŒ’˜—œȱ
on making appointments.
˜ȱœŽŠ›Œ‘ȱŠ™™˜’—–Ž—œǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŽŠ›Œ‘ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱȱ˜’¢ǰȱŠȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽœǰȱ˜›ȱŸ’Ž ȱŠ™™˜’—–Ž—ȱ
information by selecting the appointment.
Ž•ŽŒȱŠ—ȱŠ™™˜’—–Ž—ȱ˜ȱ‹›’—ȱž™ȱ‘Žȱ™™˜’—–Ž—ȱ—˜›–Š’˜—ȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱ‹žĴ˜—œȱ˜ȱŽœŒ‘Žž•Žȱ
Services, Delete Services, Make Recurring appointments, create Notes, and send the ticket to
Servicing, etc.
218
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Show Appointments from Wait/Serve Screen
Sales Tab ĺ Show Appointments
’ž›ŽȱŗşŝȱȬȱShow Appointments From Wait/Serve Screen
Ž•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ‘˜ ȱ™™˜’—–Ž—œȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱ‹›’—ȱž™ȱŠȱ•’œȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱŒž››Ž—ȱŠ¢œȱŠ™™˜’—–Ž—œǯ
When the customer arrives, select their appointment from the list to add them to Customer Waiting.
219
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
The Time Clock Tab
Select Employee Screen
’ž›ŽȱŗşŞȱȬȱTime Clock Employee Selection With Password
The initial clock in screen can be set to require a password or not (Setup Tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱĺ
System ĺ Time Clock & Scheduling ĺ Require Password for Clock In/Out). Passwords are entered
on the Employee setup screen (Manager Tab ĺ Employees ĺ Employee ĺ General Information ĺ
Password).
To punch in and out, select the Time Clock tab. Select your name from the employee list or enter your
employee ID number and enter your password if required to open he Clock in & Out screen.
If a name is not listed in the employee list, go to Manager Tab ĺ Employees. Check the employee list
to see if their name is listed as an Active Employee. If they are not under Active Employees, check
‘Žȱ’—ŠŒ’ŸŽȱ•’œǯȱȱ‘Ž¢ȱŠ›Žȱ—˜ȱ•’œŽǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱȱŽ ȱ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ‹žĴ˜—ǰȱŠ—ȱŽ—Ž›ȱ‘ŽȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȂœȱ
’—˜›–Š’˜—ǯȱŠ”Žȱœž›Žȱ¢˜žȱŽ—Ž›ȱ‘Ž’›ȱꛜȱŠ—ȱ•Šœȱ—Š–ŽǰȱŠ—ȱ‘Šȱ¢˜žȱŒ‘ŽŒ”ȱ‘Žȱ‹˜¡ȱž—Ž›ȱ
“Performs Services?” if they are a production technician. Select Save when completed. If they are
listed as an Inactive Employee they will not show on the Time Clock either.
220
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Clock In & Out Screen
Time Clock Tab ĺ Select Employee
’ž›ŽȱŗşşȱȬȱDefault Schedule Time Clock Punch In & Out Screen
There are several options for the Clock In and Out screen (Setup Tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱĺ System
ĺ Time Clock & Scheduling ĺ Disable Time Clock Reports; Only Show Employee Position In
Time Clock; Schedule Based Time Clock; Default Schedule Screen; Amount Of Time ĺ Allowed
To Schedule Outside Store Hours)ǯȱ˜ȱŒ•˜Œ”ȱ’—ǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜›ȱ‘Žȱ™˜œ’’˜—ȱ¢˜žȱŠ›Žȱ ˜›”’—ǯȱ
˜œ’’˜—œȱŠ›ŽȱœŽȱž™ȱž—Ž›ȱ‘ŽȱŽž™ȱŠ‹ǯȱ‘ŽȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱœŒ‘Žž•Žȱ’œȱŠ•œ˜ȱ•’œŽȱŠȱ‘Žȱ‹˜Ĵ˜–ȱŠ—ȱŒŠ—ȱ
‹Žȱ™›’—Žȱ‹¢ȱœŽ•ŽŒ’—ȱ‘Žȱ›’—ȱŒ‘Žž•Žȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯ
˜ȱ™ž—Œ‘ȱ˜žǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ’–ŽȱŒ•˜Œ”ȱŠ‹ȱŠ—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ•˜Œ”ȱžȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ˜–Ž’–Žœȱ’ȱ’œȱžœŽž•ȱ˜ȱ
punch in and out during the day as positions are changed to make it easier to keep track of pay for
’쎛Ž—ȱ™˜œ’’˜—œȱ ˜›”Žǯȱ‘’œȱŠ•œ˜ȱ”ŽŽ™œȱ™›˜žŒ’˜—ȱ—ž–‹Ž›œȱ›˜–ȱ•˜ Ž›’—ȱ ‘Ž—ȱœ¢•’œœȱ˜ȱ˜ěȱ
‘Žȱ̘˜›ȱ ˜›”ȱœžŒ‘ȱŠœȱ’—ŸŽ—˜›¢ǯȱ
221
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Tips can be added at the end of the day or week on this screen. The Today’s Tips number will show
Š—¢ȱ’™œȱŠ•›ŽŠ¢ȱŠŽȱŽ’‘Ž›ȱ˜—ȱ‘’œȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱ˜›ȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ‘ŽŒ”ȬžȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯȱ‘Žȱ’™œȱ“žœȱ’Ž•ȱŒŠ—ȱ‹Žȱ
turned on or off by navigating to Setup Tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱĺ Sales ĺ Tips ĺȱ’™ȱ“žœ–Ž—œȱ
On Time Clock.
Mini-Reports can be printed on the receipt printer. The Mini Production and Mini Itemize Reports
can be disabled by navigating to Setup Tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱĺ System ĺ Time Clock &
Scheduling ĺ Disable Time Clock Reports.
The Clock In and Out screen can also be set to show in Schedule View (Setup Tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›Žȱ
ŽĴ’—œȱĺ System ĺ Time Clock & Scheduling Schedule Based Time Clock).
’ž›ŽȱŘŖŖȱȬȱSchedule Based Time Clock
222
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Editing and Adjusting Time Clock Entries
Reports Tab ĺ Payroll ĺ Timecard or Payroll
‘Žȱ’–ŽȱŒ•˜Œ”ȱŠ“žœ–Ž—ȱŽŠž›ŽœȱŒŠ—ȱ‹ŽȱŠŒŒŽœœŽȱ‘›˜ž‘ȱ‘ŽȱŽ™˜›œȱŠ‹ȱ˜—ȱ‘ŽȱŠ¢›˜••ȱ›Ž™˜›œȱǭȱ
Time Card reports.
To access the Timecard Report through the Payroll reports go to the Reports Tab ĺ Payroll ĺ
Payroll, select a date range and select Generate Report. The Payroll Report will appear. On the Payroll
Ž™˜›ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ ‘˜œŽȱ’–Žȱ¢˜žȱ ’œ‘ȱ˜ȱŽ’ȱ˜›ȱŠ“žœǯȱ‘Ž’›ȱ’–ŽŒŠ›ȱŽ™˜›ȱ ’••ȱŠ™™ŽŠ›ǯ
’ž›ŽȱŘŖŗȱȬȱŠ¢›˜••ȱŽ™˜›ȱǻ“žœ’—ȱ’–ŽȱŠ›œǼ
Another way to access the Timecard Report is to go to the Reports Tab ĺ Payroll ĺ Timecard, select
a date range and select Generate Report. The Timecard Report will appear listing all employees.
Ž•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ ‘˜œŽȱ’–Žȱ¢˜žȱ ’œ‘ȱ˜ȱŽ’ȱ˜›ȱŠ“žœǯȱ‘Ž’›ȱ’–ŽŒŠ›ȱŽ™˜›ȱ ’••ȱŠ™™ŽŠ›ǯ
’ž›ŽȱŘŖŘȱȬȱ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ’–ŽŒŠ›ȱŽ™˜›ȱǻ“žœ’—ȱ’–ŽȱŠ›œǼ
‘Žȱ’–ŽȱŒŠ›ȱŠ“žœ–Ž—ȱ’œȱŸŽ›¢ȱŠœǯȱ••ȱŠ¢œȱ’—ȱ‘Žȱ™Š¢ȱ™Ž›’˜ȱŠ›Žȱ•’œŽǯȱ˜žȱŒŠ—ȱšž’Œ”•¢ȱŽ’ȱŠ—ȱ
Ž—›¢ȱŠ—ȱ˜ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ—Ž¡ǯȱ‘’œȱ’œȱŠȱŸŽ›¢ȱŽĜŒ’Ž—ȱ Š¢ȱ˜ȱę¡ȱ’–ŽȱŒŠ›ȱŽ››˜›œȱ™›’˜›ȱ˜ȱ™Š¢ȱŠ¢ǯ
Permissions can be set to deny access to these reports. This method allows protection from employee
tampering.
223
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
If an employee forgets to punch in or punch out, a red line indicates an error. Select the line to pull up
‘Žȱ’–ŽŒ•˜Œ”ȱ“žœ–Ž—ȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯȱ‘Žȱ‘Ž•™Ž›ȱ ’••ȱ’œ™•Š¢ȱ‘ŽȱŒ•˜œŽœȱ’–Žȱ™˜œœ’‹•Žȱ˜ȱ ‘Šȱ‘ŽȱŠŒžŠ•ȱ
punch in or punch out time would have been.
’ž›ŽȱŘŖřȱȬȱTimecard Report Helper
Tip:ȱ‘Žȱ’–ŽŒ•˜Œ”ȱ“žœ–Ž—ȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱ‘Šœȱ–Š—¢ȱŽŠž›Žœǯȱȱ
‘Ž•™Ž›ȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ȱœ‘˜ œȱ ‘Ž—ȱŠ—ȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȂœȱꛜȱ’—Ž›ŠŒ’˜—ȱŠ—ȱ•Šœȱ
transaction occurred. This is very helpful if they forget to punch
in or out, or if you suspect that they are staying on the clock too
long. On this screen you can edit existing entries (times or position
˜›”ŽǼȱŠ—ȱ¢˜žȱŒŠ—ȱŠȱ—Ž ȱŽ—›’Žœǯȱ˜žȱŒŠ—ȱŠ•œ˜ȱŠ“žœȱěȱ
Floor Hours as well as add Additional Bonus Amounts.
’ž›ŽȱŘŖŚȱȬȱ’–ŽŒ•˜Œ”ȱ“žœ–Ž—ȱŒ›ŽŽ—
224
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
The Scheduler Tab (Employee Scheduler)
Scheduler Tab ĺ Employee Time Block
’ž›ŽȱŘŖśȱȬȱCreating a Schedule
The Scheduler tab can be turned on or off by going to Setup Tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱĺ System ĺ
General ĺ Show Scheduler Tab. After disabling or enabling, press the F5 key to refresh SuperSalon.
If disabled, it will still be available at Manager Tab ĺ Employees ĺ Employee Scheduler. The
default view of the Scheduler can be set to be Day View or Week View by navigating to Setup Tab ĺ
˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱĺ System ĺ Time Clock & Scheduling ĺ Default Schedule View.
You can use the Edit Notes button to add notes to the employee’s schedule. Click anywhere under the
Employee’s name to view the notes.
To schedule an employee, select the box that corresponds to the start time. The Employee Schedule
Editor pops up. Select the Add Sched button.
225
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
’ž›ŽȱŘŖŜȱȬȱEmployee Schedule Editor
“žœȱ‘Žȱ’–ŽȱŠœȱ—ŽŽŽȱ‹¢ȱŽ—Ž›’—ȱ˜›ȱžœ’—ȱ‘Žȱ•ŽĞȱ˜›ȱ›’‘ȱŠ››˜ œȱŠœȱ—ŽŽŽǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŠŸŽȱ
‘Š—Žœȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱœŠŸŽǯȱ˜Ÿ’—ȱ‘Žȱȃ—Ȅȱ‘˜ž›œȱŠ“žœœȱ‘ŽȱŽ—’›Žȱ‹•˜Œ”ǯȱ˜Ÿ’—ȱ‘ŽȱȃžȄȱ‘˜ž›œȱ
˜—•¢ȱŠ“žœœȱ‘Žȱ˜žȱ’–Žǯ
œŽȱ‘Žȱ’ȱŒ‘Žȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱŒ‘Š—ŽȱŠ—ȱŽ¡’œ’—ȱœŒ‘Žž•ŽǯȱœŽȱ‘Žȱȱ•˜Œ”ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱŠȱ‹•˜Œ”œȱ
of time that will show on the Appointment screen. For example, the employee could have a doctor’s
appointment and you want to make sure no one schedules an appointment during that time. Use the
ȱ•˜Œ”ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱŽ—Ž›ȱ‘Žȱ’–ŽȱŠ—ȱ›ŽŠœ˜—ǯ
SuperSalon assumes you will only be scheduling employees within store hours. If you would like
to enable the ability to schedule outside of store hours, navigate to Setup Tab ĺȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œȱĺ
System ĺ Time Clock & Scheduling ĺ Amount Of Time Allowed To Schedule Outside Store Hours
and enter the time allowed in minutes.
226
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
’ž›ŽȱŘŖŝȱȬȱEmployee Scheduler Week View
ȱŠ••ȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽœȱ ˜—Ȃȱęȱ˜—ȱ‘ŽȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǰȱžœŽȱ‘Žȱ›ŽŸȱ–™•˜¢ŽŽœȱŠ—ȱŽ¡ȱ–™•˜¢ŽŽœȱ‹žĴ˜—œȱ˜ȱŸ’Ž ȱ
more employees.
œŽȱ‘ŽȱŠ•Ž—Š›ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜ȱ˜ȱ˜ȱŠȱ’쎛Ž—ȱŠ¢ȱ˜›ȱžœŽȱ‘ŽȱƸŗȱŠ¢ȱŠ—ȱȬŗŠ¢ȱ‹žĴ˜—œȱ˜ȱ–˜ŸŽȱ“žœȱ˜—Žȱ
Š¢ǯȱ‘Žȱ˜Š¢ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ ’••ȱŠ• Š¢œȱ‹›’—ȱ¢˜žȱ‹ŠŒ”ȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱŒž››Ž—ȱŠ¢
Ž•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ™’˜—œȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜—ȱ‘ŽȱŠ¢ȱ’Ž ȱŒ‘Žž•Ž›ȱ˜ȱŽŠ›Œ‘ǰȱ’Ž ȱ˜›ȱ˜™¢ȱ••ȱœŒ‘Žž•Žœǯȱ
Choosing Copy All allows you to copy all the schedules for up to 12 weeks or 12 months. Use the
˜™¢ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ˜—ȱ‘ŽȱŽŽ”ȱ’Ž ȱ˜ȱŒ˜™¢ǯȱ
You can also create a schedule for individual employees by selecting their name to bring up a week
view.
227
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
The Messages Tab
Messages Tab Main Screen
’ž›ŽȱŘŖŞȱȬȱMessages Tab Main Screen
‘ŽȱŽœœŠŽȱŠ‹ȱŠ••˜ œȱ¢˜žȱ˜ȱœŽ—ȱŠȱ–ŽœœŠŽȱ‹Ž ŽŽ—ȱ‘ŽȱœŠ•˜—ȱȱœ¢œŽ–ȱŠ—ȱ¢˜ž›ȱȬĜŒŽȱ
account. Messages are sent and received each time an upload takes place. The main screen lists any
messages you have received.
Messages can be sent directly individuals, groups of individuals, and to multiple stores. You can also
set messages to be required reading. If messages are set to required, the employee will not be able to
clock in or out until the message is read.
228
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
’ž›ŽȱŘŖşȱȬȱŽœœŠŽœȱŒ›ŽŽ—ȱ’—ȱȬĜŒŽȱǻ—Ž›ȱ‘ŽȱŽž™ȱŠ‹ȱ’—ȱȬĜŒŽǼ
Messages sent to individuals or position groups will show on the Time Clock screen.
229
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
’ž›ŽȱŘŗŖȱȬȱMessage Waiting on Time Clock Screen
˜ȱ›Ž™•¢ȱ˜ȱŠȱ–ŽœœŠŽȱ“žœȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ–ŽœœŠŽȱŠ—ȱŒ‘˜˜œŽȱ‘ŽȱŽ™•¢ȱ˜›ȱŽ™•¢ȱ˜ȱ••ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ—Ž›ȱ¢˜ž›ȱ
message and select Ok.
ȱœŽ—’—ȱŠȱ–ŽœœŠŽȱ›˜–ȱ‘ŽȱŽœœŠŽȱŠ‹ǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŽ ȱŽœœŠŽȱ‹žĴ˜—ǰȱŽ—Ž›ȱŠȱœž‹“ŽŒǰȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ
›ŽŒ’™’Ž—ǰȱŠ—ȱ‘Ž—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ
Your message will be sent with the next upload.
230
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
The Reports Tab
Reports Tab Main Menu
’ž›ŽȱŘŗŗȱȬȱReports Main Menu
‘Ž—ȱ¢˜žȱœŽ•ŽŒȱŠȱŒŠŽ˜›¢ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱŠȱœž‹Ȭ–Ž—žȱ˜›ȱ‘ŠȱŒŠŽ˜›¢ȱ ’••ȱ˜™Ž—ǯȱ••ȱ›Ž™˜›œȱŒŠ—ȱ‹Žȱ™›’—Žȱ
on a conventional printer except the Mini-Reports which are designed to print out of a receipt printer.
Almost all of the data entered into the system can be retrieved via one of the many reports
SuperSalon has built in to assist with the management of your business. Reports can be used
˜ȱŒ‘ŽŒ”ȱ¢˜ž›ȱ’—ŸŽ—˜›¢ȱŒ˜ž—œǰȱ‘Š—•Žȱ™Š¢›˜••ǰȱꗍȱ˜žȱ ‘’Œ‘ȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽœȱ˜›ȱ™›˜žŒœȱŠ›ŽȱœŽ••’—ȱ
–˜›Žȱ‘Š—ȱ˜‘Ž›œǰȱŒ˜–™Š›ŽȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ™Ž›˜›–Š—ŒŽȱ›Žœž•œǰȱŠ—ȱŽŸŽ—ȱ˜ȱꗍȱ˜žȱ ‘ŠȱŒžœ˜–Ž›ȱ
demographic visits your location the most.
In order to ensure accurate data is presented, it is important to make sure that the system has been
set up properly following the instructions outlined elsewhere in the manual.
231
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Reports Sub-Menus
Reports Tab ĺ Select Category
’ž›ŽȱŘŗŘȱȬȱReports Sub-Menus
ŠŒ‘ȱŒŠŽ˜›¢ȱ‘Šœȱœž‹Ȭ–Ž—žœȱ ’‘ȱ›Ž™˜›œȱ‘Šȱ™Ž›Š’—ȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱŒŠŽ˜›¢ǯȱŽ•ŽŒȱ‘ŽȱŒŠŽ˜›¢ȱꛜȱŠ—ȱ
‘Ž—ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱ‘Žȱ›Ž™˜›ȱ ’‘ȱŠ—¢ȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱŠŸŠ’•Š‹•Žȱ–˜’ꎛœȱ˜ȱ‹›’—ȱž™ȱ‘Žȱ’—˜›–Š’˜—ȱ›ŽšžŽœŽǯ
Due to the large number of reports available in SuperSalon, there may be some that overlap in
ž—Œ’˜—Š•’¢ǯȱ¡ŒŽ™ȱ’—ȱŒ’›Œž–œŠ—ŒŽœȱ ‘Ž›Žȱ‘Žȱ›Ž™˜›ȱœ™ŽŒ’ęŒŠ••¢ȱŠ••˜ œȱ¢˜žȱ˜ȱ˜ȱ˜‘Ž› ’œŽǰȱŠ••ȱ˜ȱ
‘Žȱꐞ›ŽœȱǻœžŒ‘ȱŠœȱŽȱŠ—ȱ›˜œœǼȱ™›ŽœŽ—Žȱ’—ȱ‘Žȱ›Ž™˜›œȱŠ›ŽȱŒŠ•Œž•ŠŽȱ‘ŽȱœŠ–Žȱ Š¢ǯȱ
232
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Report Terminology
A Listing of the Different Terms Used and Their Meanings
While SuperSalonȱ‘ŠœȱŠȱœ’—’ęŒŠ—ȱ—ž–‹Ž›ȱ˜ȱ›Ž™˜›œȱŠŸŠ’•Š‹•Žǰȱ–˜œȱ˜ȱ‘Ž–ȱŒ˜—Š’—ȱ‘ŽȱœŠ–Žȱ
‹Šœ’Œȱ’—˜›–Š’˜—ȱ˜›ȱŸŠ›’Š’˜—ȱ‘Ž›Ž˜ǯȱ‘Žȱ–Š“˜›ȱ’쎛Ž—ŒŽœȱ‹Ž ŽŽ—ȱ‘Žȱ›Ž™˜›œȱ’œȱ–˜œ•¢ȱŒ˜œ–Ž’Œǰȱ
˜›ȱ’—ȱ˜‘Ž›ȱ ˜›œǰȱ‘˜ ȱ‘Žȱ’—˜›–Š’˜—ȱ’œȱ™›ŽœŽ—ŽȱŠ—ȱ ‘ŠȱꕝŽ›œȱŒŠ—ȱ‹ŽȱžœŽȱ˜ȱ—Š››˜ ȱ˜ —ȱ
¢˜ž›ȱœŽŠ›Œ‘Žœǯȱ‘Žȱ‹Šœ’ŒȱŒ˜–™˜—Ž—œȱ˜ȱ–˜œȱ›Ž™˜›œȱ’œȱŠœȱ˜••˜ œDZ
Average Cut Time
The Average Cut Time is calculated based off of the ticket service times. It only factors in tickets that
are sold with a service Categorize as Haircut.
Average Time Between Cuts
The Average Time Between Cuts is calculated based off of the time in between tickets that are sold
with a haircut on them.
Commission
The Commission total, usually represented as Com. on most reports, is a figure that is calculated
using a mix of the same guidelines to calculate Net and Gross. Only services or products that are
eligible for commission are included in the total and this is further affected by any discounts that are
used during the transaction as well as Non Commissionable Shop Charges.
In order to ensure that the number calculated for this total is accurate, it is important to make sure
that “Apply Discount to Sale Commission” on page 169 under Manager ĺ Discounts is configured
properly, as well as the correct discounts are used on Check-Out.
It is also important to make sure that any Non Commissionable Shop charges are set up properly
prior to sales taking place. Non Commissionable Shop charges directly subtract from the
Commission amount of a service.
Because of the nature of this field, it is not unusual for the total to fall somewhere in between Net
and Gross or even to be the same amount as either of the two other totals depending on your system
settings.
Count
‘ŽȱŒ˜ž—ȱꎕȱ’œȱžœŽȱ‘›˜ž‘˜žȱ–Š—¢ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ’쎛Ž—ȱSuperSalon reports to refer to how much
of a particular item there is. This could be anything from the number of times a discount was used
˜ȱ‘˜ ȱ–Š—¢ȱ’–ŽœȱŠȱŒŽ›Š’—ȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱ˜›ȱ™›˜žŒȱ Šœȱœ˜•ǯȱ‘’œȱꎕȱŠŠ™œȱ’œŽ•ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ›Ž™˜›ȱ’—ȱ
question when displaying it’s numerical data.
Customer Statistics
Customer Statistics include Customer Age, Gender, Source, if they’re New or Recurring, as well as
‘’Œ‘ȱ˜ěŽ›œȱŠ—ȱ›ŽšžŽœœȱ‘Ž¢ȂŸŽȱŠŒŒŽ™Žǯȱ••ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ˜Š•œȱ˜›ȱ‘ŽȱœŠ’œ’ŒœȱŠ›ŽȱŒŠ•Œž•ŠŽȱ‹ŠœŽȱ˜ěȱ
of the information entered at the time of customer creation and are only counted when the customer
is used on a ticket that completes Check-Out. In order to ensure that these statistics are accurate, it
is important to make sure that when customer data is put into the system, it is entered in accurately,
˜‘Ž› ’œŽȱ‘Žȱ˜Š•œȱ ’••ȱ‹Žȱ‘›˜ —ȱ˜ěǯ
233
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
When the Statistics are listed in the various SuperSalon reports, they are usually presented with a
count of the number of customers who fall into that category, and in some cases, the amount of Net
or Gross revenue generated from their visits. At times, this is further broken up between Net Service/
Product and Gross Service/Product.
In situations where Customer Data is not known because it was not entered, SuperSalon uses a
separate category called Unknown to display the information.
Aside from making sure that the customer database is enabled to allow the storage of customer
’—˜›–Š’˜—ǰȱœ™ŽŒ’ęŒȱœŠ’œ’ŒœȱŒŠ—ȱ‹ŽȱŽ—Š‹•Žȱ˜›ȱ’œŠ‹•Žȱž—Ž›ȱ“Customer Lookup & Tracking” on
page 83ȱ’—ȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽĴ’—œǯ
’ž›ŽȱŘŗřȱȬȱžœ˜–Ž›ȱŠ’œ’ŒœȱŠœȱœŽŽ—ȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ˜—‘•¢ȱ’—Š—Œ’Š•ȱŽ™˜›
Discounts
Reports that show discount amounts do so by looking at which discounts are applied to a service or
product at the time of Check-Out. The total amount subtracted from a particular product or service
sale will then be displayed. In order to ensure that the totals represented in this column are accurate,
it is important to make sure that the discounts your location choose to use are set up properly as well
as applied correctly at the time of Check-Out.
Discounts have modifiers such as “Free Service” or “Bounce-Back” which can also be used to gather
specific data demographic data.
Gross/Net
Gross is the amount of money the location brought in before discounts are subtracted from the total.
Net is the amount of money the location brought in after discounts are subtracted from the Gross.
Both figures do not include sales tax or employee tips in their total.
When SuperSalon is reporting Net and Gross it is taking a look at the transaction data generated
from employees entering tickets into the system. Since Net and Gross are dependent on ticket
information, it is important to make sure that when checking out customers, it is done properly. A
misentered ticket could potentiality throw off the calculation resulting in bad data being reported.
SuperSalon has the ability to divide Net and Gross up between Product and Service sales. In
situations where this is occurring, the information is calculated the same way as before, except
instead of looking at all of the location’s sales data, SuperSalon confines it to revenue generated
from Product or Service sales. Since SuperSalon looks at the individual items on a ticket when
calculating this information, tickets that include both products and services will still have their
information accurately reported.
Because gift cards and certificates do not fall under either Products or Services, they are tracked
234
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
separately from the two. When a Gift Card/Certificate is sold to a customer, it will have no affect on
the either the Net or Gross for Product/Service sales. Product/Service Net and Gross will only be
affected at the time the Gift Card/Certificate is actually redeemed. It will, however, factor into the
Total Net/Gross figures.
Net Product and Gross Product refer to Net and Gross for Products.
Net Services and Gross Services refer to Net and Gross for Services.
Total Net and Total Gross is calculated by adding together Product and Service Net/Gross along with
any other extraneous sales figures such as Gift Card/Certificates and Requests.
’ž›ŽȱŘŗŚȱȬȱGross/Net, Refund, Commission, and Discounts as seen on the
Production Report
Gross/Net Services or Products an Hour
‘’œȱꐞ›Žȱ’œȱŒŠ•Œž•ŠŽȱ‹¢ȱŠ”’—ȱ‘Žȱ›˜œœȱŠ—ȱŽȱ˜Š•œȱ˜›ȱ™›˜žŒȱŠ—Ȧ˜›ȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽœȱŠ—ȱ’Ÿ’’—ȱ
’ȱ‹¢ȱ‘Žȱ˜Š•ȱ™›˜žŒ’˜—ȱ‘˜ž›œȱŠ—ȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ‘Šœǯȱ—˜‘Ž›ȱ—Š–Žȱ‘Šȱ‘’œȱꐞ›Žȱ’œȱŠ•œ˜ȱ”—˜ —ȱ‹¢ȱ’œȱ
PPH (Production Per Hour).
Haircuts
‘Žȱ
Š’›Œžȱꎕȱ’œȱŒŠ•Œž•ŠŽȱžœ’—ȱ‘Žȱ›Š—œŠŒ’˜—ȱŠŠȱ›˜–ȱ‘Žȱ’–Žȱ˜ȱ‘ŽŒ”Ȭžǯȱȱ’œȱ‘Žȱ
number of services sold that have their Category set as Haircut. Even if a service has the word
“Haircut” in it’s name, if the category is not set properly as “Haircut” it will not be counted towards
the total.
Haircuts/Hour
‘Ž—ȱ‘Žȱ˜Š•ȱ—ž–‹Ž›ȱ˜ȱ‘Š’›ŒžœȱŠ—ȱ‘˜ž›ȱ’œȱ’œ™•Š¢Žǰȱ‘’œȱꐞ›Žȱ’œȱŒŠ•Œž•ŠŽȱ‹¢ȱ’Ÿ’’—ȱ‘Žȱ
Haircut count with the Production hours for a given employee.
Non-Production/Production Hours
›˜žŒ’˜—ȱŠ—ȱ˜—Ȭ›˜žŒ’˜—ȱ‘˜ž›œȱŠ›ŽȱŒŠ•Œž•ŠŽȱ‹ŠœŽȱ˜ěȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ™˜œ’’˜—ȱžœŽȱ ‘Ž—ȱŠ—ȱ
Ž–™•˜¢ŽŽȱŒ•˜Œ”œȱ’—ǯȱȱŠ—ȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱŒ•˜Œ”œȱ’—ȱž—Ž›ȱŠȱ™˜œ’’˜—ȱ‘Šȱ’œȱ—˜ȱ̊Žȱ˜›ȱ™›˜žŒ’˜—ǰȱ‘Ž—ȱ
calculations that require production hours to complete their calculations will be incorrect.
In almost all cases, employees who perform services or sell products will want to be clocked in using
production hours while employees who focus only on administration or receptionist duties will want
˜ȱ‹ŽȱŒ•˜Œ”Žȱ’—ȱž—Ž›ȱŠȱ™˜œ’’˜—ȱ—˜ȱ̊Žȱ˜›ȱ™›˜žŒ’˜—ǯ
SuperSalon displays hours that are not considered Production as “Other Hours”. In situations
where employees have both Production Hours and Other Hours, these are combined into a third
ꎕȱ”—˜ —ȱŠœȱ˜Š•ȱ
˜ž›œǯ
Payment Methods
—ȱ›Ž™˜›œȱ‘ŠȱŽŠ•ȱ ’‘ȱ•˜œŽ˜žȱ—˜›–Š’˜—ǰȱŠȱ•’œȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ’쎛Ž—ȱ™Š¢–Ž—ȱ–Ž‘˜œȱŒ›ŽŠŽȱ’—ȱ
235
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
‘Žȱœ¢œŽ–ȱŠœȱ Ž••ȱŠœȱ‘ŽȱŠ–˜ž—ȱ‘Ž¢ȱ‘ŠŸŽȱŒ•˜œŽȱ˜žȱ ’‘ȱ ’••ȱ‹Žȱ’œ™•Š¢Žǯȱ‘Žȱꐞ›Žœȱœ‘˜ —ȱ
on these reports are directly related to the amount the location closed out with for each payment
–Ž‘˜ȱ’—ȱ‘Ž’›ȱ›Žœ™ŽŒ’ŸŽȱ’ȬŠ¢Ȧ—ȬŠ¢ȱŒ˜ž—ȱꎕœǯ
—ȱ˜›Ž›ȱ˜ȱŠœœ’œȱ ’‘ȱœ™˜Ĵ’—ȱœ’žŠ’˜—œȱ ‘Ž›Žȱ‘Žȱ•˜ŒŠ’˜—ȱŒ•˜œŽœȱ ’‘ȱ•Žœœȱ–˜—Ž¢ȱ˜›ȱ–˜›Žȱ–˜—Ž¢ȱ
’—ȱ‘Žȱ’••ȱ‘Š—ȱ‘Ž¢ȱœ‘˜ž•ǰȱŠ—ȱŸŽ›Ȧ‘˜›ȱ˜•ž–—ȱ’œȱ’œ™•Š¢ŽȱŠ••˜ ’—ȱšž’Œ”ȱŠ—ȱŽŠœ¢ȱœ™˜Ĵ’—ȱ
of discrepancies. The Over/Short Column is calculated by comparing the Total Count and Total
˜–™žŽȱꎕœȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ•˜œŽ˜žȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯ
Products Per Guest (PPG)
PPG is calculated by dividing the Net Product sales total by the Total Number of Customers to visit
the location during the date range selected.
Refund/Redo
Refund totals are calculated using the service and product information entered at the time of CheckOut. On every report where the Refund amounts are listed, this figure has already been subtracted
from the location Net and Gross totals, as well as the Commission total if applicable. There is no need
to manually subtract the totals yourself as this figure is mostly for auditing purposes.
Redo totals are calculated using the service information entered at the time of Check-Out. Redoes
vary slightly from refunds in that they are specific to service sales. When a refund is completed in
SuperSalon, the funds for the service or product are given back to the customer. When a Redo is
completed, the service is both refunded and sold back to the customer so there is no gain or loss
to the location. For auditing purposes, on reports where refunds are listed, the Refund total will
increase by the amount that was refunded to the customer without taking into account the service
that was sold back.
Reported +/- and Actual +/This field appears on certain reports as a diagnostic aid to determine whether or not the location
is uploading their information to the SuperSalon Ioffice correctly. It does so by comparing the
computed close out totals in the SuperSalon database to the ticket totals in the SuperSalon
database. In the event the two fields do not match, that usually means that the upload did not
complete correctly and it is necessary to re-save the closeout and upload again.
Requests
Requests are calculated using the service request feature. When an employee is selected as being
requested by a customer, it increases the request count for that particular employee. Because Requests
are counted as a service, they can artificially inflate your service count and even average service sales
(if your location charges for employee requests). This can be circumvented by turning off the option
that includes Requests in Service Sales (“Include Requests in Service Sales” on page 73). If this is
done, requests will be counted separately from the service totals.
Retail to Net (RTN)
Retail to net is the percentage of retail sales to total net sales. It is calculated by taking the net product
sales, dividing it by the total net (combination of product, service, gift, requests), and then multiplying
the resulting number by 100.
On the payroll report, RtN is calculated using the Product and Service Commission totals as opposed
to actual Net.
236
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Retail to Service [Net] (RtS)
Retail to Service Net is the percentage of retail sales to net service sales. It is calculated by taking the
net product sales, dividing it by the net service sales, and then multiplying the resulting number 100.
On the payroll report, RtS is calculated using the Product and Service Commission total as opposed
to true net.
Sales Per Hour (SpH)
SpH is specific to the payroll report. Whereas PPH is calculated using Net and Gross depending
on what the report is trying to accomplish, SpH is always calculated by dividing the employee
Commission total by the number of production hours worked for the given time range.
Service and Product Categories
On reports that provide a breakdown of different service and product sales based on their category,
the information is pulled from the transaction data created when a ticket has finished Check-Out.
In order to ensure that the correct categories are presented, it is important to make sure service and
product categories are set up correctly.
Ticket Average
Ticket Average, or T.A, is calculated by adding together the total of amount due for all completed
tickets during a given range and then dividing the resulting number by the amount of completed
tickets there were.
Depending on the report, modifiers can be used to provide a more thorough breakdown, such as
only giving the ticket average for male or female customers, or even only giving the average service
sale or product sale per a ticket.
Tips
Tips are calculated using the employee tip information entered at Check-Out. In order to ensure that
accurate tip data is gathered for employees, it’s important to make sure that “Track Employee Tips”
on page 75 is enabled and that employees are actually entering their tip data.
By default, any tip on a credit card transaction that is not assigned to an employee will be credited
towards house.
Voids
Reports that list the total number of voids pull the data from tickets that have been cancelled. Only
tickets that have their status set as void are counted in the calculation.
237
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Popular Reports
Reports Tab
SuperSalon has a variety of reports, most of which have been added at the request of our
customers. Because the number of reports available is easily more than fifty, a lot of them overlap on
what they have to offer.
To make finding the report you need easier, the next segment of the manual has a listing of some
of our more popular and widely used reports. If these reports still do not meet your needs, please
contact SuperSalon technical support for assistance finding a report that is right for you (Call 888458-1001 then press 1 or e-mail [email protected]).
238
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Production Report
Reports Tab ĺ Sales ĺProduction
’ž›ŽȱŘŗśȱȬȱProduction Report (View of Single Employee)
The primary purpose of the Production Report is to provide a detailed overview of individual
employee sales and performance for the requested date range. The Production Report displays a
list of the services performed by each individual employee, the Net and Gross worth of the services
performed, as well as the commission generated by the employee as well.
œ’Žȱ›˜–ȱ˜ěŽ›’—ȱŠȱŽŠ’•Žȱ•˜˜”ȱŠȱ‘Ž’›ȱœŽ›Ÿ’Œ’—ȱ™Ž›˜›–Š—ŒŽǰȱ‘Žȱ›˜žŒ’˜—ȱŽ™˜›ȱŠ•œ˜ȱ˜ěŽ›œȱ
™›˜žŒȱœŠ•ŽȱŒ˜ž—œȱŠœȱ Ž••ȱŠœȱ’ĞȱŒŽ›’ęŒŠŽȦŒŠ›ȱœŠ•ŽȱŒ˜ž—œǯ
Located below the actual employee sales is a listing of their production, other, and total hours. This is
further augmented by other servicing statistics such as individual Male and Female customer count,
total haircuts, PPH, PPG, Average Service Time, and etc.
Ў›ȱŽŸŽ›¢ȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ‘Šœȱ‹ŽŽ—ȱ’œ™•Š¢Žȱ’—’Ÿ’žŠ••¢ǰȱ‘Žȱ™›˜žŒ’˜—ȱ›Ž™˜›ȱŽ—Ž›ŠŽȱœŠ’œ’Œœȱ˜›ȱ
‘ŽȱŽ—’›Žȱ•˜ŒŠ’˜—ȱ’—ȱ‘Žȱ˜›–ȱ˜ȱ˜›Žȱ˜Š•œǯȱ‘ŽȱœŽ›Ÿ’Œ’—ȱœŠ’œ’ŒœȱŠȱ‘Žȱ‹˜Ĵ˜–ȱŠ›ŽȱŠ—ȱŠŸŽ›ŠŽȱ˜ȱ
all of the employee statistics that were shown before.
’ž›ŽȱŘŗŜȱȬȱProduction Report (View of Store Totals)
239
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Salon Dashboard
Reports Tab ĺ Sales ĺSalon Dashboard
’ž›ŽȱŘŗŝȱȬȱSalon Dashboard Report
The Salon Dashboard report is designed to provide an overview of your entire location's performance
˜›ȱ‘Žȱ›ŽšžŽœŽȱŠŽȱ›Š—Žǯȱ‘Žȱ›Ž™˜›ȱ’œȱ‹›˜”Ž—ȱ’—˜ȱŽ’‘ȱ’쎛Ž—ȱœŽŒ’˜—œǰȱ™›˜Ÿ’’—ȱŠȱ•˜˜”ȱ
at Sales data, Closeout Information, Statistics (which include Ticket Average, Guest Counts, PPH,
Employee Hours, etc.), Guest Details, Employee Details, Service Details, Top Brands sold, and Top 10
Discounts used.
Due to the nature of the report, it is not as detailed as some of the other ones found within
SuperSalon, but it is an excellent report to use when all that is needed is a quick overview of a
particular location's performance.
—•Žœœȱ˜‘Ž› ’œŽȱœ™ŽŒ’ꮍȱǻžŒ‘ȱŠœȱ’—ȱ‘ŽȱŒŠœŽȱ˜ȱ›ŸŒȱ˜––ǞǼǰȱŠ••ȱ‘Žȱꐞ›Žœȱ•’œŽȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ›Ž™˜›ȱ
Š›Žȱ‹ŠœŽȱ˜ěȱ˜ȱŽȱœŠ•Žœǯ
240
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Daily Report
Reports Tab ĺ Sales ĺDaily Report
’ž›ŽȱŘŗŞȱȬȱDaily Report
The Daily Report provides a brief overview of the location's performance for the day requested. The
report is broken into six sections.
‘ŽȱꛜȱœŽŒ’˜—ȱ’œȱŠȱ•˜˜”ȱŠȱ‘ŽȱŒ•˜œŽ˜žȱ˜Š•œȱ˜›ȱ‘ŽȱŠ¢ȱŠ—ȱ ‘Ž‘Ž›ȱ˜›ȱ—˜ȱ‘Žȱ•˜ŒŠ’˜—ȱ Šœȱœ‘˜›ǯȱ
If the closeout is not performed properly, then the information listed on this report will be incorrect.
The Summary section provides a brief overview of sales, while customer statistics give a break down
of visitor information. If customer demographics is not enabled, then all customers are assumed to be
unknown.
241
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
The discount sections provide a look at the discounts used at the location for the day as well as which
employees used the discounts.
The Hourly Work Details section, what could be considered the primary focus of the report, is
designed to give an hour by hour break down of customer visitation. The section lists how many
tickets were entered into the system during the displayed period of time, and who the ticket was
assigned to. It also displays how many look and walks were entered into the system during the same
period of time.
‘Žȱ™ž›™˜œŽȱ˜ȱ‘’œȱ’œȱ˜ȱŠœœ’œȱ ’‘ȱꗍ’—ȱ‘Žȱ‹žœ’Žœȱ ˜›”ȱ‘˜ž›œȱ˜›ȱ‘Žȱ•˜ŒŠ’˜—ǯȱ‘Žȱ›Ž™˜›ȱ
counts how many production hours were used (pooled together from all of the employees working
Šȱ‘Žȱ’–ŽǼȱŠ—ȱ˜ěŽ›œȱœžŽœ’˜—œȱ˜—ȱ‘˜ ȱ–Š—¢ȱŠ’’˜—Š•ȱ‘˜ž›œȱ–’‘ȱ—ŽŽȱ˜ȱ‹ŽȱœŒ‘Žž•ŽȱŠȱ‘Žȱ
location to prevent customer loss.
242
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
End of Day
Reports Tab ĺ Sales ĺEnd of Day
’ž›ŽȱŘŗşȱȬȱEnd of Day (Ticket Listing)
The End of Day report displays every single ticket that was checked in for the requested date. The
employee who performed the service or sold the product is listed, as well as the customer name,
service time, and Check-Out time. The report is primarily used to circumvent using the search sales
screen to bring up ticket information, since by using End of Day, all of the information is loaded and
ready to view.
’ž›ŽȱŘŘŖȱȬȱEnd of Day (Voids and Total Transaction Info)
Ў›ȱ‘Žȱ’Œ”Žȱ’—˜›–Š’˜—ȱ’œȱ•’œŽǰȱ‘Žȱ—ȱ˜ȱŠ¢ȱ›Ž™˜›ȱŒŠ•Œž•ŠŽœȱ‘ŽȱŽȱ˜Š•œȱŠ—ȱŽ™˜œ’ȱ
’—˜›–Š’˜—ȱ˜›ȱ‘ŽȱŠ¢ǯȱ‘ŽȱŽ™˜œ’ȱ’—˜›–Š’˜—ȱ’œȱ‹ŠœŽȱ˜ěȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱŒ•˜œŽ˜žȱ˜Š•œǰȱœ˜ȱ‹Ž˜›Žȱ‘Žȱ
information will populate, the closeout will need to be performed.
243
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Deposit Summary
Reports Tab ĺ Sales ĺDeposit Summary
’ž›ŽȱŘŘŗȱȬȱDeposit Summary Report
The Deposit Summary report provides a look at the deposit information for the month requested. In
order for the report to display accurate information, the close out for each day in the requested month
—ŽŽœȱ˜ȱ‹ŽȱŒ˜–™•ŽŽȱ™›˜™Ž›•¢ǯȱž——’—ȱ‘Žȱ›Ž™˜›ȱ˜—ȱŠȱ–˜—‘ȱ‘Šȱ‘Šœȱ—˜ȱꗒœ‘Žȱ ’••ȱ—˜ȱ‘ŠŸŽȱ
Š—¢ȱŠŸŽ›œŽȱŠěŽŒœǰȱ‹žȱ›ž——’—ȱ‘Žȱ›Ž™˜›ȱ ‘Ž—ȱ‘Ž›Žȱ’—Œ˜–™•ŽŽȱ˜›ȱ’—ŠŒŒž›ŠŽȱŒ•˜œŽ˜žœȱ ’••ȱ‘›˜ ȱ
˜ěȱ‘Žȱ˜Š•ȱŒŠ•Œž•Š’˜—ȱŠȱ‘ŽȱŽ—ǯ
‘ŽȱŽ™˜œ’ȱ’—˜›–Š’˜—ȱ˜›ȱ›Ž’ǰȱŽ‹’ǰȱ‘˜—ŽǰȱŠ—ȱ’Ğȱ™Š¢–Ž—œȱ’œȱ‹ŠœŽȱ˜ěȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ’ȬŠ¢ȱŠ—ȱ
—ȬŠ¢ȱŒ˜ž—ȱꎕœȱ˜—ȱ‘ŽȱŒ•˜œŽ˜žȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯȱ‘ŽȱŠœ‘ȱŠ—ȱŽ™˜œ’ȱꎕȱŠ›Žȱ‹ŠœŽȱ˜ěȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱŠœ‘ȱ
Deposit section of the Deposit Summary of the Closeout screen. These two numbers should always
be the same.
Each day listed in the report is also a link. When the desired date is selected, it takes you to the Daily
Report for that day.
244
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Monthly Financial Report
Reports Tab ĺ Sales ĺMonthly Financial Report
’ž›ŽȱŘŘŘȱȬȱMonthly Financial Report
The Monthly Financial Report provides a look at the Total Gross and Net sales for the location,
coupled with the closeout totals for each date in the month selected. The primary purpose of the
report is to assist with quickly identifying which days were the most productive for the location as
Ž••ȱŠœȱœ™˜Ĵ’—ȱ˜ŸŽ›ŠŽœȱ˜›ȱœ‘˜›ŠŽœȱ ’‘ȱ‘ŽȱŒ•˜œŽ˜žȱ˜›ȱŽŠŒ‘ȱŠ¢ȱ’—ȱ‘Žȱ–˜—‘ǯ
‘Žȱ˜Š•œȱ˜›ȱŽŠŒ‘ȱŠ¢ȱŠ›ŽȱŠŽȱ˜Ž‘Ž›ȱŠȱ‘Žȱ‹˜Ĵ˜–ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ–’ȱœŽŒ’˜—ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ›Ž™˜›ȱŠœȱŠȱ–˜—‘•¢ȱ
total. Because this section is compartmentalized, it is easy to identify Total Gross and Net, as well as
‘Žȱ›˜œœȱŠ—ȱŽȱ˜›ȱ™›˜žŒȱŠ—ȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱœŠ•Žœȱ›Žœ™ŽŒ’ŸŽ•¢ǯȱŠ¡ŽœȱŠ—ȱ’ĞȱŒŽ›’ęŒŠŽȦŒŠ›ȱœŠ•ŽœȱŠ›Žȱ
also tracked separately.
The information in the closeout totals section is dependent on the closeout information entered under
Manager Tab ĺ Closeoutǯȱȱ‘ŽȱŒ•˜œŽ˜žȱ˜›ȱŠȱ™Š›’Œž•Š›ȱŠŽȱ’œȱ’—Œ˜››ŽŒǰȱ‘Ž—ȱ’ȱ ’••ȱ‘›˜ ȱ˜ěȱ‘Žȱ
total calculation at the end.
‘ŽȱŒ•˜œŽ˜žȱ˜Š•œȱœŽŒ’˜—ȱŠ•œ˜ȱŒ˜—Š’—œȱ‘ŽȱŽ™˜›ŽȱƸȦȬȱŠ—ȱŒžŠ•ȱƸȦȬȱꎕœǯȱ‘ŽœŽȱꎕœȱŠ›ŽȱžœŽȱ
˜ȱŽŽ›–’—Žȱ’ȱ‘Ž›Žȱ ŠœȱŠ—¢ȱŠŠȱ•˜œœȱž›’—ȱ‘Žȱž™•˜Šȱ˜›ȱ‘ŽȱŠŽȱ’—ȱšžŽœ’˜—ǯȱ‘ŽœŽȱ ˜ȱꎕœȱ
should always match in number.
245
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
’ž›ŽȱŘŘřȱȬȱMonthly Financial (Top 5 Discounts)
The last segment of the Monthly Financial Report is a list of the top 5 discounts used for the selected
month. This sections displays the amount discounted for each day in the selected month, breaking it
up by discount. At the end of the section, it lists the total amount discounted for the entire month by
’œŒ˜ž—ǰȱŠ—ȱ‘Ž—ȱŒ˜–‹’—Žœȱ‘Žȱꐞ›Žȱ˜›ȱ‘Žȱ˜Š•ȱŠ–˜ž—ȱ’œŒ˜ž—ŽȱŠ–˜—ȱ‘Žȱ꟎ǯ
ŽŒŠžœŽȱ‘’œȱœŽŒ’˜—ȱ’œȱ˜—•¢ȱ‹ŠœŽȱ˜ěȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ˜™ȱ꟎ȱ’œŒ˜ž—œǰȱ‘Žȱ˜Š•ȱŠ–˜ž—ȱ’œŒ˜ž—Žȱꐞ›Žȱ
can potentially be less than the discount column provided in the top section of the report under
service and product sales.
246
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Service Sales
Reports Tab ĺ Services ĺService Sales
’ž›ŽȱŘŘŚȱȬȱService Sales Report
The Service Sales report provides a list of the services sold for the requested date range. The report is
‹›˜”Ž—ȱ’—˜ȱ ˜ȱœŽŒ’˜—œǯȱ‘ŽȱꛜȱœŽŒ’˜—ȱ’œ™•Š¢œȱŠȱ•’œȱ˜ȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽœȱœ˜•ȱ‹¢ȱŒŠŽ˜›¢ȱ ‘’•Žȱ‘ŽȱœŽŒ˜—ȱ
section displays a list of the services sold by name.
Both sections provide an overview of gross and net income, as well as a list of refunds, discounts,
and voids.
The Sales by Category section is susceptible to reporting incorrect data if a service's category is
Œ˜—ꐞ›Žȱ’—Œ˜››ŽŒ•¢ǯȱŽŒŠžœŽȱ˜ȱ‘’œǰȱ’ȱ’œȱ’–™˜›Š—ȱ˜ȱ–Š”Žȱœž›Žȱ‘ŠȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽœȱœŽȱž™ȱ’—ȱ‘Žȱœ¢œŽ–ȱ
are assigned to the right category.
247
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Product Sales Report
Reports Tab ĺ Products ĺProduct Sales
’ž›ŽȱŘŘśȱȬȱProduct Sales Report
The Product Sales Report provides a list of products sold for the requested date range. The report
has the ability to narrow the search results by vendor, brand, and category. The results can then be
organized further by clicking on one of the blue headers at the top.
ȱŠȱ™›˜žŒȱ Šœȱœ˜•ȱ–˜›Žȱ‘Š—ȱ˜—ŒŽȱž›’—ȱ‘Žȱ›ŽšžŽœŽȱŠŽȱ›Š—Žǰȱ‘ŽȱŠœȱ˜•ȱꎕȱ’œ™•Š¢œȱ‘Žȱ
last time the product was sold during the displayed dates.
Aside from listing each product individually and the number of times it was sold, the report also
adds together the total product cost for the displayed items, as well as the net worth they brought in
Šœȱ˜™™˜œŽȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ›ŽŠ’•ȱŸŠ•žŽȱŽę—Žȱ’—ȱ‘Ž’›ȱ™›˜žŒȱœŽž™ǯȱ—ȱ‘ŽȱŽŸŽ—ȱ’œŒ˜ž—œȱ Ž›ŽȱžœŽȱ ‘Ž—ȱ
‘Žȱ™›˜žŒœȱ Ž›Žȱ™ž›Œ‘ŠœŽǰȱ‘Ž—ȱŽȱŠ—ȱŽŠ’•ȱ ’••ȱ‹Žȱ’쎛Ž—ǯ
For all intents and purposes, Retail functions as Gross on the Product Sales report.
248
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Product Sales Detail
Reports Tab ĺ Products ĺProduct Sales Detail
’ž›ŽȱŘŘŜȱȬȱProduct Sales Detail Report
The Product Sales Detail report lists individual product sales for the requested date range. Along
with each product sale is also the employee who sold the item as well as the customer who made the
purchase. The time of the sale, as well as the ticket ID for the displayed date is also listed.
‘Ž—ȱ‘Žȱ›Ž™˜›ȱ’œȱ‹›˜ž‘ȱž™ǰȱ‘Žȱ˜™’˜—ȱ˜ȱ’œ™•Š¢ȱœ™ŽŒ’ęŒȱ‹›Š—œȱ˜›ȱŠ••ȱ˜ȱ‘Ž–ȱ’œȱŠŸŠ’•Š‹•Žǯȱ‘Žȱ
option to only show certain employees is also given.
This report is primarily used when it's necessary to identify employees who sold a particular item
and when that item was purchased.
249
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Inventory Report
Reports Tab ĺ Products ĺInventory
’ž›ŽȱŘŘŝȱȬȱInventory Report (Inventory View)
The Inventory Report is actually multiple reports combined, all designed to assist with managing
Salon Inventory. In order to get the most out of the inventory report, it is important to make sure
that the cost and retail value for each item is properly assigned, as well as the correct category. For
’—˜›–Š’˜—ȱ˜—ȱŒ˜—ꐞ›’—ȱŒ˜œȱŠ—ȱ›ŽŠ’•ȱ˜›ȱ™›˜žŒœȱ’—ȱ‘ŽȱSuperSalon system, please see
“Products” on page 140.
Before the Inventory Report can be generated, a starting and ending date range must be selected.
Most commonly, the start and end of the month are used, though this can be changed if the location
‘ŠœȱŠȱ’쎛Ž—ȱ’—ŸŽ—˜›¢ȱŒ¢Œ•Žǯ
‘ŽȱꛜȱœŽŒ’˜—ȱ‘ŠȱŠ™™ŽŠ›œȱŠĞŽ›ȱœŽ•ŽŒ’—ȱȈŽ—Ž›ŠŽȱŽ™˜›Ȉȱ’œȱ‘ŽȱȈ—ŸŽ—˜›¢ȱ’Ž Ȉǯȱ‘’œȱŸ’Ž ȱ
displays the starting inventory count and it's associated cost. If "Only Show Active Products" is set
to Yes, then only items that are currently active and had an in stock count of 1 or higher for the start
date range will be counted towards the starting inventory. If "Only Show Active..." is set to No, then
products that are currently inactive, but you did possess at the time will be included in the count.
’œŽȱ‹Ž•˜ ȱ‘ŽȱŠ›’—ȱ—ŸŽ—˜›¢ȱŸŠ•žŽȱ’œȱ‘ŽȱŽŒŽ’ŸŽǰȱ“žœŽȱ—ǰȱŠ—ȱ›Š—œŽ››Žȱ—ȱŸŠ•žŽœǯȱ
These values are populated based on if any of the actions were performed between the Start and End
date range. The cost associated with each action is also listed.
Ž¡ȱ’œȱ“žœŽȱžǰȱ›Š—œŽ››ŽȱžǰȱŠ—ȱ˜•ǯȱ‘ŽœŽȱŸŠ•žŽœȱŠ›ŽȱŠ•œ˜ȱ™˜™ž•ŠŽȱ‹ŠœŽȱ˜—ȱ˜ȱ‘Ž’›ȱ
corresponding actions were performed. The associated cost for them is listed as well.
The last section is the Ending Inventory Count. The associated cost for the Ending Inventory is also
displayed.
ŠŒ‘ȱ‘ŽŠŽ›ȱǻŠ›’—ǰȱŽŒŽ’ŸŽǰȱ“žœŽȱ—ǰȱ›Š—œŽ››Žȱ—ǰȱ“žœŽȱžǰȱ›Š—œŽ››Žȱžǰȱ˜•ǰȱ
and Ending) is also a link to a full sized report for it's relevant topic. By selecting one, it will load
another report within the inventory report providing a list of the products that are part of the count.
Each product that appears as part of it's relevant header break down can also be selected to provide
a life time history of the product within the SuperSalon system. This product detail report will
provide a list of all the inventory transactions that took place for the item.
250
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
’ž›ŽȱŘŘŞȱȬȱ—ŸŽ—˜›¢ȱŽ™˜›DZȱŠ›’—ǰȱŽŒŽ’ŸŽǰȱ“žœŽȱ—ǰȱŠ—ȱ›Š—œferred In detailed views
251
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
’ž›ŽȱŘŘşȱȬȱ—ŸŽ—˜›¢ȱŽ™˜›DZȱ“žœŽȱžǰȱ›Š—œŽ››Žȱžǰȱ›˜žŒȱŠ•ŽœǰȱŠ—ȱ—’—ȱ
Inventory
252
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Discount Usage
Reports Tab ĺ Discounts ĺDiscount Usage
’ž›ŽȱŘřŖȱȬȱDiscount Usage Report
The discount usage report provides a list of the discounts that were used during the date range
requested. The report lists each discount individually as well as the number of times they were used.
Included is also the number of "New" customers they were used on as well as "Repeat" customers, as
well as the percentage of New customers who used the discount as opposed to Repeat visitors.
‘Ž—ȱ‘Žȱ›Ž™˜›ȱ’œȱꛜȱ‹›˜ž‘ȱž™ǰȱ‘Žȱ˜™’˜—ȱ˜ȱœŽ•ŽŒȱŠȱœ™ŽŒ’ęŒȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ’œȱŠ•œ˜ȱŠŸŠ’•Š‹•Žǯȱ‘’œȱ
allows the report runner to see which employees were using which discount.
253
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Schedule Forecasting
Reports Tab ĺ Payroll ĺSchedule Forecasting
’ž›ŽȱŘřŗȱȬȱSchedule Forecasting Report
‘ŽȱœŒ‘Žž•’—ȱ˜›ŽŒŠœŽ›ȱ’œȱŽœ’—Žȱ˜ȱ–ŠŒ‘ȱœŠĜ—ȱ˜ȱŒžœ˜–Ž›ȱ̘ œǯȱ‘ŽȱŒ‘Žž•’—ȱ˜›ŽŒŠœŽ›ȱ
žœŽœȱ™ŠœȱŒžœ˜–Ž›ȱ›ŠĜŒȱ˜ȱŽœ’–ŠŽȱžž›ŽȱœŠ•ŽœȱŠ¢ȱ‹¢ȱŠ¢ǯȱ‘ŽȱŽœ’–ŠŽȱ›ŠĜŒȱ’œȱ’œ™•Š¢Žȱ’—ȱ
terms of estimated gross sales per hour and is then divided by the productivity goal to calculate the
number of employees needed at any given time. Walk-outs and Look n' Walks can also be factored in.
The lightly shaded columns are gross estimated sales for the hour. This column is the average net
sales generated from tickets started during that hour over the date range run. The darker shaded
columns are the number of employees needed for the hour. It is calculated by dividing the number
›˜–ȱ‘ŽȱꛜȱŒ˜•ž–—ȱ‹¢ȱ‘Žȱœœž–Žȱ›˜žŒ’˜—ȱ›ŠŽȱŽ—Ž›Žȱ™›’˜›ȱ˜ȱ›ž——’—ȱ‘Žȱ›Ž™˜›ǯȱ‘ŽœŽȱŠ›Žȱ
expressed in decimals. We know you cannot have 3.65 employees working, but you can round up or
down according to your needs.
When running the report, the date range may be as long or as short as need, although it is
recommended you run one for a similar period of time to the what you are considering scheduling
for. An example of this would be looking at last year's holiday data when planning for the current
year.
The Forecaster considers all past sales that occurred when the customer walked in, not when they
Ž›ŽȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽǯȱ‘’œȱŠ••˜ œȱ‘ŽȱŽœ’–ŠŽœȱ˜ȱ‹Žȱ‹ŠœŽȱ˜ěȱ˜ȱ ‘Ž—ȱ‘ŽȱŒžœ˜–Ž›ȱŠŒžŠ••¢ȱ Š—Žȱ˜ȱ
receive their service, not when it was actually received.
For the purposes of this report, walk-outs are considered tickets that were placed in waiting and
‘Ž—ȱœž‹œŽšžŽ—•¢ȱŸ˜’Žǯȱ˜˜”ȱȇȱŠ•”œȱŠ›ŽȱŒžœ˜–Ž›œȱ ‘˜ȱŽ—Ž›Žȱ‘ŽȱœŠ•˜—ȱ‹žȱ•ŽĞȱ‹Ž˜›ŽȱŠȱ’Œ”Žȱ
could be created. The walk value is the assumed loss the location is taking with each lost customer.
If you are unsure as to if you have accurately been keeping track of Look n' Walks (ȃžĴ˜—œȱ˜ž—ȱ
in SuperSalon” on page 13) it is possible to multiply the walk-out value by 2. This will double the
number of tickets that are considered lost for purposes of running the report.
254
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
The last variable is the Assume production rate. Enter what you assume to be a reasonable rate of
production for your employees. The closer this number is to what your employees actually perform
Šǰȱ‘Žȱ‹ŽĴŽ›ȱ‘Žȱ›Žœž•œȱ ’••ȱ‹Žȱ˜—ȱ‘Žȱ›Ž™˜›ǯ
If you are unsure as to what number to use, the Net Services a Hour section of Store Totals on the
“Production Report”, ran for the same date range as the schedule forecaster, provides an accurate
view of what employee performance is at on average.
255
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Timecard
Reports Tab ĺ Payroll ĺTimecard
The Timecard Report keeps track of employee clock ins and outs. It provides a listing of how many
hours an employee worked for the selected pay period, broken up by the individual day.
The Original Hours listing is how many hours the employee actually clocked in for, including
overtime. The Regular Hours listing is how many hours they were clocked in for that did not go into
overtime. Overtime hours is how many hours they worked that could be considered overtime. The
Break listing is used for when automatic breaks are enabled or when one is entered in manually. It
•’œœȱ‘˜ ȱ•˜—ȱ‘Žȱ‹›ŽŠ”ȱ Šœȱ˜›ǯȱ™•’ȱ‘’Ğœȱ•’œœȱœ™•’ȱœ‘’Ğȱ‘˜ž›œǯȱ’’˜—Š•ȱ
˜ž›œȱ’œȱŠȱ•’œ’—ȱ˜ȱŠ—¢ȱ
additional time added (for whatever reason). Holiday and Vacation hours are also listed.
The Total Hours column is calculated by adding together all of the other columns with the exception
˜ȱ›’’—Š•ȱ
˜ž›œǯȱ‘ŽȱŽŽ”•¢ȱ
˜ž›œȱŒ˜•ž–—ȱ’œȱŒŠ•Œž•ŠŽȱ‹ŠœŽȱ˜ěȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ›Žž•Š›ȱ‘˜ž›œȱ’–Žǯȱȱ
˜ŸŽ›’–ŽȱŠĞŽ›ȱ˜›¢ȱ‘˜ž›œȱŠȱ ŽŽ”ȱ’œȱŽ—Š‹•ŽǰȱŠ—¢ȱ’–Žȱ‘Šȱœ™’••œȱ™Šœȱ‘Šȱ™˜’—ȱ ’••ȱ‹ŽȱŒ˜—œ’Ž›Žȱ
overtime hours as well.
If there are any errors, the Timecard entry for the day will appear in red.
Finally, the report also lets you know if the entry for the day was edited.
’ž›ŽȱŘřŘȱȬȱEmployee Timecard Report
Aside from displaying employee timeclock information, the report is also where you can make
necessary changes to clock ins and outs. To do so, select the blue link representing the day under the
›ŽšžŽœŽȱ™Š¢™Ž›’˜ȱŠĞŽ›ȱŽ—Ž›Š’—ȱ‘Žȱ›Ž™˜›ǯȱ‘’œȱ ’••ȱŠ”Žȱ¢˜žȱ‘ŽȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ’–ŽŒŠ›ȱŽŠ’•ȱ
View.
256
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
The Employee Timecard Detail View allows quick
edits to employee clock in and outs. In and Outs
appear as sets. In the event an employee forgets to
Œ•˜Œ”ȱ˜žǰȱœŽȱ‘Žȱ’ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱ—Ž¡ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ›Ž•ŽŸŠ—ȱ˜žȱ
Ž—›¢ǯȱ‘Žȱ’ȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱŒ‘Š—Žœȱ’—˜ȱŠȱœŠŸŽȱ‹žĴ˜—ȱŠ—ȱ
a text box appears next to the out entry. This allows
the user to enter in the desired clock out time. Once
the desired time has been input into the system, select
‘ŽȱŠŸŽȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯ
If an employee forgot to clock in for the day, select the
ȱž—Œ‘ȱ—Ȧžȱ‹žĴ˜—ǯȱ‘’œȱ ’••ȱŒ›ŽŠŽȱŠ—ȱ—ȱŠ—ȱ
Out set. From there, follow the same steps that were
listed above to enter the time the employee started
˜›”ȱŠ—ȱ‘Ž—ȱ•ŽĞǯ
If you are unsure as to what time the employee
ŠŒžŠ••¢ȱœŠ›Žȱ ˜›”’—ǰȱ‘Ž›Žȱ’œȱŠȱꎕȱŒŠ••Žȱ‘Žȱ
Ȉ
Ž•™Ž›Ȉȱ‘Šȱ’œ™•Š¢œȱ‘Žȱꛜȱ’–Žȱ‘ŽȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ Šœȱ
recorded as having done something in the system as
Ž••ȱŠœȱ‘Žȱ•Šœȱ’–Žǯȱ‘’œȱŒŠ—ȱŠ•œ˜ȱŠœœ’œȱ ’‘ȱœ™˜Ĵ’—ȱ
employees who may be under performing or staying
on the clock for longer than they should be.
’ž›ŽȱŘřřȱȬȱEmployee Timecard Detail
‘Žȱ’–ŽŒŠ›ȱŽŠ’•ȱŒ›ŽŽ—ȱŠ••˜ œȱŠ’’˜—Š•ȱŠ“žœ–Ž—œȱ˜ȱ‹Žȱ–ŠŽȱ
˜ȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ’–Žǯȱ••ȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱŠ“žœ–Ž—œȱŠ›ŽȱŒ˜—œ’Ž›Žȱ˜—Ȭ›˜žŒ’˜—ȱ
for purposes of payroll. Break Time will actually reduce an employee's
‘˜ž›œȱ˜›ȱ‘ŽȱœŽ•ŽŒŽȱŠŽȱ ‘’•Žȱ“žœȱ›˜žŒ’˜—ȱ’–Žȱœ‘’Ğœȱ‘Žȱ
entered time from their Production hours to Non-Production.
257
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Payroll
Reports Tab ĺ Payroll ĺPayroll
’ž›ŽȱŘřŚȱȬȱPayroll Report
The payroll report is designed to calculate how much money your employees are owed at the end of
each payperiod. The report is broken down into three sections.
‘ŽȱꛜȱœŽŒ’˜—ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ™Š¢›˜••ȱ›Ž™˜›ȱ•’œœȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ‘˜ž›œȱ˜›ȱ‘ŽȱœŽ•ŽŒŽȱŠŽȱ›Š—Žǯȱ–™•˜¢ŽŽœȱ ‘˜ȱ
are considered receptionists (those who are not set to "Performs Services" in their employee setup) are
•’œŽȱꛜǯȱȱ˜Š•ȱ˜ȱ‘Ž’›ȱ‘˜ž›œȱŠ—ȱ‘Žȱ™Ž›ŒŽ—ŠŽȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ˜Š•ȱ‘˜ž›œȱ ˜›”Žȱ ‘’Œ‘ȱ‹Ž•˜—ȱ˜ȱ‘’œȱ
™Š›’Œž•Š›ȱ›˜ž™ȱ’œȱ‘Ž—ȱ•’œŽǯȱЎ›ȱ‘Žȱ›ŽŒŽ™’˜—’œœȱŠ›Žȱ•’œŽǰȱ‘Žȱ—Ž¡ȱ›˜ž™ȱ•’œŽȱŠ›Žȱœ¢•’œǯȱ‘Žȱ
stylist grouping consists of employees who are enabled to perform services in their employee setup.
Like the receptionist group, this group also provides a total list of hours and the percentage of hours
which belong to their subset.
The next section of the report is referred to non-production details. This section provides a listing of
ěȱ•˜˜›ȱ“žœ–Ž—œǯȱěȱ•˜˜›ȱ“žœ–Ž—œȱŒ˜–Žȱ›˜–ȱ‘ŽȱȈ“žœȱ›˜žŒ’˜—ȱ’–ŽȈȱœŽŒ’˜—ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ
–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ’–ŽŒŠ›ȱŽŠ’•ȱœŒ›ŽŽ—ǯȱ‘ŽœŽȱŠ“žœ–Ž—œȱŠ›ŽȱŠ•›ŽŠ¢ȱŒŠ•Œž•ŠŽȱ’—˜ȱ‘Žȱœ˜›ŽȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ
‘˜ž›œȱ•’œŽȱ’—ȱ‘ŽȱꛜȱœŽŒ’˜—ǯȱ‘’œȱ™Š›’Œž•Š›ȱŠ›ŽŠȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ›Ž™˜›ȱ’œȱ™ž›Ž•¢ȱ˜›ȱŒ˜—ŸŽ—’Ž—ŒŽǯ
258
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
The last section of the report is the Sales & Commission totals. This section of the report actually lists
the amount owed to each employee as part of the service and product sale breakdown. Unlike the
other sections of the report, this section could be considered four separate parts.
‘Žȱꛜȱ™Š›ȱ•’œœȱ‘ŽȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ’—˜›–Š’˜—DZȱ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱǰȱŠ–Žǰȱ˜Š•ȱž–‹Ž›ȱ˜ȱžŽœœȱŠœœ’œŽȱ
(pulled from their ticket count), their “Retail to Service [Net] (RtS)” and “Retail to Net (RTN)”.
‘Žȱ—Ž¡ȱœŽ–Ž—ȱ’œȱ‘Ž’›ȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱ˜Š•œDZȱŠ•ŽœȱǻŠ•œ˜ȱ”—˜ —ȱŠœȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱ“Commission”), “Sales Per
Hour (SpH)”, Commission generated from any commission plans assigned to the employee (the
Œ˜––’œœ’˜—ȱ™•Š—œȱ’—ȱšžŽœ’˜—ȱŒŠ•Œž•ŠŽȱ‘Ž’›ȱŠŠȱ‹ŠœŽȱ˜ěȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱœŠ•ŽœȱŠ–˜ž—ȱ•’œŽȱ’—ȱ‘’œȱ
section), Bonuses (also from any relevant commission plans), Request bonuses, and then a total of
Com., Bonus, and Req.
‘Žȱ—Ž¡ȱœŽ–Ž—ȱ’œȱ‘Ž’›ȱ™›˜žŒȱ˜Š•œDZȱŠ•ŽœȱǻŠ•œ˜ȱ”—˜ —ȱŠœȱ™›˜žŒȱ"Commission"), "SpH (Sales
Per Hour)", Commission generated from any commission plans assigned to the employee (the
Œ˜––’œœ’˜—ȱ™•Š—œȱ’—ȱšžŽœ’˜—ȱŒŠ•Œž•ŠŽȱ‘Ž’›ȱŠŠȱ‹ŠœŽȱ˜ěȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱœŽ›Ÿ’ŒŽȱœŠ•ŽœȱŠ–˜ž—ȱ•’œŽȱ’—ȱ‘’œȱ
section), Bonuses (also from any relevant commission plans), and then a total of Com., and Bonus.
The last segment is the actual amount due to employees. The pay rate listed is the same one as
in their individual employee setup. The base pay itself is calculated by multiplying their pay rate
‹¢ȱ‘Ž’›ȱ—˜—ȱ™›˜žŒ’˜—ȱŠ—ȱ™›˜žŒ’˜—ȱ‘˜ž›œǯȱȱ‘Ž›ŽȱŠ›Žȱ’쎛Ž—ȱ™Š¢ȱ›ŠŽœȱ˜›ȱ‘Žȱ ˜ȱ‘˜ž›œǰȱ
then they are calculated separately and then added together. Overtime pay is added to another
column, along with additional hours, vacation hours, and holiday pay. The next segment is their
commission total which is a combination of both service and product commission generated from
plans assigned to the employee. Next to last is the Gross pay which is Base pay + Add/Vac/Hol Pay +
Com (if combine Commission and Base is turned on). OT must be added in separately. Labor Cost is
generated by dividing the salon net sales by their gross pay.
259
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Audit Statistics
Reports Tab ĺ Audit ĺStatistics
’ž›ŽȱŘřśȱȬȱAudit Statistics Report
The Audit Statistics Report is designed to provide an extremely quick overview of employee
™Ž›˜›–Š—ŒŽǯȱ‘ŽȱꛜȱœŽŒ’˜—ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ›Ž™˜›ȱ•’œœȱ‘ŽȱŒ˜–™•ŽŽȱ’Œ”Žȱ˜Š•ȱ˜›ȱ‘Žȱ›ŽšžŽœŽȱŠŽȱ
range, along with the number of voids, redoes, and walks (customers who were in waiting and then
voided).
The next section is a list of various customer statistics followed by a section of employee statistics.
These statistics list the number of customers each employee assisted as well as their redo and request
percentages.
‘Žȱ•ŠœȱœŽ–Ž—ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ›Ž™˜›ȱ•’œœȱ‘ŽȱŠŒžŠ•ȱ›Ž˜ȱ’Œ”ŽœȱŠ•˜—ȱ ’‘ȱŸ˜’œȱŠ—ȱ–˜’ꮍȱ’Œ”Žœǯ
260
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Mini-Reports
Reports Tab ĺ Mini-Reports ĺSelect a Report
SuperSalon acknowledges that not every location may have access to a full size printer or that
sometimes employees simply want a quick look at their own, or perhaps the salon performance.
Because of this, the Mini-Reports are designed to print out of any of the supported SuperSalon
›ŽŒŽ’™ȱ™›’—Ž›œǯȱ‘’•Žȱ‘ŽœŽȱ›Ž™˜›œȱ–Š¢ȱ—˜ȱ˜ěŽ›ȱŠœȱ–žŒ‘ȱ’—˜›–Š’˜—ȱ˜›ȱŒžœ˜–’£Š’˜—ȱŠœȱ‘Ž’›ȱž••ȱ
size counterparts, they are designed to be extremely accessible for locations that wish to use them.
˜›ȱŒ˜—ŸŽ—’Ž—ŒŽǰȱŽŠŒ‘ȱ›Ž™˜›ȱŒŠ—ȱŽ’‘Ž›ȱ‹Žȱ™›’—Žȱ˜žȱ‹¢ȱœŽ•ŽŒ’—ȱ™›’—ȱ›Ž™˜›ȱ‹žĴ˜—ǰȱ˜›ȱ’ȱŒŠ—ȱ‹Žȱ
displayed directly to screen by selecting generate report.
Mini Production Report
The Mini Production Report provides a truncated form of the information found on it's full size
counterpart. The miniature version of the report allows the user to select individually employees to
run it for, or all of them.
Product Count List
The Mini Product Count List report provides a list of existing product counts. Next to each count is a
small box that can be used to write down annotations to assist with keeping track of salon inventory.
Product Price List
The Mini Product Price list provides a list of all active products and their associated retail price.
Salon Sales
The Mini Salon Sales report lists salon Service and Product net sales for the requested date range
along with the total amount of discounts. The report also lists customer statistics, service category
sales figures, and product brand sales figures.
Stylist Stats
The Mini Stylist Stats report lists the selected employee's Gross Services a Hour, their Retail to Net
percentage, their Gross Services value, their Net Retail value, and their ticket average.
Tip Detail
The Mini Tip Detail report lists tips received by the selected employee during the requested date
range.
Services List
The Mini Services List report provides a list of all services configured in the location along with their
associated price value.
Transaction
The Mini Transaction Report is actually broken into segments. Because this report can easily take a
while to compile the requested information, it is suggested that it be ran for date ranges consisting of
one day at a time.
The first section of this report provides the location deposit information for the requested date range.
The next section is a listing of the sales done, in Net, for the requested date range.
261
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
After the location sales are listed, the report then proceeds to list out the Net and Commission
sales stats for each employee who worked during the requested date range. The information here is
the same as what would be provided on the production report for the same date range, albeit in a
truncated form. After each employee is listed, the store totals are provided.
The Last section of the Mini Transaction Report displays every single service that was sold during
the requested date range. The number of services sold along with their Gross and Net value is listed,
coupled with any discounts and refunds as well. After each service is listed, the service totals are
provided.
Timecard
The Mini Timecard report provides a list of clock in and outs for the requested employee during the
requested pay period. Each day of the pay period is listed along with any associated clock in and
outs. At the bottom of each employee listing is their total production and Non-Production hours.
262
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Technician Daily Sales
Reports Tab ĺ Technician Daily Sales
’ž›ŽȱŘřŜȱȬȱTechnician Daily Sales Report
The Technician Daily Sales Report provides a list of the tickets completed at the location along with
‘ŽȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽȱ ‘˜ȱŒ˜–™•ŽŽȱ’ǯȱ¢ȱŽŠž•ǰȱ‘Žȱ›Ž™˜›ȱ ’••ȱ’œ™•Š¢ȱŽŸŽ›¢ȱŽ–™•˜¢ŽŽǰȱ‹žȱŠȱꕝŽ›ȱ’œȱ
provided to only display select technicians.
The report separates the individual line items on each ticket and displays them in their own row. It
Œ˜–‹’—ŽœȱŠ—¢ȱ’œŒ˜ž—œȱ‘Šȱ Ž›ŽȱŠĴŠŒ‘Žȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ’Ž–ȱŠȱ‘Žȱ’–Žȱ˜ȱœŠ•Žȱ˜ȱ‘ŽȱŽ—›¢ȱ‘ŠȱŠ™™ŽŠ›œȱ˜—ȱ
the report.
ȱ‘Žȱ‹˜Ĵ˜–ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ›Ž™˜›ȱ’œȱŠȱ•’œ’—ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ—ŽȱœŠ•Žœȱ˜›ȱŠ••ȱ‘Žȱ’œ™•Š¢Žȱ•’—Žȱ’Ž–œȱŠœȱ Ž••ȱŠœȱ‘Žȱ
total amount of tips credited to employees.
263
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
Reconcile Summary
Reports Tab ĺ Retail ĺReconcile Summary
’ž›ŽȱŘřŝȱȬȱReconcile Summary Report
The Reconcile Summary Report is another one of our popular reports, and an excellent example of
report overlap. Functionally, the Reconcile Report is the same as the Salon Dashboard report as far
Šœȱ‘ŽȱŒ˜›Žȱ’—˜›–Š’˜—ȱ™›ŽœŽ—Žȱ’œȱŒ˜—ŒŽ›—Žǯȱ‘Žȱ™›’–Š›¢ȱ’쎛Ž—ŒŽȱ‹Ž ŽŽ—ȱ‘Žȱ ˜ȱ›Ž™˜›œȱ’œȱ
how the information is displayed and the lack of any extra employee, customer, service, or discount
details.
264
SuperSalon Version 5 Software Guide
The Help Tab
We tried to make SuperSalonȱŠœȱŽŠœ¢ȱŠœȱ™˜œœ’‹•Žȱ˜ȱžœŽǰȱ‹žȱŠȱ’–Žœȱ¢˜žȱ–Š¢ȱꗍȱ¢˜žȱ˜—Ȃȱ
understand the use of a certain feature.
If you are having trouble with the installation or use of SuperSalon, registered users of
SuperSalon may obtain technical support by calling SuperSalon at one of the contacts below.
Ȋȱ ŽŒ‘—’ŒŠ•ȱž™™˜›ȱŠŸŠ’•Š‹•Žȱ˜—Š¢ȱ‘›˜ž‘ȱ›’Š¢ȱśȱŠ–ȱ˜ȱşDZřŖȱȱǰȱŠž›Š¢ȱŜȱŠ–ȱ˜ȱŝȱ
PM PST, Sunday 7 am to 7 PM.
Ȋȱ ˜’ŒŽDZȱŞŞŞȬŚśŞȬŗŖŖŗ
Ȋȱ ž™™˜›ȱŠ¡DZȱşŖŝȬřŝŚȬŖşŝŝ
Ȋȱ Ȭ–Š’•DZȱ[email protected]
Ȋȱ —Ž›—ŽDZȱ‘Ĵ™DZȦȦ ǯœž™Ž›œŠ•˜—ǯŒ˜–
265
Software License Agreement
THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU (EITHER AN INDIVIDUAL OR AN
ENTITY) AND ROGERS SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT INC. BY INSTALLING OR USING THE
SUPERSALON POS SOFTWARE, (THE SOFTWARE) YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND
BY AND TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. IF YOU SO
NOT AGREE TO BE BOUND BY AND TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE
AGREEMENT, RETURN PROMPTLY ANY SOFTWARE DISKS AND ACCOMPANYING
DOCUMENTATION TO ROGERS SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT INC. AND DISCONTINUE USE
OF THE SOFTWARE.
Grant of License
1. ž‹“ŽŒȱ˜ȱŠ—ȱ’—ȱŠŒŒ˜›Š—ŒŽȱ ’‘ȱ‘ŽȱŽ›–œȱŠ—ȱŒ˜—’’˜—œȱ˜ȱ‘’œȱ’ŒŽ—œŽȱ›ŽŽ–Ž—ǰȱ˜Ž›œȱ
˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽŸŽ•˜™–Ž—ȱ—Œǯȱ›Š—œȱ¢˜žǰȱŠ—ȱ¢˜žȱŠŒŒŽ™ǰȱŠȱ•’–’Žǰȱ—˜—Ȭ›Š—œŽ›Š‹•Žȱ•’ŒŽ—œŽȱ˜ȱ
žœŽȱž™Ž›Š•˜—ȱȱ˜Ğ Š›Žȱǻ‘Žȱȃ˜Ğ Š›ŽȄǼȱŠ—ȱ‘Žȱ˜Œž–Ž—Š’˜—ȱ˜—•¢ȱ˜›ȱ‘Žȱœ™ŽŒ’ęŒȱ
purposes set forth herein, and for no other purpose. The purpose for which the foregoing
•’–’Žǰȱ—˜—Ȭ›Š—œŽ›Š‹•Žȱ•’ŒŽ—œŽȱ’œȱ›Š—Žȱ’œȱ˜ȱ™Ž›–’ȱ¢˜žȱ˜ȱžœŽȱ‘Žȱ˜Ğ Š›Žȱ˜ȱŠœœ’œȱ¢˜žȱ’—ȱ
retail sales and management on a single computer or a single network supporting no more than
‘Žȱ™Ž›–’ĴŽȱ—ž–‹Ž›ȱ˜ȱ—Ž ˜›”ȱžœŽ›œȱŠȱ˜—Žȱ’–Žǯ
Use Restrictions
2. Without enlarging in any way the scope of the limited license set forth above, you agree not to
˜ȱŠ—¢ȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ˜••˜ ’—DZ
a) ˜™¢ȱ‘Žȱ˜Ğ Š›Žȱ˜›ȱŠ—¢ȱ™ž›™˜œŽȱ˜‘Ž›ȱ‘Š—ȱ˜›ȱ‹ŠŒ”ž™ȱ™ž›™˜œŽœDz
b) Copy the Documentation for any purpose;
c) œŽȱ‘Žȱ˜Ğ Š›Žȱ˜—ȱ˜›ȱŠ’—ȱŠŒŒŽœœȱ›˜–ȱ–˜›Žȱ‘Š—ȱ˜—Žȱ–ŠŒ‘’—ŽȱŠȱŠȱ’–Žǰȱ—˜›ȱ’—œŠ••ȱ’ȱ’—ȱ
a fashion that makes it available for running on or access from more than one machine at
Šȱ’–Žȱž—•Žœœǰȱ’—ȱŒ˜—“ž—Œ’˜—ȱ ’‘ȱ¢˜ž›ȱ™ž›Œ‘ŠœŽȱ˜ȱŠȱ•’ŒŽ—œŽȱ˜ȱžœŽȱ‘Žȱ˜Ğ Š›Žǰȱ¢˜žȱ‘ŠŸŽȱ
paid local area network or wide area network concurrent user fees and any other charges
’–™˜œŽȱ‹¢ȱ˜Ž›œȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽŸŽ•˜™–Ž—ȱ’—Œǯȱ˜›ȱœžŒ‘ȱžœŽȱ˜›ȱŠŒŒŽœœǯȱȱ¢˜žȱ‘ŠŸŽȱ™Š’ȱœžŒ‘ȱ
ŽŽœǰȱ‘Ž—ȱ¢˜žȱŠ›ŽŽȱ—˜ȱ˜ȱŠ••˜ ȱ–˜›Žȱ‘Š—ȱ‘Žȱ•’ŒŽ—œŽȱ—ž–‹Ž›ȱ˜ȱžœŽ›œȱ˜ȱžœŽȱ‘Žȱ˜Ğ Š›Žȱ
at one time. (“More than one machine” includes, among other things, use on a local area or
wide area network or a multi-use computer with several terminals;
d) Ž—ǰȱŽŠœŽǰȱ•’ŒŽ—œŽǰȱœž‹Ȭ•’ŒŽ—œŽǰȱ˜›ȱŠœœ’—ȱ‘ŽȱžœŽȱ˜ȱ‘Žȱ˜Ğ Š›Žȱ˜ȱ˜‘Ž›Dz
e) ŽŸŽ›œŽȱŽ—’—ŽŽ›ǰȱŽŒ˜–™’•Žǰȱ˜›ȱ’œœŽ–‹•Žȱ‘Žȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽDz
f) •Ž›ǰȱ˜’¢ǰȱ˜›ȱŠŠ™ȱ‘Žȱ˜Ğ Š›Žǯ
Copyright
3. ‘ŽȱŒ˜™¢›’‘ȱ’—ȱ‘Žȱ˜Ğ Š›Žǰȱ’—ȱ‘ŽȱŠŽȱ˜›ȱŽœȱ›Ž›’ŽŸŽǰȱ’œ™•Š¢ǰȱ˜›ȱ˜ž™žȱ‹¢ȱ‘Žȱ˜Ğ Š›Žȱ
Š—ȱ’—ȱ‘Žȱ˜Œž–Ž—Š’˜—ȱ’œȱ˜ —Žȱ‹¢ȱ˜Ž›œȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽŸŽ•˜™–Ž—ȱ—ŒǯȱŠ—ȱ’œȱ™›˜ŽŒŽȱ‹¢ȱ
the copyright laws of the United States of American and the laws of foreign countries pursuant
˜ȱ’—Ž›—Š’˜—Š•ȱ›ŽŠ’Žœǯȱ¡ŒŽ™ȱŠœȱ˜‘Ž› ’œŽȱ™Ž›–’ĴŽȱ‹¢ȱ‘’œȱ’ŒŽ—œŽȱ›ŽŽ–Ž—ȱŠ—ȱ‘Žȱ
provisions of 17 U.S.C. Section 107 governing fair use, you may not copy, reproduce, distribute, or
™›Ž™Š›ŽȱŽ›’ŸŠ’ŸŽȱ ˜›”œȱ‹ŠœŽȱž™˜—ȱ‘Žȱ˜Ğ Š›Žȱ˜›ȱ‘Žȱ˜Œž–Ž—Š’˜—ǰȱ˜›ȱ˜‘Ž› ’œŽȱŽ—ŠŽȱ
’—ȱŠ—¢ȱ˜‘Ž›ȱŠŒ’Ÿ’’ŽœȱŒ˜—ŒŽ›—’—ȱ‘Žȱ˜Ğ Š›Žȱ˜›ȱ‘Žȱ˜Œž–Ž—Š’˜—ȱ ‘’Œ‘ȱ’—›’—Žȱž™˜—ȱ˜›ȱ
Ÿ’˜•ŠŽȱ‘ŽȱŽ¡Œ•žœ’ŸŽȱ›’‘œȱ˜ȱ˜Ž›œȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽŸŽ•˜™–Ž—ȱ’—Œǯ
Limited Warranty and Limitation of Remedies
4. ˜Ž›œȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽŸŽ•˜™–Ž—ȱ—Œǯȱ Š››Š—œȱ‘Šȱ‘Žȱ–Ž’Šȱ˜—ȱ ‘’Œ‘ȱ‘Žȱ˜Ğ Š›Žȱ’œȱŽ•’ŸŽ›Žȱ
will be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of ninety (90) days from the
date of receipt by you. Your sole and exclusive remedy with respect to any defects shall be the
›’‘ȱ˜ȱ›Žž›—ȱœžŒ‘ȱ–ŠŽ›’Š•œǯȱ˜Ž›œȱ˜Ğ Š›ŽȱŽŸŽ•˜™–Ž—ȱ—ŒǯȂœȱœ˜•Žȱ•’Š‹’•’¢ȱ˜ȱ¢˜žȱœ‘Š••ȱ‹Žȱ
‘Žȱ›Ž™•ŠŒŽ–Ž—ȱ˜ȱŠ—¢ȱ’œ”ŽĴŽȱ‘Šȱ’œȱ—˜ȱ›ŽŽȱ›˜–ȱŽŽŒœȱ’—ȱ–ŠŽ›’Š•ȱŠ—ȱ ˜›”–Š—œ‘’™ǯ
No Other Warranties
5. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, ROGERS SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT
INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OR MERCHANTABILITY OR OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OTHER
THAN THOSE STATED IN PARAGRAPH 1. MOREOVER, OUR REMEDIES FOR BREACH
OF THE LIMITED WARRANTY ARE LIMITED TO THAT STATED IN PARAGRAPH 4. THIS
LIMITATION EXCLUDES RECOVERY OR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND.
No Liability for Consequential Damage
6. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL ROGERS SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT INC. OR ITS SUPPLIES BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES, WHETHER
DIRECT OR INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL, INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS, BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, BUSINESS INFORMATION, OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS ARISING OUT
OF OR THE INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ROGERS SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT INC. HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Professional Responsibility
7. You acknowledge that you are purchasing the licenses hereunder to assist you in your chosen
profession and you further acknowledge that it is your responsibility to review the results sugŽœŽȱ˜ȱ¢˜žȱ‹¢ȱ‘Žȱ˜Ğ Š›Žȱ™›’˜›ȱ˜ȱ‘Ž’›ȱ’–™•Ž–Ž—Š’˜—ǯ
Entire Agreement of the Parties
8. This License Agreement is the parties’ entire agreement. No representative of ROGERS SOFTȱȱǯȱ˜‘Ž›ȱ‘Š—ȱŠȱŒ˜›™˜›ŠŽȱ˜ĜŒŽȱ’œȱŠž‘˜›’£Žȱ˜ȱŠ•Ž›ȱ’œȱŽ›–œǰȱŠ—ȱ
Š—ȱ˜ĜŒŽȱ–Š¢ȱ˜ȱœ˜ȱ˜—•¢ȱ’—ȱ ›’’—ǯ
Governing Law
9. In case of any dispute, this License Agreement will be governed by the law of the State of Alaska. Copyright issues are an exception, as copyright is governed by the law of the United States.
No Assignment
10. The licenses granted pursuant to this License Agreement are personal to you, an under no
circumstances may be assigned or transferred by you without ROGERS SOFTWARE DEVELȱǯȂȱ™›’˜›ȱ ›’ĴŽ—ȱŒ˜—œŽ—ǯȱ—¢ȱŠĴŽ–™ŽȱŠœœ’—–Ž—ȱ˜›ȱ›Š—œŽ›ȱœ‘Š••ȱ‹Žȱ—ž••ȱŠ—ȱ
void and shall result in the immediate and automatic termination of the license granted under
this License Agreement.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement